PROJECT MANUAL
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
WORK ORDER # 26474764
January 6, 2017
Consumers Energy
Elevator Modernization
Macomb Service Center
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Scope of Work
Instructions to Bidders
Contract Sections:
Contract Form CSS 933
Contract Insurance Supplement
Hazardous Chemicals Addendum Form 417A
Vendor Payment – Financial EDI Payments Form 0651A
CMS Energy Corporation Third-Party Code of Conduct (2013)
Full Unconditional Waiver Form 735
Partial Unconditional Waiver Form 734
Sworn Statement Form 733
Project Change Notice (‘PCN’)
Proposal Form
Exhibit B
Contractor Safety Form
SPECIFICATIONS (EXHIBIT A-1):
Specifications:
DIVISION 0 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
00 07 10
General Conditions
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 33 00
Submittal Procedures
01 40 00
Quality Requirements
01 60 00
Product Requirements
01 70 00
Execution and Closeout Requirements
DIVISION 2 – DEMOLITION
02 41 19
Selective Demolition
07 13 29
Cutting and Patching
DIVISION 9 – PAINTING
19 90 00
Paints and Coatings
09 99 99
Finish Color Schedule
Division 14 – Conveying Equipment
01 42 10
Passenger Elevator
Division 22 – Plumbing
22 05 00
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 10
Plumbing Systems Testing, Cleaning, Water Treatment and Startup
22 05 53
Plumbing System Identification
22 06 00
Plumbing Specialties
Page 1 of 3
Table of Contents
Consumers Energy
Elevator Modernization
Macomb Service Center
22 10 00
Plumbing Piping
Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
23 05 00
HVAC Requirements
23 05 53
HVAC Identification
23 07 19
HVAC Pipe Insulation
23 23 00
Refrigerant Piping & Specialties
23 25 00
HVAC Systems Testing, Cleaning, Water Treatment and Startup
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 01 00
Basic Electrical Requirements
26 02 00
Minor Electrical Demolition for Remodeling
26 05 19
Building Wire and Cable
26 05 26
Grounding and Bonding
26 05 29
Supporting Devices
26 05 33.13
Conduit
26 05 53
Electrical Identification
26 22 13
Dry Type Transformers
26 24 16
Panelboards
26 27 26
Wiring Devices
26 28 13
Fuses
26 28 16
Enclosed Switches
26 51 13
Interior Lighting
DRAWINGS:
SK-16MAC1-TS1
TITLE SHEET
SK-16MAC1-A1
BASEMENT AREA ARCHITECTURAL PLAN
SK-16MAC1-M1
BASEMENT AREA MECHANICAL PLAN
SK-16MAC1-M2
MECHANICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS
SK-16MAC1-E1
BASEMENT AREA DEMOLITION PLAN
SK-16MAC1-E2
ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM - DEMOLITION
SK-16MAC1-E3
ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS:
3085X00119
ELEVATOR PIT DETAILS
3085X00301
FOUNDATION BASEMENT PLAN
APPENDIX A
Contractor Field Documentation for Electrical Power System Studies
Arc Flash Field Form
E3 Electrical Riser Diagram (highlighted)
Macomb Floor Plans (Ref)
Page 2 of 3
Table of Contents
Consumers Energy
Elevator Modernization
Macomb Service Center
New, Removed or Replaced Equipment Data Sheet
Submittal Schedule Template
Page 3 of 3
Table of Contents
Consumers Energy
Elevator Modernization
Macomb Service Center
EXHIBIT A
SCOPE OF WORK
New Construction Work, provide design and documentation for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
General: These specifications are intended to cover the modernization of one (1) passenger
hydraulic elevator in a first-class manner. The elevator is located at 35350 Kelly Rd., Clinton
Township, MI 48035
Elevator Modernization shall be complete in accordance with specification, “Section 14210 –
Passenger Elevator”, Work by the elevator subcontractor shall include but not limited to:
a. Provide material and labor to remove and replace elevator machine
b. Provide material and labor to remove and replace elevator controller
c. Provide material and labor to remove and replace jack assembly
d. Cab Assemblies
i. Elevator cab to be refurbished using Globe Architectural and Metal
ii. Refurbish shell like new
iii. Cab interior: Replace with new cab including new lighting and fronts. Provide 3
renderings of cab interiors with each bid submittal.
e. Elevator speed shall be increased from 50 FPM to 100 FPM
Non Elevator Work: All elevator work in the machine room, hoist way, and pits is the
responsibility of the General Contractor. This work includes, but is not limited to all electrical,
drywall, fire safety, and air temperature control work. This work also includes all building code
upgrades necessary due to the elevator modernization.
Clean elevator machine room and paint room.
Paint elevator machine room and elevator pit floor
Paint elevator entrance frames and doors (hallway).
Replace lighting in elevator machine room and re-circuit.
Disconnect and remove existing elevator feed.
Install (1) new elevator feed.
Add HVAC mini split AC unit in elevator machine room.
Add automatic transfer switch elevator pre-signal.
Replace existing electrical distribution panel with new and add a new branch circuit electrical
panel.
Add elevator pit sump pump.
Contractor shall coordinate with owner fire protection vendor to update/install smoke detectors
and program fire control panel to meet current elevator fire safety code. (Siemens phone number
is 1-800-959-0233).
Contractor shall install conduit from elevator controller to phone relay. Owner will install phone
line (phone line is analog).
Contractor shall place used hydraulic oil in drum. Owner will dispose.
Contractor shall provide elevator cab floor finish, Vinyl Composition Tile (Armstrong, Striations
12” x 24” BBT, #T3616 Tea Time)
Contractor shall provide material and labor to install a grate to block off the access opening to the
elevator pit. Grating shall be galvanized steel.
Contractor and all subcontractors will be required to sign-up and perform safety orientation
through e-verify. Cost is $50 per sign up and $15/employee. Consumers Energy will provide
instruction on how to use the website.
Contractor shall provide ¾” conduit run from the elevator controller to the hallway (approx.. 12’)
Contractor shall add a terminal block wired to the ATS for future ability to monitor ATS position
status/normal source availability/emergency source availability.
Contractor shall be responsible for the survey of the power distribution system as described in the
December 15, 2016
Page 1 of 2
Scope of Work
Consumers Energy
Elevator Modernization
Macomb Service Center
23.
24.
25.
Contractor Field Document For Electrical Power Systems Study. MacMillan Associates is
responsible to perform the study with data obtained by this contractor.
It is the contractor’s responsibility to keep basement dry and prevent any flooding during
construction due to work being performed (including Alternate work performed).
Contaminated soils/water (if any) is to be disposed of per Consumers Energy Environmental
requirements.
Contractor shall coordinate with elevator subcontractor to make sure all items in scope are
included (either by GC or elevator subcontractor) in this proposal.
Alternates:
A.1
Provide all material and labor to remove existing steel casing and install new steel casing. (Casing
shall only be removed if existing casing is too small) Contractor shall be responsible for spoil
removal if casing removal/reinstallation is necessary.
A.2
Dewater casing to install new jack assembly (if required per alternate A.1)
Work shall be performed in accordance with the attached drawings and specifications as documented on
the table of contents and included by reference.
END OF SECTION
December 15, 2016
Page 2 of 2
Scope of Work
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
These Instructions to Bidders must be strictly adhered to during the process of bidding
and shall be a primary consideration for award.
B.
General Conditions, Summary of Work of the Contract documents define the scope of the
work to be included in the proposal.
C.
Each bidder shall submit complete and definitive information on the offering in sufficient
detail to permit a complete analysis of the proposal. The requirements stated in the
Instructions to Bidders relative to information submittal shall be followed.
D.
Unless otherwise stated herein, it will be assumed that the bidder’s intention is to meet all
specifications and job requirements and that to the bidder’s best knowledge and belief the
materials and equipment described in his Proposal will meet all specifications and job
requirements.
E.
Materials and equipment shall be furnished as exactly described herein.
PART 2 BID DOCUMENTS
A.
Attached is one (1) copy of the drawings and specifications via electronic file.
B.
No additional copies will be provided.
PART 3 PROPOSALS
3.2
A.
The proposal shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with these
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS and the letter transmitting the specifications and
documents to the bidder. Proposals which are not prepared and submitted in accordance
with these instructions shall be justification for being disqualified.
B.
The base proposal submitted by the bidders shall comply with the bidding documents.
Bidders are requested to submit voluntary alternates to equal 5% of the construction
costs. The presentation of alternate proposals shall be in the same level of detail as
required for the base proposal. Alternate proposals may be considered or rejected solely
at the option of the Owner.
Preparation
A.
Proposals shall be carefully prepared using the bidding documents issued with the
proposal document package. Return of the Consumers Energy Company general
conditions, map, and instructions to bidders is not required.
B.
Entries on the Proposal Forms shall be entered electronically, typed using dark black
ribbon, or legibly written in black ink and returned with any other documentation
requested in this request for proposals.
December 15, 2016
Page 1 of 6
Instructions to Bidders
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
C.
The bidder shall acknowledge receipt of all addenda issued for the specifications and
documents in the space provided in the Proposal Form.
D.
The bidder shall submit the following information regarding the bidder’s organization:
1.
Legal name of bidder.
2.
Form of organization: corporation; partnership; individual d/b/a; or other as
applicable.
3.
State of incorporation or registration.
4.
Federal Identification Number or Social Security Number as applicable.
5.
Address of bidder (place of business)
6.
E-mail address and website URL.
7.
Minority and/or Women-Owned Business Enterprise (MWBE)
8.
Michigan Based Business (MBB)
9.
Dollar Flow Back* to Michigan?
10.
Business card information for primary bidder contact.
11.
Is your company capable of receiving payments via a Financial Electronic Data
Interchange (FEDI)? If not, would you consider establishing an account with a
financial institution that is FEDI capable?
*”Flow Back” is defined as the value of the bidders’ spend, including subcontractors’ spend, to bidders employees located in Michigan or for materials
supplied by Michigan firms for this RFP.
3.3
Exceptions
A.
Each bidder shall list in the space provided on the Proposal Form all exceptions or
conflicts between the proposal and the specifications and documents. If more space is
required for this listing, additional pages may be added. If the bidder takes no
exceptions, the bidder shall write "None" in the space provided. In case of conflicts not
directly stated then, the contractor is bound to requirements of the specifications and
documents.
B.
If the bidder takes exception, all such exceptions shall be specific in nature and
accurately referenced to the applicable page number, article number, and article title of
the specifications and documents. If the bidder proposes deletion of specification
language and substitution of revised language, such deletion and substitution shall be
carefully presented by typing complete paragraphs or articles of the original specification
language and incorporating the substitute language. Proposed deletions shall be set off
by brackets, thus: {delete this language}, and proposed substitute language shall be
indicated by underlining, thus: substitute this language. Exceptions which are general,
which make reference to the bidder's standard terms and conditions, or which make reference to the bidder's descriptive information as a whole WILL NOT BE
ACCEPTABLE.
C.
If a proposal includes express or implied exceptions that are not listed as required, the
requirements of the specifications and documents shall govern. The bidder shall not alter
any part of the specifications and documents in any way, except by stating in the
exceptions.
December 15, 2016
Page 2 of 6
Instructions to Bidders
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
3.4
3.5
3.6
Signatures
A.
Each bidder shall sign the proposal with an authorized signature and shall give the full
business address. The bidder's name stated on the proposal shall be the exact legal name
of the firm. The names and titles of all persons signing shall also be typed or printed
below the signature.
B.
Proposals by partnerships shall be signed with the partnership name followed by the
signature and designation of one of the general partners or other authorized
representative. A complete list of the partners shall be included with the proposal.
C.
Proposals by a corporation shall be signed in the official corporate name of the
corporation, followed by the signature and designation of the president, secretary, or
other person authorized to bind the corporation.
D.
Satisfactory evidence of the authority of the officer signing in behalf of the corporation
shall be furnished. Bidding corporations shall designate the state in which they are
incorporated and the address of their principal office.
Submittal
A.
All proposals are to be electronically submitted to the Contract PO Box, and the Contract
Analyst.
B.
E-mail proposal to Contract Analyst: Andrew M. Fee at the following addresses:
Contract PO Box: [email protected];
CC: [email protected];
CC: [email protected], on or before the due date and time.
C.
Facsimiles transmittals followed by the original proposal are not acceptable.
Withdrawal
A.
Proposals may be withdrawn, altered, and resubmitted at any time before the bid due
date. Withdrawn proposals must be picked up before revised proposal can be submitted.
Proposals may be withdrawn but cannot be altered, or resubmitted after the bid due date.
PART 4 INFORMATION TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
4.1
Equipment and Materials
A.
The proposal shall be based on new equipment and materials which comply with
specifications and documents in every respect unless the bidder takes specific exception
as provided herein. If substitution of equal quantity equipment or materials is indicated
in the proposal it shall be understood that the Owner will have the option of selecting any
one of the substitutions so indicated and such selection shall not be a cause for extra
compensation or extension of time.
December 15, 2016
Page 3 of 6
Instructions to Bidders
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
4.2
Supplementary Information
A.
The bidder shall assemble all drawings, catalog data, and other supplementary
information necessary to thoroughly describe materials and equipment covered by the
proposal and shall attach such supplemental information to each copy of the bidding
documents submitted.
B.
The following supplementary information shall be submitted with the Proposal:
1.
Schedule for work activities and overall completion.
2.
Total estimated manpower requirements to complete the contract.
3.
Area requirements for lay down, parking, and trailers during construction.
4.
Number and size of construction trailers if required.
5.
Utility requirements.
6.
After award of contract how many days before the Contractor can start the
project?
7.
The contractor shall submit a schedule of values for the proposed project.
8.
The contractor shall submit the Contractor Safety Record Form (CSR Form).
9.
The contractor shall submit a copy of the cover and index of their company’s
safety plan. (Details of entire safety plan may be requested by Owner at a later
date)
PART 5 LOCAL CONDITIONS
5.1
It is mandatory that each bidder and subcontractor shall visit the site of the work or will be
disqualified. All bidders shall coordinate with each other to have the subcontractors walk through
at the same time. Prior to visit, bidder must notify contact individual noted on the PROPOSAL
FORM. The Bidder shall thoroughly inform himself of all conditions and factors which would
affect the execution and completion of the work, including, but not limited to, the arrangement
and condition of existing or proposed structures affecting or which are affected by the proposed
work; the procedure necessary for maintenance of uninterrupted operation; the availability and
cost of labor; and facilities for transportation, handling, and storage of materials and equipment.
Failure of documented site inspections by the contractor and all subcontractors shall result in
proposal disqualification.
5.2
A site visit will be included with the pre-bid meeting. Arrangements can be made for additional
visits as needed to fully understand the scope of the project.
5.3
It must be understood and agreed that all such factors have been properly investigated and
considered in the preparation of every proposal submitted. No claims for financial adjustment to
any contract awarded for the work will be permitted by the Owner which are based on the lack of
such prior information or its effect on the cost and schedule of the work.
PART 6 INTERPRETATION AND ADDENDA
6.1
If any prospective bidder is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the proposed contract
documents, the bidder may submit to the Owner a written, e-mail or faxed request for an
interpretation. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery.
Any interpretation of the proposed documents will be made only by addendum transmitted to
December 15, 2016
Page 4 of 6
Instructions to Bidders
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
each party receiving a set of such documents. The Owner will not be responsible for any other
explanations or interpretations of the proposed documents.
6.2
It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Owner, before the time specified for receipt of
proposals, of conflicting requirements or omissions of information which require clarification.
Those questions not resolved by addenda shall be listed in the exceptions space provided on the
proposal form, together with statements of the basis upon which the proposal is made as affected
by each question.
PART 7 BOND OPTION
7.1
At the option of the Owner, the contractor to whom the work is awarded may be required to
furnish a Performance Bond, to the Owner, in an amount equal to 100 percent of the contract
amount. The cost of the bond shall be included as an option and indicated on the PROPOSAL
FORM.
PART 8 PROPOSAL PRICING
8.1
Firm price proposals shall be submitted.
PART 9 TAXES
9.1
All applicable federal, state, and local taxes are to be included in the CONTRACT price.
PART 10 PERMITS AND LICENSES
10.1
Each bidder shall be responsible for all permits and licenses for the project. If the bidder is in
doubt as to whether or not a permit or license is applicable, the bidder shall state in the proposal
whether this item has been included in the bid price and the amount of the applicable permit or
license in question.
PART 11 TIME OF COMPLETION
11.1
The time of completion of the work is a basic consideration of the contract. The proposal shall be
based upon completion of the work. It will be necessary that the bidder satisfy the Owner of his
ability to complete the work within the stipulated time by submitting a bar chart schedule and
manpower estimate.
PART 12 EVALUATION FACTORS
12.1
Determination of the best responsive proposal may include, but may not be limited to proposal
completeness, consideration of cost, schedule, qualification and experience in similar work.
PART 13 ACCEPTANCE AND REJECTION OF PROPOSALS
December 15, 2016
Page 5 of 6
Instructions to Bidders
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
13.1
All proposals shall become the property of the Owner and the Owner reserves the right to accept
the proposal which, in its judgment, is the best responsive proposal; reject any and all proposals
and to waive irregularities and informalities in any proposal that is submitted.
PART 14 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
14.1
Sample Contract Documents which shall be noted by the bidder and included in his/her cost of
performing the work are attached. These documents represent what the final Contract Document,
developed by the Owner, will be, including attachments and insurance requirements. Consumers
Energy insurance requirements must be in place for formal execution of the CONTRACT to
occur.
14.2
Attached is a sample document titled “Contract Addendum, Contractor Requirements, Hazardous
Chemicals,” which will be appended to the contract for this project, provisions of which shall be
noted by the bidder and included in his/her costs of performing the work.
14.3
Attached are sample Certificate of Insurance forms. The successful contractor and major
subcontractors shall file completed forms with the Owner.
14.4
Attached is a sample Sworn Statement which shall be executed by the successful contractor and
submitted with each partial invoice for the work showing that all payments due subcontractors,
suppliers and laborers have been made for all contracts in excess of $100,000.
14.5
Please note Owner offers the following payment terms/methods:
A.
Single Use Account (SUA)* payment method – electronic payment with net 20 day term
(preferred)
B.
Supplier Discount term – 2% discount if paid in 20 days, net 45 days (payment method
ACH or check)
C.
Standard payment term (default) – net 60 days (payment method ACH or check)
1.
*PLEASE NOTE (SUA): Bidders may only select one payment method on
record for all invoiced transactions. Single Use Account (SUA) is a payment
method with a net 20 day term. Should a bidder select SUA based on award of
this request for quote - or - as their elected payment method for existing business,
upon sign up all invoiced payments will be processed as SUA including any and
all payments on existing contracts and/or outstanding purchase orders. If you are
an existing SUA supplier - SUA will be the default payment option applied to
this bid; SUA electronic payment method is processed as a credit card transaction
– merchant exchange fees may apply, see FAQ sheet attached for more
information about SUA transactions.
MAI 2016-3401
December 15, 2016
Page 6 of 6
Instructions to Bidders
Contractor's Federal Identification No.
CONTRACT FOR LABOR AND MATERIAL
This Contract is made as of ______________, by and between CONSUMERS ENERGY COMPANY, a Michigan
corporation, One Energy Plaza, Jackson, Michigan 49201 ("Owner") and, _____________ a ____________
[corporation][limited liability company][limited partnership][sole proprietorship] (address) ___________________
("Contractor").
In consideration of the mutual promises herein, the Owner and the Contractor agree as follows:
1. SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall perform the work described in Exhibit A attached to and made a part of this Contract.
Unless otherwise provided in this Contract, the Contractor shall furnish everything necessary to complete the
work including, but not limited to, all supervision, labor, tools, materials, supplies, services, facilities, equipment
and transportation. The Contractor shall perform all of the work in a good, substantial and workmanlike manner.
This Contract is not exclusive. The Owner reserves the right to have similar or like work performed by others or
through its own employees to any extent the Owner deems desirable.
2. TIME FOR PERFORMANCE
The work to be performed under this Contract shall commence on or about ___________, and shall be completed
on or before _______________.
3. CONTRACT PRICE
The Owner shall pay the Contractor and the Contractor shall accept as full compensation, satisfaction and
payment for the work and any and all direct or indirect costs or expenses incurred by the Contractor in connection
with the work including, but not limited to, the cost of supervision, labor, tools, materials, supplies, services,
facilities, equipment, transportation, insurance, taxes, overhead and profit:
Check whichever box is applicable:
a lump sum price of ________________Dollars ($_________)(“Lump Sum”)
a lump sum price of _________ Dollars ($______)(“Lump Sum”) and in addition to the Lump Sum, an
additional amount of up to _________________Dollars ($__________) for extra work, if any, which is
authorized in advance by Owner pursuant to Section 6 herein and which shall be billed at the rates and
charges set forth in Exhibit B, attached to and made a part of this Contract (“Additional Amount”), the total
of the Lump Sum and the Additional Amount shall not exceed ____________________Dollars
($__________)
at the rates and charges set forth in Exhibit B, attached to and made a part of this Contract. The total
charges shall not exceed ____________Dollars ($_______________)
4. PAYMENTS
Unless all work hereunder is to be performed within sixty (60) days, the Contractor shall submit an invoice to the
Owner at the end of each calendar month, itemized to the Owner's satisfaction, for the portion of the work
completed during such month, together with the amount due. Within sixty (60) days after receipt of a satisfactory
partial invoice and approval thereof by the Owner, payment of such partial invoice shall be made to the
Contractor. Payment of such partial invoice by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of the work and shall be
subject to correction in the payment of any subsequent invoice. If the entire work is to be performed within sixty
(60) days, no invoice shall be submitted until all work has been completed.
Upon completion of the entire work covered by this Contract to the satisfaction of the Owner, as evidenced by a
written acceptance signed by the Owner's Contract Administrator or other duly authorized representative, the
Contractor shall present its final invoice, itemized to the Owner's satisfaction. Within sixty (60) days following
receipt of such final invoice and supporting data and approval thereof by the Owner, payment of such final
CSS Form 933 SC May 2016 rev
Page 1
invoice, including any amounts withheld under partial invoices, shall be made to the Contractor as complete
payment thereof, subject to Section 5, "Withholding Payment."
With each invoice where the Contractor's compensation is based on cost or time worked, the Contractor shall
submit the vendor's original invoices for all materials with a cost greater than $25, and certified copies of time
sheets and/or payrolls. Credit shall be given to the Owner for any discounts received by the Contractor on
material invoices.
If checked, the Contractor shall submit a Sworn Statement, and as applicable, a Partial Unconditional Waiver
and a Full Unconditional Waiver, in the forms provided by the Owner, drawn and executed in accordance with the
Construction Lien Act of the State of Michigan showing that all bills for materials, labor and other indebtedness
connected with the work have been paid in full.
If checked, all payments under this Contract shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor pursuant to the
Vendor Payment, Financial EDI Transactions Attachment, CSS Form 0651A.
5. WITHHOLDING PAYMENT
Notwithstanding any provisions in this Contract to the contrary, the Owner may withhold payment for work done to
the extent of protecting itself against loss on account of:
(a) Defective work not remedied.
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims.
(c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor.
(d) Damages to structures or properties.
(e) Contractor’s breach of any other of its obligations under this Contract.
6. CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT
The terms of this Contract shall not be changed, superseded or supplemented except in writing signed by the
Owner and the Contractor (“Change Order”).Whenever possible, such a Change Order shall be executed prior to
the commencement of the extra work or changed work.
When a need arises to immediately authorize extra work or changes in the work to restore service, to avoid
breakdowns, to avoid work stoppages or for the Owner to meet commitments, the Owner’s project manager may
authorize the performance of such extra work or changes by execution of a Project Change Notice (“PCN”) in the
form attached hereto. Any work authorized pursuant to such a PCN shall thereafter by evidenced by a Change
Order as indicated above.
7. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
The Contractor is an independent contractor. The Contractor shall do such work with and according to its own
equipment, means and methods, which shall belong to and be and remain in the exclusive charge and control of
the Contractor, and which shall not be subject to any control or supervision by the Owner. The Owner does not
hereby hire or rent the use of the same or assume any liability for the use or method of use thereof. The Owner is
interested only in the results of the work.
8. PERMITS AND LAWS
Unless otherwise provided in this Contract, the Contractor shall secure all licenses or permits required by law and
shall comply with all applicable ordinances, laws, orders, rules and regulations pertaining to the work hereunder
made by any governmental authority or public regulatory body.
The parties agree that, as applicable, they will abide by the requirements of 41 CFR 60-1.4(a), 41 CFR 60300.5(a) and 41 CFR 60-741.5(a) and that these laws are incorporated herein by reference. These
regulations prohibit discrimination against qualified individuals based on their status as protected
veterans or individuals with disabilities, and prohibit discrimination against all individuals based on their
race, color, religion, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, or national origin. These regulations require
that covered prime contractors and subcontractors take affirmative action to employ and advance in
CSS Form 933 SC May 2016 rev
Page 2
employment individuals without regard to race, color, religion, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity,
national origin, protected veteran status or disability. The parties also agree that, as applicable, they will
abide by the requirements of Executive Order 13496 (29 CFR Part 471, Appendix A to Subpart A), relating
to the notice of employee rights under federal labor laws.
9. INDEMNITY
To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall assume all responsibility for and shall indemnify and
save the Owner, its officers, agents and employees harmless from and against all losses, liabilities, claims,
demands, payments, actions, legal proceedings, recoveries, costs, expenses, fines, attorney fees, settlements,
judgments, orders and decrees of every nature and description brought or recovered against, or incurred by, the
Contractor, the Owner, the Owner's officers, agents or employees, or any or all of them, by reason of any: (a)
injury to persons, including death or damages, sustained or claimed by the Contractor's employees, the
employees of the Owner, or by any other person, and for any theft or loss of or damage to property (including
environmental harm), including property of the Contractor, the Owner, or any other person, which may occur or
allegedly occur because of or result from, or in any manner are connected with or arise from, (i) any action or
operation under this Contract, (ii) the work which is the subject of this Contract, or (iii) any breach of any
obligation of the Contractor under this Contract; (b) infringement or alleged infringement of any patent, copyright,
trademark or other proprietary right by any material, machinery, device, equipment, process or design furnished or
used by the Contractor in the performance of this Contract; and (c) breach of any obligation of the Contractor
under Section 8 (Permits and Laws), Section 16 (Confidentiality) or Section 21 (Personnel Risk Assessment and
Cyber Security Access) of this Contract. Without limiting the foregoing, the Contractor shall at the request of the
Owner defend at the Contractor's expense any suit or proceeding brought against the Owner for any of the abovenamed reasons.
10. WARRANTY
Unless otherwise provided in this Contract, the Contractor hereby warrants that all work performed and materials
furnished hereunder shall conform to the requirements of this Contract and be free from defects for a period of
one (1) year from and after the Owner's final acceptance of all work performed hereunder (the "Warranty Period").
Without limiting any other remedy available to the Owner, if any such nonconformance or defect appears during
the Warranty Period, the Contractor shall make any and all repairs or replacements necessary to remedy same at
its sole expense and within a reasonable time after notification by the Owner. The foregoing warranty shall also
apply to all work performed pursuant to the foregoing warranty with the Warranty Period for the repair or
replacement work commencing on the Owner's final acceptance of the repair or replacement work.
11. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBCONTRACTING
This Contract shall not be assigned or any part thereof subcontracted by the Contractor without the Owner's
prior written consent. Any attempted assignment without such written consent shall be void and the Owner may
refuse to permit the performance of any unauthorized subcontract. In case any such subcontracting is
approved, the subcontract shall be in writing; shall be fully executed prior to the commencement of the work
involved; and shall specify that the provisions of the subcontract shall be subject to, and the subcontractor shall
comply in every respect with the provisions of this Contract, except that the attached insurance requirements
may be superseded by other insurance requirements as approved by the Owner and as stated in such approval.
If required by the Owner to do so, the Contractor shall promptly furnish the Owner with copies of each executed
subcontract. The Contractor shall assume as full responsibility to the Owner for the actions, omissions,
operations and work of the Contractor's subcontractors of every tier as for the actions, omissions, operations and
work of the Contractor.
12. AUDITING OF CONTRACTOR'S ACCOUNTS AND REFUNDS
In the event that Contractor’s compensation under this Contract is based wholly or partially on costs, expenses,
man-hours or equipment costs, the Contractor shall make and keep as the same accrue, complete records and
books of account of its costs, expenses, man-hours and equipment hours relating to the work hereunder in
accordance with generally accepted accounting practices. Said records and books of account, together with any
or all other memoranda pertaining thereto that may be kept by the Contractor, shall be open to examination during
regular business hours by the Owner or its agents for the purpose of inspection, auditing, verifying or copying the
same or making extracts therefrom. The Owner's payment of invoices hereunder shall not constitute acceptance
of the accuracy thereof. Amounts shall be subject to audit in accordance with this section for two (2) years after
CSS Form 933 SC May 2016 rev
Page 3
the making of the last payment under this Contract. If the Owner gives written notice of intent to audit within said
two (2) year period, it shall have a reasonable amount of time thereafter to complete the audit. Whenever an
audit of the Contractor's records shows that the Owner is entitled to a refund, the Contractor shall promptly make
said refund. The Contractor's costs of correcting any billing error shall not be charged to the Owner. Owner shall
pay the audit costs hereunder except to the extent such costs are incurred because of incomplete, illegible or
inaccurate records of the Contractor in which case such costs shall be paid by the Contractor.
13. OVERTIME
No overtime shall be performed on the work hereunder and no claim therefor shall be valid, unless authorized in
writing by the Owner before the overtime is performed. Overtime which does not result in any extra charge to the
Owner may be authorized orally. Unless otherwise provided in this Contract, overtime is all time in excess of eight
(8) hours per person per day or in excess of forty (40) hours per person per week and any other time for which a
rate higher than a straight-time rate will be charged to the Owner pursuant to this Contract.
14. TERMINATION AND SUSPENSION
The Owner may, upon written notice to the Contractor for any reason whatsoever or no reason, terminate the
Contractor’s performance at any time before it is completed. Such written notice shall specify the effective date of
the termination. Any such termination shall be without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner for
any breach of this Contract by the Contractor. The Contractor shall, upon the effective date of such notice of
termination, immediately remove its employees, representatives, tools, equipment and other property from the
Owner's premises. If the Contractor fails to effect such removal by the effective date of the termination, the
Owner may do so at the Contractor's expense. In the event of such termination, payment for all work properly
performed under this Contract shall be made in accordance with the rates and charges set forth elsewhere or in
the case of a lump sum price, the Owner will pay the Contractor such part of the lump sum price as bears the
same relation to the total lump sum price as the work performed prior to the time the notice of termination is
effective bears to the entire work, as determined by the Owner, subject in either case to proper deductions for
defective work, damages or costs sustained by the Owner by reason of any default, breach or failure to perform
by the Contractor. If the Contractor breached this Contract prior to termination, the Contractor shall not be entitled
to any further payment until the work hereunder or as much of it as the Owner elects to complete is finished.
Upon any termination pursuant to this Section, the Owner shall be released from all further obligations under this
Contract except for payment as provided for in this Section.
The Owner may, upon written notice to the Contractor for any reason whatsoever or no reason, suspend the
Contractor's performance of the work hereunder, in whole or in part, at any time and from time to time . In such
event, the Contractor shall resume the performance of the work as requested in writing by the Owner. In the
event of any such suspension, the Contractor shall be entitled to reimbursement for additional costs reasonably
and necessarily incurred by the Contractor in effectuating such suspension and in resuming the performance of
the work as requested by the Owner after the end of the suspension. It is recognized that a prolonged
suspension of the work, either in whole or in part, may create a hardship upon either or both parties. Therefore,
should any suspension by the Owner exceed six (6) months in duration, the parties shall negotiate in good faith
on appropriate revisions to this Contract.
15. DISPUTES
In the event of a dispute between the Contractor and the Owner, the Contractor shall proceed with the work
pending resolution of such dispute, unless otherwise requested by the Owner in writing.
Either party may give the other party written notice of any dispute not resolved in the normal course of business.
The Owner and the Contractor shall thereupon attempt in good faith to resolve such dispute promptly by
negotiations between executives who have the authority to settle the dispute. If the dispute has not been
resolved within sixty (60) days after such written notice is given, either party may avail itself of any process or
means legally available to it to resolve the dispute.
16. CONFIDENTIALITY
All information, whether oral, written or otherwise, which the Owner provides to the Contractor or which is
generated or derived by the Contractor in the performance of or as a result of the services hereunder and which
the Owner designates, in writing or orally, as confidential to the Owner, or such information is reasonably
understood to be confidential, shall be held in strict confidence by the Contractor and shall not be disclosed by the
CSS Form 933 SC May 2016 rev
Page 4
Contractor to any third party without the Owner's prior written consent. Completion of performance under this
Contract or termination or suspension of this Contract shall not affect the Contractor's obligations with respect to
the Owner's confidential information and such obligations shall continue for a period of five (5) years from the date
of completion of performance or termination of this Contract, as the case may be.
17. GOVERNING LAW AND INTERPRETATION
This Contract shall be deemed to be a Michigan contract and shall be construed in accordance with and governed
by the laws of the State of Michigan. In the event of any conflict between this document and any documents
attached hereto or incorporated herein, the provisions of this document shall control. The Section headings in this
Contract are included for reference only. They are not part of this Contract and shall not affect the interpretation
and construction of this Contract. With respect to the subject matter hereof, this Contract supersedes all previous
representations, understandings and negotiations, either written or oral, and constitutes the entire agreement
between the parties hereto.
18. THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES
This Contract is intended for the benefit of the parties hereto and does not grant any rights to any third parties
unless otherwise specifically stated herein.
19. ETHICS AND COMPLIANCE
The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Attachment - CMS Energy Corporation Third-Party Code of
Conduct (2013) which is attached to and made a part of this Contract. Alternatively, if the Contractor has an
existing documented compliance program that includes compliance standards acceptable to the Owner, the
Contractor may request approval of its existing compliance program and, if approved, the Contractor compliance
with its existing compliance program will meet the requirement of this Section. The Contractor and all its
employees and subcontractors shall abide by the provisions of the Attachment, or its internal compliance program
(as applicable).
20. NOTICES
(a) Unless otherwise agreed to by the parties, any written notice expressly required under this Contract from
the Owner to the Contractor shall be deemed to be properly given if: i) delivered in person to the
Contractor; ii) three business days after sent by first class U.S. mail with proper postage; or iii) one
business day after deposit with a nationally-recognized overnight courier service marked for overnight
delivery on the next business day and with all fees prepaid, to the Contractor at its address shown in the
first paragraph of this Contract.
(b) Unless otherwise agreed to by the parties, any written notice expressly required under this Contract from
the Contractor to the Owner shall be deemed to be properly given if: i) delivered in person; ii) three
business days after sent by first class U.S. mail with proper postage; or iii) one business day after deposit
with a nationally-recognized overnight courier service marked for overnight delivery on the next business
day and with all fees prepaid, to the Owner at its address shown in the first paragraph of this Contract to
the Attention of: General Counsel. This notice requirement shall not apply to Section 21 herein and
Owner and Contractor shall separately agree as to whom and in what manner such notices shall be
directed.
21. PERSONNEL RISK ASSESSMENT AND CYBER SECURITY ACCESS
(a) The Contractor shall, at its sole cost, cause to be performed a personnel risk assessment (“Risk
Assessment”) of every employee or subcontractor of Contractor who will have unescorted
physical or electronic access to Owner’s facility or system. Contractor shall select one of the
following companies to conduct the Risk Assessment and promptly notify Owner as to
Contractor’s selection: i) Credential Check Corporation; ii) Great Lakes Safety Training Center;
or iii) eVerifile. The Risk Assessment shall include, without limitation, identity verification, a
seven (7) year criminal background check, and confirmation that the employee or subcontractor
is not listed on any sanctions-related list of designated persons maintained by Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of Treasury (“OFAC”) or the U.S. Department of State.
No employee or subcontractor of Contractor shall be allowed unescorted physical or electronic
CSS Form 933 SC May 2016 rev
Page 5
access to any of Owner’s facilities and/or systems before the Risk Assessment of such
employee or subcontractor has been completed and meets certain criteria identified by the
Owner. Contractor shall, at its sole cost, re-perform a Risk Assessment of any employee or
subcontractor of Contractor with unescorted physical or electronic access every seven (7) years
or for cause in either Contractor’s or Owner’s discretion.
(b) Contractor shall notify Owner either prior to or within eight (8) hours after an employee’s or
subcontractor’s termination, or within twenty-four (24) hours after Contractor or Owner
determines that an employee’s or subcontractor’s access is no longer required.
(c) The Owner may, at any time during the term of this Contract and by providing no less than 30
calendar day’s written notice to Contractor, designate any portion of Owner's facility in-scope
pursuant to the North American Electric Reliability Corporation Critical Infrastructure Protection
(“NERC CIP”) standards. In the event that Owner provides such a notice, the following
provisions shall apply:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Contractor shall cause to be performed a Risk Assessment for every employee or
subcontractor whose work will require unescorted access to an in-scope area and for
whom a Risk Assessment has not been completed already.
In addition, if any employee’s or subcontractor’s work will require access for which, under
the NERC CIP standards, NERC CIP training is required, Contractor shall require each
such employee and subcontractor to complete an Owner-furnished training program that
meets the NERC CIP and related training requirements (“Cyber Security Training”). No
employee or subcontractor of Contractor shall be granted unescorted physical or
electronic access to CIP areas without documentation of the completed Cyber Security
Training.
If Owner grants such access to any employee or subcontractor of Contractor, the
Contractor shall notify Owner either prior to or within two (2) hours after such employee’s
or subcontractor’s termination, or within eight (8) hours once Contractor or Owner
determines such employee’s or subcontractor’s access is no longer required.
Pursuant to NERC CIP standards and Owner’s internal requirements, Risk Assessments
must be re-performed at least once every seven (7) years, and the Cyber Security
Training must be retaken at least once annually (in March).
(d) Contractor shall comply with any and all other applicable NERC CIP standards and
requirements that are currently in effect or are hereafter adopted during the term of this
Contract. Owner reserves the right to modify from time to time any of its procedures or
requirements for Risk Assessments, Cyber Security Training or access to Owner facilities;
provided, however, all such modifications shall be communicated to Contractor in writing.
(e) Owner shall pay for any incremental costs of Contractor that are incurred as a result of future
changes in NERC CIP standards and/or Owner requirements that are hereafter specified in
writing by Owner under subsections (iii) and (iv) hereof. All such costs shall be itemized to
Owner’s reasonable satisfaction.
22. ATTACHMENTS
In addition to other documents referenced in this Contract as being attached to and made a part of this Contract,
the following documents are attached to and hereby made a part of this Contract:
Contract Insurance Supplement Class A Contract (CSS Form 928) or Class B Contract (CSS Form 934) or
Class C Contract (CSS Form 935)
Contract Addendum Contractor's Requirements - Hazardous Chemicals (Form 417A)
CSS Form 933 SC May 2016 rev
Page 6
Special Conditions for Removal of Asbestos at Consumers Energy Company Facilities (CSS Form 0602)
Job Site Conditions Rev 04/08/13 FINAL
23. SURVIVAL
The following portions of this Contract shall survive termination of this Contract, as well as the final completion of
the work hereunder, including without limitation, Sections 4 (Payment), 5 (Withholding Payment), 8 (Permits and
Laws), 9 (Indemnity), 10 (Warranty), 12 (Auditing of Contractor’s Accounts and Refunds) and 16 (Confidentiality),
and all other provisions of this Contract providing for the limitation of or protection against liability of either party.
24. EXECUTION
The parties agree that signatures on this Contract may be made by electronic means in lieu of an original
handwritten signature and said electronic signatures shall be binding. This Contract may be delivered by a
facsimile or an electronic transmission thereof, each of which shall be deemed an original. The parties may
deliver or execute this Contract in any number of counterparts, each of which will be deemed an original, and all
counterparts, when taken together, will constitute one and the same agreement. Any document generated by the
parties with respect to this Contract, including this Contract, may be imaged and stored electronically and
introduced as evidence in any proceeding as if original business records. Neither party will object to the
admissibility of such images as evidence in any proceeding on account of having been stored electronically. The
provisions of this Section 24 shall also apply to any Change Order and PCN entered into pursuant to Section 6 of
this Contract.
25. ENTIRE AGREEMENT
This Contract embodies and constitutes the entire agreement and understanding between the Owner and the
Contractor relating to the subject matter hereof and supersedes all previous representations, understandings,
negotiations and agreements either written or oral between the parties hereto or their respective representatives.
CONSUMERS ENERGY COMPANY
________________________________________
By:
By:
_________________________________
_________________________________
Name: _________________________________
Name: _________________________________
Title:
Title:
_________________________________
Review and Approval
CSS
Legal
CSS Form 933 SC May 2016 rev
Page 7
_________________________________
CONTRACT INSURANCE SUPPLEMENT - Class A Contract
The term "Contractor" as used herein means the party contracting with Consumers Energy Company in the
contract to which this form is attached. The term "Owner" means Consumers Energy Company.
For its own protection and for the protection of the Owner, the Contractor shall, at its sole expense, secure and
maintain in force during the life of this contract policies of insurance of the following types:
REQUIRED COVERAGE
LIMITS OF LIABILITY
A. Workers' Compensation Insurance
Michigan Statutory
B. Employers' Liability Insurance
$100,000 each accident
$100,000 each employee - disease
$100,000 policy limit - disease
C. Commercial General Liability
(Occurrence Form)
$2,000,000 general aggregate
$2,000,000 products-completed operations aggregate
$1,000,000 personal and advertising injury
$1,000,000 each occurrence
NOTE:
Coverage shall include and specifically state on the Certificate of Insurance the following:
(1) CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY insurance is provided under the General Liability policy for liability
assumed by the insured under contract with Consumers Energy Company.
(2) Consumers Energy Company, its Directors, Officers, and Employees as ADDITIONAL
INSUREDS as its interest may appear, and such coverage is primary to any insurance
maintained by Consumers Energy Company.
If checked, General Liability Insurance includes coverage for the EXPLOSION, COLLAPSE AND
UNDERGROUND PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARDS (XCU).
D. Automobile Liability Insurance including
OWNED, HIRED and NON-OWNED vehicles
$500,000 each occurrence, combined single limit
E. Other Insurance:
Such policies of insurance shall be in a form and with companies satisfactory to the Owner and shall be obtained
and become effective prior to the time herein specified for the commencement of the work. A copy of the policy
shall be furnished to the Owner at the Owner’s request.
The Contractor shall submit Certificates of Insurance to Owner prior to commencement of any work. The
Certificate of Insurance shall be on the form furnished by the Owner or any other form approved by the Owner's
Corporate Insurance Department. The certificate shall require that the Insurance Company give at least thirty
(30) days prior written notice of cancellation or material change in any such policy.
The Certificates of Insurance
shall be submitted to:
Consumers Energy Company
Corporate Insurance Department, EP10-243
One Energy Plaza
Jackson, MI 49201-2357
PHONE: 517-788-0825
FAX: 517-788-1693 or
EMAIL: [email protected]
It is understood that the Contractor may, if it desires, carry limits in excess of those indicated herein, or may carry
additional insurance, but it is further understood that no additional premium for such higher limits or for such
additional insurance is to be charged to the Owner.
Form 928 4-2015
CONTRACT ADDENDUM
Contractor Requirements - Hazardous Chemicals
The term "Contractor" as used herein means the party contracting with Consumers Energy Company in the
contract to which this form is attached. The term "Owner" means Consumers Energy Company.
1. The Contractor shall comply and shall ensure that its subcontractors comply, in the performance of all work
and operations hereunder, with all applicable requirements of Occupational Safety and Health Standards
Subpart Z (Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Chapter XVII, Part 1910, Subpart Z, Section 1910.1200,
hereinafter referred to as "29 CFR § 1910.1200"), and of Acts 80, 67 and 79 of the Michigan Public Acts of
1986.
2. In addition to the foregoing:
(a) The Contractor shall notify the Owner, and shall require its subcontractors to notify the Owner, of any
"hazardous chemicals" that will be used in any work or operations hereunder. Such "hazardous
chemicals" shall be as defined by 29 CFR § 1910.1200. Such notification shall be made by submitting to
the Owner a current Material Safety Data Sheet ("MSDS") for each such hazardous chemical, which
MSDS shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR § 1910.1200. For all "hazardous chemicals" that the
Contractor or its subcontractors know, prior to commencement of the work and operations hereunder, will
be used in such work and operations, the MSDS shall be submitted prior to commencement of any work
or operations hereunder. For any "hazardous chemicals" that the Contractor or subcontractors may
thereafter determine will be used, the Contractor or subcontractor shall submit the MSDS as soon as
possible, and in all events prior to such "hazardous chemicals" being brought to any of the Owner's plants
or jobsites.
(b) The original of each MSDS that the Contractor and its subcontractors are required to submit to the Owner
as set forth above shall be submitted to the Owner's designated representative in the field for the work
hereunder. At the same time as the original is so submitted to the Owner's designated representative in
the field, the Contractor shall submit another copy thereof to the Owner's applicable Hazard
Communication Coordinator(s) at the address(es) designated on the following page(s) for the location(s)
where the work is being performed.
(c) The Contractor shall ensure that all "hazardous chemicals" used or supplied by it or its subcontractors in
the work and operations hereunder are labeled in accordance with 29 CFR § 1910.1200.
3. Whenever, after an MSDS has been submitted to the Owner in accordance with the above provisions of this
Addendum, an updated MSDS becomes required in accordance with 29 CFR § 1910.1200 for a "hazardous
chemical" being used by the Contractor or subcontractor, the Contractor shall ensure that such updated
MSDS is submitted to the Owner in the same manner as set forth in Item 2(b) of this Addendum.
4. In the event that the Contractor or any of its subcontractor is using "hazardous chemicals" at any of the
Owner's plants or jobsites without submitting the required MSDSs or without proper labeling as set forth
above, the Contractor shall ensure that such chemicals are immediately removed until an MSDS is formally
submitted as set forth above and/or proper labeling is achieved. Any costs that may be incurred from the
resulting delay in the work shall be borne fully by the Contractor.
5. The Contractor shall contact both the Owner's designated representative in the field and the applicable
Hazard Communication Coordinator(s) or designated alternate(s) before the Contractor or any of its
subcontractors mobilize onsite at the Owner's plant or jobsite to confirm the receipt of the information supplied
by the Contractor and its subcontractors as required in the above provisions.
6. "Subcontractors," for purposes hereof, shall mean the Contractor's subcontractors of any tier.
7. The Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from and against all losses, liabilities, costs,
expenses, damages, fines and penalties arising from any failure of the Contractor or any of its subcontractors
to comply with the provisions of this Addendum.
CSS Form 417A 04/15/11
Page 1
CONTRACT ADDENDUM
Contractor Requirements - Hazardous Chemicals
FIELD OFFICES
GAS T&S
ALMA
BAD AXE
BAY CITY
CARO
CLARE
EAST TAWAS
FLINT
GLADWIN
MIDLAND
MIDLAND TRNG CTR
PRUDENVILLE
ROSE CITY
SAGINAW
STANDISH
4141 E. Wilder Rd
Bay City, MI 48706
Attn: J. Caverly
FREEDOM
12201 Pleasant Lake Rd Route 1
Manchester, MI 48158
Attn: D. Ford
KALAMAZOO M&R
2500 E Cork St
Kalamazoo, MI 49001
Attn: S. McCausland
MARION STORAGE
7590 Partridge Avenue
Marion, MI 49665
Attn: J. Wade
MUSKEGON RIVER
8613 Pine Rd
Marion, MI 49665
Attn: P. Geers
NORTHV ILLE
9440 Napier Rd
Northville, MI 48167
Attn: D. Grashik
OVERISEL COMPRESSOR
th
4131 138 Ave
Hamilton, MI 49419
Attn: L Bradshaw
OVERISEL STORAGE
nd
4141 142
Hamilton, MI 49419
Attn: C. Schrotenboer
RAY
69333 Omo Rd
Armada, MI 48005
Attn: D. Grashik
SAGINAW M&R
5131 Hackett Road
Saginaw, MI 48603
Attn: L. Erskine
ST. CLAIR
10021 Marine City Hwy
Ira, MI 48023
Attn: D. Grashik
WHITE PIGEON
68536 A Rd
White Pigeon, MI 49099
Attn: T. Wolf
ADRIAN
HOWELL
LAPEER
LIVONIA
MACOMB
PONTIA C
ROYAL OAK
SOUTH MONROE
4600 Coolidge Highway
PO Box 369
Royal Oak, MI 48068
Attn: D. Flanders
BENZONIA
BIG RAPIDS
BOYNE CITY
CADILLAC
FREMONT
GREENV ILLE
LAKE CITY
LUDINGTON
MANISTEE
MUSKEGON
NORTH KENT
TRAVERSE CITY
ZEELAND
330 Chestnut Street
Cadillac, MI 49601
Attn: M E Tanner
ALLEGAN
CMR
EAST KENT
HASTINGS
GRAND RAPIDS
KALAMAZOO
LAINGSBURG
LANSING
OWOSSO
PAW PAW
SOUTH HAVEN
1801 W Main Street
Owosso, MI 48867
Attn: A M Aurino
PLANTS
JH CAMPBELL PLANT
17000 Croswell Street
West Olive, MI 49460
Attn: S. LeFurge
BC COBB PLANT
151 North Causeway
Muskegon, MI 49440
Attn: R. Dupuis
D E KARN PLANT 1 & 2
2742 North Weadock Hwy
Essexville, MI 48732
Attn: R Hall
END OF CONTRACT ADDENDUM
CSS Form 417A 04/15/11
Page 2
D E KARN PLANT 3 & 4
2680 North Weadock Highway
Essexville, MI 48732
Attn: R Hall
LUDINGTON PUMPED STORAGE
PLANT
5825 West US-10
Ludington, MI 49431
Attn: R Bogner
JC WEADOCK PLANT
2555 North Weadock Hwy
Essexville, MI 48732
Attn: R Hall
JR WHITING PLANT
452 East Erie Road
Erie, MI 48133
Attn: F. Rand
COMBUSTION TURBINE
OPERATIONS
2680 North Weadock Highway
Essexville, MI 48732
Attn: R Hall
ZEELAND GENERATING STATION
425 North Fairview Rd
Zeeland, MI 49464
Attn: H. Manning
HYDRO OPERATIONS
330 Chestnut Street
Cadillac, Mi 49601
Attn: S. Pate
GENERAL OFFICE FACILITIES
BATTLE CREEK
BRONSON
CORPORA TE GARAGE
CORPORA TE HANGAR
CORPORA TE RECORDS
INVESTMENT RECOVERY
CENTER
JACKSON
JONESVILLE
MARSHALL TRAINING CENTER
METER TECHNOLOGY BLDG
ONE ENERGY PLAZA
PARNALL OFFICE BLDG
PARNALL EAST
TRAIL STREET LAB
1945 W. Parnall Rd
P23-230
Jackson, MI 49201
Attn: J. Decker
Ethics
is just good business
2 0 13 T H I R D PA R T Y C O D E O F C O N D U C T
Definition
The terms “company” and “we” used throughout the Third
Party Code of Conduct means CMS Energy, Consumers
Energy, CMS Enterprises and EnerBank USA collectively.
Ethics is just good business
O
ur company has provided customers with affordable, reliable
energy to light and warm their homes and keep their businesses
running for 125 years.
We believe our long history of serving customers and the state of
Michigan is a testament to the strong ethical standards that have guided us through
more than a century of uncertainty and change.
We expect contractors or consultants to share our commitment to safeguard
our corporate reputation and uphold the cultural values that form the backbone
of CMS Energy and its principal subsidiary, Consumers Energy.
This Third Party Code of Conduct is a guide to our company’s standards of
integrity and ethical behavior. It provides summaries of corporate policies to help
resolve ethical issues that often arise in the context of daily work. The policy summaries are intended as a resource to help resolve ethical dilemmas that may arise
in a complex and changing business world and set the expectation for our dealings
with the people and organizations with whom we interact.
In addition to following the code and applicable rules and laws, we ask suppliers and contractors to raise questions about compliance issues and report actions
that don’t measure up without fear of retaliation. When in doubt, ask questions or
seek clarification by contacting our compliance department at 800-CMS-5212 or
[email protected].
Adhering to the highest standard of conduct is the right way to do business.
Additionally, in many cases, your actions and behaviors represent our company.
There are serious individual and collective consequences for unethical behavior,
whether or not it is intentional.
We value the thousands of contractors, suppliers and consultants who work with
us. You are a critical part of our daily mission to deliver energy value to our customers, and to uphold the tradition that’s served our company and its customers
so well for so long.
CMS ENERGY • 2013 THIRD PARTY CODE OF CONDUCT • 1
Safety, Environmental and Health
n Our company strives to work safely and protect employees, customers, the public
and the environment. To this end, we expect contractors and consultants (herein
collectively “suppliers”) to work safely, and comply with all appropriate safety and
health laws, rules, regulations and procedures, including any site-specific safety
requirements. You should resolve or report unsafe working situations, and encourage
others to work safely. You must be fit for duty when reporting for company-related
work and remain fit for duty during working hours.
Our company operates in a manner that conserves and protects natural resources
and the environment. Suppliers must comply with all applicable environmental
laws and regulations and conduct operations on behalf of the company in an environmentally friendly manner.
Our company is an alcohol-free workplace. You may not bring, use or be under
the influence of alcohol while performing work for the company, or while on company property. Supplier employees shall not consume alcoholic beverages during
a meal period if they are returning to work for the company after the meal. Supplier employees will not work for the company evidencing any effects of alcohol
consumption.
Our company is a drug-free workplace. You will not use, possess, sell, provide
or be under the influence of illegal drugs or other controlled substances while
engaged in company-related work. You must not allow the use of prescription drugs
or over-the-counter medications to affect your ability to work safely or efficiently.
Your employees also must comply with applicable state and federal laws and regulations, including the Department of Transportation fitness-for-duty regulations.
CMS ENERGY • 2013 THIRD PARTY CODE OF CONDUCT • 2
Weapons
n Supplier employees may not possess licensed or unlicensed weapons on company
property, in personal vehicles parked on company property, in company vehicles
or while conducting company business. The company management must authorize
specific exceptions. Weapons include, but are not limited to: firearms; explosives;
ammunition; pellet guns; paintball guns; Tasers; bows; arrows; and swords. Knives
are also prohibited unless used specifically as a work tool.
Working with others
n Suppliers must work responsibly with the company and follow all applicable laws
and regulations. Those include laws and regulations related to equal opportunity,
child labor, working hours and discrimination and harassment in the workplace.
The company expects employees and suppliers to behave with respect and dignity,
and to act as solid corporate citizens in the communities we serve.
The company does not tolerate discrimination, harassment or any form of behavior that creates an intimidating or offensive work environment. Examples of unacceptable conduct include slurs based on race, gender or religion; and inappropriate
remarks, jokes or pictures.
The company provides a safe and secure work environment and will not tolerate
acts of violence committed by or against its employees or suppliers.
CMS ENERGY • 2013 THIRD PARTY CODE OF CONDUCT • 3
Responsibility for Company Resources
n Suppliers are expected to properly use and safeguard company resources such
as property, assets, intellectual property, company technology assets (network,
phone, Internet, software applications and email systems) and confidential or sensitive information while performing work for the company. You may not use our
resources without proper approvals or for purposes other than work activities.
Suppliers are responsible for protecting any confidential information they possess
in the course of their work. Such information includes anything that could potentially be used to place the company — or its employees, customers, shareholders
or officers — at a disadvantage.
Specific examples of confidential information include:
• Plans, strategies, tactics or organizational structure not announced
to the public.
• Financial data or operations results not announced to the public.
• Employees’ personal information, including: addresses; phone numbers;
pay grades; salaries; benefits information; performance evaluations; Social
Security numbers; personal health information; and disciplinary records.
• Information protected under a confidentiality agreement or contract.
• Information identified as confidential by a supervisor or officer.
• Customer and shareholder records such as billing records, personal
information and Social Security numbers.
You should presume information is confidential unless demonstrated otherwise
and hold that information in confidence.
Suppliers may not use this information for gain or advantage, or share it without
appropriate company approval. All confidential information obtained by a supplier
must have documented authorization in place.
The company monitors its assets and work environments in compliance with
applicable federal, state and local laws for a variety of reasons such as promoting
safety, preventing criminal activity, investigating alleged misconduct and security
violations, and managing information systems.
CMS ENERGY • 2013 THIRD PARTY CODE OF CONDUCT • 4
Conflicts of Interest
n A conflict of interest is a choice between acting in your interest (financial or oth-
erwise) or in the interest of the company. You must avoid any actions or situations
that create conflicts of interest, or the appearance of conflicts, in work related to
the company. This includes not accepting employment or engaging in work that
creates a conflict of interest with CMS Energy or Consumers Energy or in any way
compromises your work for our company. Employees who work for the company
and a supplier must obtain the proper approvals from management and the chief
compliance officer.
Suppliers should not exchange gifts with a CMS Energy or Consumers Energy
employee or the employee’s immediate family members. That’s because giving or
accepting gifts can create the perception of influencing business decisions. A gift
can be anything of value. Common examples include: loans, trips, meals, or entertainment and sporting event tickets.
Suppliers may donate to company-sponsored charitable events, and can contribute a maximum of $1,000 per sponsored event.
Suppliers must disclose the circumstances of potential conflicts of interest as
soon as possible to CMS Energy or Consumers Energy managers or the compliance department.
CMS ENERGY • 2013 THIRD PARTY CODE OF CONDUCT • 5
Compliance with laws, rules and regulations
n Suppliers working on our behalf are expected to abide by regulations, rules issued
by and tariffs approved by the regulatory agencies governing our company and
industry. Those regulators include: the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission;
North American Electric Reliability Corporation; Michigan Public Service Commission; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; Department of Homeland ­Security;
Michigan Department of Environmental Quality; Occupational Safety and Health
Administration; Michigan Department of Transportation; U.S. Department of
Transportation; Michigan Occupational Safety and Health Administration; and
the U.S. Department of Energy. In addition, all suppliers are expected to comply
with the Office of Foreign Assets Control’s regulations that administer and enforce
sanctions against certain countries and individuals.
Suppliers working on our behalf must abide by all applicable laws — including
antitrust laws and the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act — prohibiting bribes, kickbacks, corruption and requiring fair dealings and full disclosures. In addition,
suppliers working on our behalf are required to fully comply with any provisions
regarding interactions between affiliates in the energy industry and should not
share any customer, rates or market information between CMS Energy and the
affiliates Consumers Energy and CMS Enterprises. Suppliers should obtain proper
approvals from company managers before sharing information with their affiliates.
Accurate records and disclosures are critical to meeting our legal, financial,
­regulatory and management obligations. You must ensure that records such as
disclosures; accounts; reports; bills; invoices; time sheets, correspondence; and
public communications are full, fair, accurate, timely and understandable. Never
hide, alter, falsify or disguise the true nature of a transaction.
Our company complies with Sarbanes-Oxley Act requirements related to the
accounting, contracting and payment for goods and services. You may accept
orders only when accompanied by an approved CMS Energy or Consumers Energy
contract, purchase order or charge card. Failure to comply with this requirement
may impact our ability to reimburse you for goods or services in a timely manner.
CMS ENERGY • 2013 THIRD PARTY CODE OF CONDUCT • 6
Government officials help shape the legal and regulatory environment in which
the company operates. If you interact on the company’s behalf with government
officials or candidates for public office, you must understand and comply with the
laws and company policies that determine our participation in the political process. Those include: state and federal lobbying laws; limits on gifts; an approval
process for political contributions; reporting of lobbying contacts; and regulatory
reporting requirements.
You may not use information obtained in the course of your company-related
work to make investment decisions regarding any equity or debt securities if the
information has not been publicly disseminated and could have a material effect
on the value of the investment. Examples of such information include: expansion
plans; major management changes; dividend rates; earnings; mergers; and significant new contracts or projects. Using this information violates our policies and
may violate laws or regulations.
Copyright Compliance
n Copyright
laws protect the right of an author to control the reproduction and
use of any creative expression of thoughts and ideas such as literary, graphic, photographic, audiovisual, electronic and musical works.
Our company follows all laws and regulations related to handling copyrighted
material. Failing to comply could create serious consequences for the company,
and for suppliers.
Copyright law protects such works even if they do not include a copyright notice.
If you wish to use copyrighted material for distribution related to company work,
we expect you to obtain permission from the copyright holder before making copies or using any other copyrighted materials.
CMS ENERGY • 2013 THIRD PARTY CODE OF CONDUCT • 7
Endorsements
n The company does not endorse products or services or the firms or individuals
who supply them. Do not use the company’s name or corporate logo in any advertising materials or publicity without obtaining prior written consent.
Supplier diversity
CMS Energy and Consumers Energy are committed to providing business
­ pportunities to business enterprises owned by women, minorities and disabled
o
­veterans. We do not use set-asides, preferences or quotas in administering our
­supplier diversity program.
n
Waivers or exceptions
n Only the company’s chief compliance officer may grant exceptions to or waivers
of these guidelines. Contact the appropriate company contract administrator if you
are seeking an exception or waiver. The administrator will present a business case
justification for the waiver or exception to the chief compliance officer.
CMS ENERGY • 2013 THIRD PARTY CODE OF CONDUCT • 8
Reporting ethical concerns
Following our standard of conduct is vital to continued prosperous relationships with our suppliers. If you have questions or concerns about compliance or
­ethics issues while working for our company, or want to report potentially illegal
or u
­ nethical activities, contact our compliance department at:
n
800-CMS-5212
or e-mail: [email protected]
You also may anonymously call: 866-ethicsp or visit www.ethicspoint.com.
Those working with Enerbank USA may call 855-319-8479.
The information provided and procedures set forth in these guidelines do not ­confer
contractual rights of any kind on any supplier or create contractual obligations of
any kind for the company.
CMS ENERGY • 2013 THIRD PARTY CODE OF CONDUCT • 9
CSS FORM 0651A
VENDOR PAYMENT - FINANCIAL EDI TRANSACTIONS
This Agreement is made as of ____________________, by and between CONSUMERS ENERGY COMPANY, a
Michigan corporation, One Energy Plaza, Jackson, Michigan, 49201 (“Buyer”) and _______________________,
_________________________, ___________________________, (“Seller”).
The Seller agrees to have the Buyer initiate Credit Entries to its account specified below ("the Account") in
payment of obligations owed by the Buyer to the Seller pursuant to the terms of this Attachment and the rules
relating to Corporate Trade Exchange entries (the "Rules") of the National Automated Clearing House Association
and the Buyer is willing to initiate such Credit Entries on the terms set forth herein. Payments of obligations owed
to the Seller by the Buyer will be made from the Buyer's Accounts Payable Department in Jackson, Michigan.
Seller's Account
Financial Institution:
Account Number:
Bank Office Location:
Bank Routing Number:
Federal Tax I.D. Number:
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
Does the Seller’s Account Information allow for payments to be credited via both ACH and Wire?
Yes
No
If “No”, please identify the payment method that the Seller’s Account will accept.
ACH
Wire
Note: ACH is the preferred payment method of the “Buyer”. Payments initiated via ACH settle one day after due
date. ACH Payments with a Friday due date will settle on the following Monday. The “Buyer” will initiate
payment via “Wire” if contractually obligated to do so. All obligations (invoices) with a scheduled pay date
that falls on a weekend or Bank Holiday will pay on the next business day.
SELLER / VENDOR
There are new processing requirements for electronic vendor payments that are being sent to a financial
institution outside of the United States. If our payments to you are being forwarded from a U.S. financial
institution to a financial institution in another country, please indicate below.
IAT DIRECT DEPOSIT INFORMATION REQUEST
Declaration – U.S. law requires that the following information be obtained for all direct deposit (ACH)
transactions
Will the payment that is made via direct deposit pursuant to this Authorization be forwarded across the U.S.
border to a foreign bank or financial institution through the ACH network?
No
Yes*
*If “Yes”, only Wire payments will be allowed.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
1. DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise defined herein, capitalized terms shall have the meanings provided in the Rules.
2. NOTICES
Any written notice or other written communication required or permitted to be given under this Attachment shall be
delivered, or sent by United States certified or registered mail, postage prepaid, to the parties at the addresses
stated below:
CSS Form 0651A 12-2012
Page 1 of 2
CSS FORM 0651A
VENDOR PAYMENT - FINANCIAL EDI TRANSACTIONS
To Buyer:
CONSUMERS ENERGY COMPANY
Accounts Payable Department, 9th Floor
One Energy Plaza
Jackson, Michigan 49201
517-788-7229
To Seller:
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
Unless another address is substituted by notice delivered or sent as provided herein. Any such notice shall be
deemed given when so delivered or sent.
3. E-MAIL PAYMENT NOTIFICATION SERVICE (Optional)
Contact Name:
E-mail Address
4. AUTHORIZATION
Subject to the terms set forth below, the Seller authorizes the Buyer to initiate Credit Entries to the Account in
accordance with the Rules for amounts owed by the Buyer to the Seller for goods and services purchased by the
Buyer from the Seller.
5. LIMITATIONS
No Entry shall be initiated under this Attachment except in conformity with the authorization provided above. The
Buyer shall time the initiation of Entries so that funds are available to the Seller by the time such funds would be
available had Entries not been authorized hereunder.
6. ACCEPTANCE AND RETURN OF ENTRIES
Nothing contained herein shall be deemed to require the Seller or its financial institution to accept any Entry
initiated under this Attachment and any such Entry may be returned as provided in the Rules. The Seller shall not
be deemed to have accepted any Entry which is returned in accordance with the Rules. The Buyer shall not be
deemed in default or suffer any loss of discount or other penalty by reason of the return of any Entry provided
such Entry was initiated in accordance with the terms of this Attachment. The Seller shall not be deemed to have
accepted any Entry as being in the correct amount if it provides written notice to the Buyer of a discrepancy within
thirty (30) days after receipt of the Entry by the Seller's financial institution.
7. CREDIT FOR ENTRIES
Unless such Entry is returned in accordance with the Rules, the Seller shall, as of the date the amount of a Credit
Entry is credited to the Account, credit the Buyer with the amount of each Entry received. Unless such Entry is
returned in accordance with the Rules, the Buyer shall, as of the date any Debit Entry is credited to its account
with its financial institution, credit the Seller with the amount of each such Entry.
8. ENTRY INFORMATION
Each Entry initiated under this Attachment shall be accompanied by the following information:
(a) Transaction Code
(b) Document Date (usually invoice date)
(c) Gross Amount
(d) Net Amount of Invoice
(e) Discount (if taken)
(f) Invoice Bill Number
9. LIABILITY OF PARTIES
Neither the Seller nor the Buyer shall be liable for the act or omission of any Automated Clearing House, financial
institution or other person.
10. TERMINATION
The transaction arrangements provided for in this Attachment may be terminated by either party at any time by
giving thirty (30) days' prior written notice to the other party. Notwithstanding any such termination, the terms of
this Attachment shall remain in force and effect as to all Entries which have been initiated prior to the date of
termination and termination of such arrangements shall not affect the remainder of the Contract provisions, which
shall remain in full force and effect.
CSS Form 0651A 12-2012
Page 2 of 2
Consumers Energy
Elevator Modernization
Macomb Service Center
PROPOSAL FORM
Michigan Legal Registered Firm Name: _____________________________________________
State of Incorporation / Registration: ________________________________________________
Proposal Completed By:______________________________________________________
Date: _________________________
Contractor’s Federal ID Number:____________________
Business Address:___________________________________________________
E-Mail Address:___________________________________________________________
Phone: _____________________
Form of Organization: ________________________
Certified Minority or Woman/Owned Business: { } Yes { } No
Union Contractor: { } Yes { } No
Michigan Based Company: { } Yes { } No
If Not Michigan Based, Dollar Amount of Michigan Flow Back: _____________________
FEDI (Direct Deposit) Available: { } Yes { } No
Owner:
Consumers Energy
11801 Farmington Rd
Livonia, MI 48150
Chris Laser
Phone: 517-745-0998
Email: [email protected]
Project/Location:
Macomb Service Center
35350 Kelly Rd.
Clinton, Twp., MI
Work Order #26474764
Proposals to:
Consumers Energy Company
ATTN: Andrew M. Fee
[email protected]
CC: [email protected]
[email protected]
Due: Thursday, January 26, 2017 by 2:00PM
Pre-Bid Meeting:
Wednesday, January 11, 2017 @ 10:00AM
Macomb Service Center
35350 Kelly Rd.
Clinton, Twp., MI
December 15, 2016
Proposal Form
Page 1 of 4
Consumers Energy
Elevator Modernization
Macomb Service Center
1.1
Proposal
Having carefully read and examined the Specifications, Associated Contract Documents and Addenda
which have been issued prior to the date hereof, and the Drawings: and having viewed the site and
examined all conditions affective the work, the Undersigned proposes for furnishing all labor and
materials and all tools, equipment and machinery called for and as specified by the said Documents to
complete the entire work, including all commissions, overhead, insurance, taxes, fees, permits, profit,
subcontracts and any other direct or indirect costs in connection therewith the following:
See Attached Exhibit B
1.2
Substitutions
A.
The undersigned propose the following substitutions for materials or work specified, it
being understood that should any substitutions be accepted, the applicable amount or
amounts hereinafter listed are to be added to, or deducted from, the Base Proposal, as
stated, and that such additions or deductions include any and all modifications of work or
additional work that the Undersigned shall be required to perform as a result of the
acceptance of the substitutions and does not impact schedule.
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
B.
The additions, deductions or no-charge figures are separate from and not a part of the
Base Proposal.
Schedule Impact
1.3
Add/Deduct
Yes/No
Fees for Handling Additional Work
A.
The following fees shall apply in the event the Owner elects to alter the Work or have
additional work done
1.
Not Applicable
December 15, 2016
Proposal Form
Page 2 of 4
Consumers Energy
Elevator Modernization
Macomb Service Center
1.4
Addenda
A.
The undersigned bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda, which have been
considered in preparing this Proposal.
Number
Dated
Number
Dated
Number
Dated
Number
Dated
1.5
Subcontractors
A.
The undersigned proposes that they will perform the majority of the work at the project
site with his own forces and that specific portions of the work not performed by the
undersigned will be subcontracted by the following subcontractors. Please include an
additional sheet if necessary.
Trade
Name of Subcontractor
Union
Minority
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
1.6
Exceptions
A.
Exceptions or conflicts between the proposal and the specifications and documents. If
more space is required for this listing, additional pages may be added to the back of the
Proposal Form. If the undersigned takes no exceptions, the undersigned shall write
"None".
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
1.7
Declarations and Signatures
A.
The undersigned hereby declares that only the persons or firms interested in the proposal
as principal or principals are named herein, and that no other persons or firms than herein
mentioned have any interest in this Proposal or in the contract to be entered into; that this
Proposal is made without connection with any other person, company, or parties likewise
December 15, 2016
Proposal Form
Page 3 of 4
Consumers Energy
Elevator Modernization
Macomb Service Center
submitting a bid or proposal; and that it is in all respects for and in good faith, without
collusion or fraud.
B.
It is understood that any overtime or premiums necessary to complete the work in
accordance with the above stated date shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
Firm Name:
Proposal Completed By:
Date:
END OF SECTION
December 15, 2016
Proposal Form
Page 4 of 4
Consumers Energy
Elevator Modernization
Macomb Service Center
Exhibit B
A.
1.
Lump Sum Pricing
Lump sum pricing for Elevator Modernization
$ ______________________________________________
B.
Lump Sum Pricing Breakdown
CATEGORY
AMOUNT
Elevator Work (Elevator
Subcontractor)
1. Elevator Modernization
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
$
Non-Elevator Work (General
Contractor)
Paint
Electrical
Mechanical
Fire Safety
Hoist way patching and canting
ledges
Total
$
$
$
$
$
$
Additional Work Rates for extras:
1.
Foreman hrly rate $____________________
2.
Journeyman hrly rate $_________________
3.
Apprentice hrly rate $__________________
4.
Helper hrly rate $______________________
5.
Material markup percent
6.
Subcontractor markup percent
________%
________ %
Alternates/Options
A.1
Not to exceed lump sum pricing to provide all material and labor to remove existing steel casing
and install new steel casing. (Casing shall only be removed if existing casing is too small) includes spoils removal and disposal. Contractor shall be responsible for dewatering and spoil
removal if casing removal/reinstallation is necessary.
Proposal Form
Page 1 of 4
Consumers Energy
Elevator Modernization
Macomb Service Center
$______________________________________________
A.2
Not to exceed lump sum pricing to dewater casing to install new jack assembly (if required per
Alternate A.1)
$______________________________________________
Additional Information Requested:
Name of lead mechanic for Elevator Modernization: __________________________________________
Years’ Experience with modernizing and working on ESCO Equipment: ____________________
Building Names that were modernized by mechanic in last 5 years with controller specified: __________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Name of lead mechanic(s) for Elevator Interim Maintenance: ___________________________________
Years’ Experience of lead maintenance mechanic maintaining and working on ESCO Equipment:
________________________
Years’ Experience of lead mechanic maintaining and working on newly specified controller: __________
Years’ Experience of lead mechanic maintaining and working on newly specified machine:
____________
Number of Units on Maintenance Mechanic’s route currently: __________________________________
Schedule in (weeks) to complete Modernization: __________________ weeks
Sub-Contractors used in Modernization and their role:
1. Name ___________________________________
Location _________________________________
2. Name ___________________________________
Proposal Form
Page 2 of 4
Consumers Energy
Elevator Modernization
Macomb Service Center
Location _________________________________
3. Name ___________________________________
Location _________________________________
6.
INTERIM & WARRANTY MAINTENANCE
Interim
Maintenance
Monthly Price per
Unit
Unit
Warranty
Maintenance
Monthly Price per
Unit
Minimum
Monthly
Preventative
Maintenance
Hours
Passenger Elevator
Total Cost
Name of Mechanic
to Service Building
Mechanic Years of
Experience
Working on the
Equipment
# of Units
Mechanic has on
Service Route
Supplementary Information
Information checklist as required per Instructions to Bidders
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Date the Contractor can mobilize and begin construction?
Schedule of values for the proposed project.
Contractor Safety Record Form.
Copy of the cover and index of company’s safety plan.
Lock/out tag/out procedure and plan for using it from solicited EC.
Construction Schedule in bar chart form.
List of sub-contractors and their discipline per proposal form.
Proposal Form
Page 3 of 4
Consumers Energy
Elevator Modernization
Macomb Service Center
8.
______ Date of last contract with Consumers._________ With whom_________
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Proposal Form
Page 4 of 4
CONSUMERS ENERGY
Contractor Safety Record Form
ContractorName:________________________________________________________
Date: ____/____/____ Contact Person: ____________________________________
Address:
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
Telephone Number: ( ) _____________________________
Email: ___________________________________________
Requirements of this form include provisions for the evaluation of a new or existing
contractor safety record. The Contractor Safety Record (CSR) score of this evaluation will
count toward the firm’s Bid Evaluation.
PART A: Contractor’s Safety Philosophy Profile
Listed below are questions to be used to determine your company’s overall safety
philosophy profile. Please provide the answer that best describes your company’s present
business approach and attitude towards safety.
1. Does your company have a designated safety manager? _____Yes _____No
If so please provide:
Company Safety Manager: Name: ___________________________
Phone:___________________________
2. Does your company provide pre-employment drug screening for all potential field
employees?
_____Yes _____No
3. Does your company check motor vehicle records for all employees who operate company
vehicles?
_____Yes _____No
4. Are regular safety meetings held on project sites with all on-site employees?
_____Yes _____No
PART B: Contractor Safety Training
1. Are all company employees provided with formal safety training?
_____Yes _____No
If so provide a brief synopsis of the types of formal safety training, provided to your
employees and the date of the most recent training offered.
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
2. Please provide a copy of your Company’s Safety plan Cover Sheet and Safety Plan
Index.
PART C: Contractor’s Safety Operating Profile
Listed below are questions to be used to determine your company’s safety operating profile. Please provide
the answers that best describe your company’s present business operating practices regarding safety.
1. Using your firm’s records and the formula below, determine your Incidence Rate for the
three most recent years of available data.
Incidence Rate for total recordable cases = (Number of recordable incidents -:- total hours worked by all employees during
the calendar year) x 200,000
Contractor
U.S. Industry/ Bidding Contractors
Year: _____ Rate: _____
Year: _____ Rate: _____
Year: _____ Rate: _____
Year: _____ Rate: _____
Year: _____ Rate: _____
Year: _____ Rate: _____
Ave: _____
Ave: ______
Rating: (Contractor Ave. ÷
Industry Ave.) _______
PART D: OSHA/ MIOSHA Compliance
1. Has OSHA or MIOSHA issued to your company and declared final any citation(s) for
repeat violation(s) of any OSHA defined serious injury in Michigan in the previous two
calendar years:? YES _________ No _______, if yes please attach a detailed list of
violations.
2. Within the last two Calendar years, has your company received any final citations
classified by OSHA or MIOSHA as being willful in Michigan? Yes ______No _________ If
so, how many citations: _________.
3. Has your company within the last three years received any formal written suspensions or
notices for violation of one of the safety emphasis areas below?
If applicable, attach a copy of each written suspension.
Excavating, Trenching, or Shoring:
Fall Protection:
Crane Safety:
Equipment Safety Devices
Work zone Traffic Control:
Yes ______No _________
Yes ______No _________
Yes ______No _________
Yes ______No _________
Yes ______No _________
Date Issued
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
Certification:
I hereby certify that the information provided in this document is true and accurate to the
best of my knowledge. Material misrepresentations in any section shall be reason for
discounting some or all points that the sections allows toward prequalification.
Signature: ________________________________ Date: _________________________
Name: ______________________________ Title: _______________________________
(Print or type)
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
SECTION 00 70 10
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 SUMMARY OF THE WORK
1.1
1.2
General
A.
This section covers the general description and supplementary requirements for the
construction work included under these specifications.
B.
Without limiting the obligations under Section 1 of the Contract, the work shall be
executed in conformance with the highest standard of Michigan Industry, and with
minimum impact on Owner's operation so as to contribute to efficiency of operation,
minimum maintenance, accessibility and appearance. It shall be so executed that the
installations will conform and accommodate themselves to the building structures, their
equipment and usage. When completed, all systems shall function together as a complete
workable system.
C.
Without limiting the obligations under Section 8 of the Contract, the General Contractor
shall be required to furnish and obtain all necessary approvals, permits and inspections
for construction work, including but not limited to:
Building permits, soil erosion permits, required environmental surveys, driveway
permits, plan review fees, and other local, state, and federal permits required.
1. Local Drain Commission.
a. Soil erosion permit.
2. Local Building Department.
a. Building Permit and inspections.
b. Fire Marshall permit and inspections
c. Plumbing permit and inspections.
d. Mechanical permit and inspections.
e. Electrical permit and inspections.
Work Included Under These Specifications
A.
Major components of the work are stated in Exhibit A and may include the installation of
Owner furnished equipment as detailed in the following SECTION 1.4.
B.
Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting, and patching of surfaces required to
complete the work and shall restore to original condition, including painting as necessary.
C.
The explanations and listing are intended to give a general definition of the scope of the
work under these specifications, and shall not be construed to be an itemized listing of
each element of work required. The Contractor shall be responsible for construction of
complete facilities, conforming in all respects to the details and requirements of the
specifications, drawings, and other Contract documents.
Revision 20160229
Page 1 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
1.3
1.4
Work not included under these specifications.
A.
Asbestos identification, encapsulation, and removal are the responsibility of the Owner.
B.
The following item of work or equipment will be furnished by the Owner or under
separate contract with the Owner.
1.
None.
C.
Contractor shall coordinate his work activities with other contractors.
Owner-Furnished Equipment and Materials.
A.
The Owner will furnish the following equipment and materials to be installed under this
Contract.
1.
None.
B.
Owner-furnished equipment and materials will be delivered to the site where the
contractor shall receive them into his custody until final acceptance of the work, and shall
handle, store, protect, transport and install them in their final location.
1.
None.
PART 2 PROJECT COORDINATION
2.1
Construction Management System
A.
The Contractor and his subcontractors shall participate in the Construction Management
System established by the Owner. Under this program, the Contractor and his
subcontractors shall provide, to the Owner, specific and accurate man-hours, quantity and
schedule information, and other information as required by the Owner. Such information
shall be provided in the detail and format and at the frequency required by the Owner.
The information shall be submitted by the first of each week. The information will be
used for schedule monitoring purposes, to ensure that schedule interfaces with other
contractors are met, and to monitor overall project performance.
B.
The Contractor and his subcontractors shall actively participate in and adhere to the
Owner’s project management requirements, and all other procedures initiated by the
Owner for the purpose of maintaining jobsite administrative control. The Contractor and
its subcontractors shall attend project management meetings or other meetings when
deemed necessary by the Owner, including but not limited to the following:
1.
A pre-construction conference after execution of the Contract and prior to
commencement of construction activities. Review responsibilities and personnel
assignments.
2.
Contractor and Subcontractor: A pre-installation conference before each activity
that requires coordination with other construction and representatives of
manufacturers, fabricators and Owner's facilities involved in installation, and
coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have
preceded or will follow, shall apply.
3.
Progress meetings at intervals scheduled by the Owner.
Revision 20160229
Page 2 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
a.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
2.3
Subcontractor foreman for each major trade shall attend construction
progress meetings.
b.
Subcontractor foreman may be excused from attendance at progress
meetings only upon prior approval of Owner’s Project Manager.
c.
Contractor shall maintain and have available at each progress meeting a
full set of contract documents including drawings, specifications,
submittals, samples, etc.
Contractor and Subcontractor foreman shall perform a pre-construction meeting
at project site to review drawings, specifications, submittal procedures, etc. prior
to beginning each major phase of work.
Contractor and Subcontractor foreman shall perform a walk though of project site
to identify equipment locations and layout, routing and coordination of ductwork,
piping, conduit, cable, supports, service access, etc. prior to beginning each
major phase of work. Contractor and Subcontractor foreman shall repeat project
site walk through procedure prior to making any changes to locations or routing.
Each subcontractor shall maintain on project site a full set of current drawings
and specifications.
Construction Manager
A.
Owner may designate a Construction Manager who will be responsible for monitoring
work between various contractors and for resolving any conflicts between contractors
regarding scheduling or coordination.
B.
Regular meetings of the Construction Manager and all contractors at the site will be held
periodically at the time and place designated by the Construction Manager. The purpose
of the meetings will be for the scheduling and coordination of each contractor's work. In
the event conflicts arise between contractors concerning scheduling or coordination, the
Construction Manager will make the final decision resolving the conflict. The
Contractor's representative shall attend each meeting.
C.
Time of completion is of the essence to this Contract and the Contractor shall be
responsible for performing its work in accordance with the specified construction
schedule.
D.
The Construction Manager will not be responsible for the assignment of personnel, or for
obtaining materials or supplies, or for any other services to the Contractor except the
coordination of work between contractors and as specifically set forth in the Contract
Documents.
Field Records
A.
The Contractor shall maintain in his office at the project site an orderly and adequate file
of previously issued and current up-to-date copies of all Owner's Approved-forConstruction drawings and specifications, Addendums, Bulletins, manufacturer's prints
and specifications, submittals, samples, and other Contract Documents and
supplementary data.
Revision 20160229
Page 3 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
2.4
B.
In addition, the Contractor shall maintain a continuous record of all field changes by
means of a set of drawings marked to indicate current "as-built" conditions. This "asbuilt" set of drawings shall be available for check by the Owner's Representative in order
for him to ascertain that it is being kept current. Proprietary documents shall be available
for review at the project site. At the conclusion of the work, the "as-built" drawings and
other engineering data, accurately and neatly marked with field changes, shall be
submitted to the Owner in the required number of copies. The "as-built" drawings and
data shall include all revisions to the work made under the Contract, including those
made by subcontractors.
C.
All as-built documents shall be provided to the Owner within 30 days of construction
completion.
Schedule of Values
A.
2.5
2.6
Contractor shall provide a schedule of values for the project. Schedule of values shall be
updated monthly and resubmitted to the Owner.
Contractor’s Supervision at the Site
A.
During the construction period, the Contractor shall furnish adequate management and
supervisory personnel on the site continuously, in order to ensure expeditious and
competent handling of the Work.
B.
The Contractor's field organization shall include experienced staff adequate to handle
construction engineering, surveying, planning, coordination with other contractors, and
supervision of all crafts and classes of field construction work.
C.
The field organization shall also include additional staff as required to handle
timekeeping, employment, accounting, purchasing and expediting, stores and
warehouses, stock and tool rooms, security and safety.
D.
Contractor shall employ a competent representative knowledgeable in the scope of the
work being performed who shall be in attendance at the project site during the progress of
the work. The representative shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shall not be changed
except with the consent of the Owner.
E.
The supervisory personnel shall remain on the job from the time the Contractor moves on
the job until Official Acceptance of the Work by the Owner.
F.
The Owner reserves the right to request the removal from the project any of the
Contractor's employees, if in the judgment of the Owner, such removal is necessary to
protect the Owner's interests.
Acceptance of Work by Others
A.
If any part of the Contractor's work is dependent upon the quality and completeness of
work performed under another contract, the Contractor shall inspect the other contractor's
work and promptly report defects therein which render such work unsuitable for the
Revision 20160229
Page 4 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
proper execution of the Work under this Contract. Failure to report such defects to the
Owner shall constitute the Contractor's acceptance of such work as suitable to receive the
Contractor's Work.
2.7
2.8
Safety, Health, and Accident Prevention
A.
The Contractor shall conduct all operations under this Contract in a manner to prevent
bodily harm and damage to property. The Contractor shall continuously inspect all
operations, work, materials, and equipment; shall conduct health surveys of all work
areas; and shall be solely responsible for the discovery, determination, and correction of
conditions which constitute a risk of bodily harm or property damage.
B.
The Contractor shall be completely responsible for the safety and protection of the
personnel and the public on the site of the work and shall employ all methods necessary
to achieve such safety and also assure continuity of all service systems encountered.
These methods shall include, but not be limited to, providing barriers, guard structures,
insulating guards and sleeves, warning signs, and prevention of unauthorized access to
service system areas.
C.
The Contractor shall adhere to the Owner’s designated smoking areas.
D.
For work scheduled to be performed in Owner occupied areas provide notification to
Owner’s Project Manager and to Owner’s personnel occupying proposed work area prior
to beginning work in Owner occupied areas.
Saturday, Sunday, Holiday, and Night Work
A.
2.9
Unfavorable Construction Conditions
A.
2.10
During periods of unfavorable weather, wet grounds, or other unsuitable construction
conditions, the Contractor shall if possible confine his operations to work which will not
be adversely affected thereby. No portion of the Work shall be performed under
conditions which would adversely affect the quality or efficiency thereof.
Losses from Natural Causes
A.
2.11
No work shall be done between 5:00 p.m. and 7:30 a.m. or on Saturdays, Sundays or
legal holidays without the written consent of the Owner.
All loss or damage arising out of the nature of the Work, or from the action of the
elements, or from floods or overflows, or from ground water, or from any unusual
obstruction or difficulty, or any other natural or existing circumstance either known or
unforeseen which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained
and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
Placing Work in Service
A.
If desired by the Owner, portions of the Work may be placed in service when completed
and the Contractor shall provide proper access for this purpose. Such use and operation
Revision 20160229
Page 5 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
shall not constitute an acceptance of the Work, and the Contractor shall be liable for
defects due to faulty construction throughout the duration of this Contract and thereafter
as provided under the Warranty Contract Form. At the time portions of the Work are
accepted by Owner, care custody and control shall transfer to the Owner.
2.12
2.13
Cleanliness
A.
Special attention shall be given to keeping the inside of the structures and surrounding
grounds clean and free from trash and debris. The Contractor shall employ sufficient
personnel to thoroughly clean its work areas continuously each working day and shall
cooperate with the other contractors to keep the entire construction site clean. This shall
include sweeping the floors, collecting and disposing of trash, and all other functions
required to keep the site clean. Materials and supplies shall be stored in locations which
will not block access ways, and arranged to permit easy cleaning of the area. In areas
where equipment might drip oil or cause other damage to the floor surface, a protective
cover of heavy gauge, flame resistant, oil proof sheeting shall be provided between the
equipment and the floor surface so that no oil or grease contacts the concrete.
B.
Promptly upon the completion of the construction work, all scrap, trash, waste materials,
and debris resulting from work under this Contract shall be removed from the site and
legally disposed of. All Contractor-owned facilities, materials, and construction plant
shall be removed from the site. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean the work,
removing all accumulations of dust, scraps, waste, oil, grease, weld spatters, insulation,
paint, and other foreign substances. The Contractor shall provide all cleaning equipment
and all indoor cleaning must be finished with a shop vacuum. Surfaces damaged by
deposits of insulation, concrete, paint, weld metal, or other adhering materials shall be
restored by the Contractor at its sole expense.
C.
The Contractor is responsible for all cleaning.
D.
The Contractor is responsible for all snow removal and ice removal during construction
as necessary to maintain access to the site and facilities, to conduct normal construction
operations, and to maintain site surfaces and traffic areas in a safe and passable condition.
E.
In the event that the Contractor fails to comply with the cleanliness requirements
specified herein, the Owner reserves the right to perform or have performed the necessary
cleaning work and the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of all such
cleanup work.
F.
Remaining Owner-furnished materials shall be stored on the site or removed from the site
as directed by the Owner.
Fire Protection
A.
Only work procedures which minimize fire hazards to the extent practicable shall be
used. Combustible debris and waste materials shall be collected and removed from the
site as provided under CLEANLINESS. Fuels, solvents, and other volatile or flammable
materials shall be stored away from the construction and storage areas in well-marked,
safe containers. Good housekeeping is essential to fire prevention and shall be practiced
Revision 20160229
Page 6 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
by the Contractor throughout the construction period. The Contractor shall follow the
recommendations of the AGC "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction"
regarding fire hazards and prevention.
1.
The application of roofing materials using an open flame or a torch is
prohibited. The use of hot air welding devices (heat gun) is limited to an
operating temperature of 400 degree F.
2.14
B.
Acceptable flexible materials for covering shall be waterproof and flame resistant.
C.
Framework, scaffolding, planking, and similar materials which are combustible but
which are essential to execution of the work shall be treated for fire resistance or
otherwise protected against combustion resulting from welding sparks, cutting flames,
and similar fire sources.
D.
Temporary heating facilities shall not be left unattended without Owner approval.
E.
The Contractor's supervisory personnel and a sufficient number of workmen shall be
instructed in proper methods for extinguishing fires and shall be assigned specific fire
protection duties. When trained personnel leave the job, new personnel shall be trained
in their duties. All workmen shall be instructed in the selection and the operation of each
type of fire extinguisher for each type of fire which might be encountered.
F.
No open flame, torching, welding, etc. shall be done without Owner's approval.
G.
The Contractor shall provide adequate fire protection equipment in each warehouse,
office, and other temporary structures, and in each work area the Contractor is occupying
as specified herein. Access to sources of firewater shall be identified and kept open at all
times. Each fire extinguisher shall be of a type suitable for extinguishing fires which
might occur in the area in which it is located. Each extinguisher shall be placed in a
convenient, clearly identified location which will most likely be accessible in the event of
fire. Fire protection equipment size and quantity shall satisfy insurance requirements and
shall be satisfactory to the Owner.
H.
The Contractor alone shall be responsible for providing adequate fire protection. Failure
of the Contractor to comply with, or the Owner to enforce, the above requirements shall
not relieve the Contractor from any responsibility or obligation under this Contract.
Owner Occupancy
A.
The performance of construction work which affects the operation of the Owner's system
facilities shall be scheduled to be performed only at time acceptable to the Owner.
B.
In the event that it is necessary to interrupt the power supply or to impose abnormal
operating conditions on the Owner's utility system, such procedure must be acceptable to
the Owner and a complete understanding and agreement must be reached by all parties
concerned well in advance of the time scheduled for such operation, and such
understanding shall be definite as to date, time of day, and length of time required. All
work shall be scheduled to suit the Owner's convenience, taking into consideration the
facilities and requirements at all times during construction.
Revision 20160229
Page 7 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
2.15
2.16
C.
If applicable, the Contractor shall conduct his work so as to interfere as little as possible
with public travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Whenever it is necessary to cross,
obstruct, or close roads, driveways, and walks, whether public or private, the Contractor
shall, at his own expense, provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or
other temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and private travel.
D.
In making open cut street crossings, the Contractor shall not block more than one half of
the street at a time. Whenever possible, the Contractor shall widen the shoulder on the
opposite side to facilitate traffic flow. Temporary surfacing shall be provided as
necessary on shoulders.
Engineering Inspections
A.
The Owner may appoint such inspectors as the Owner deems proper to inspect the
materials furnished and the work performed for compliance with the contract documents.
The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable assistance required by the Owner, or
inspectors, for the proper inspection of the work. Should the Contractor object to any
order given by any inspector, the Contractor may make written appeal to the Owner for a
decision.
B.
Inspectors shall have the authority to reject work which is unsatisfactory, faulty, or
defective or does not conform to the requirements of the contract documents. Inspection
shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to construct the work strictly in
accordance with the contract documents. Work not so constructed shall be removed and
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
Minor Defects
A.
The Contractor shall readjust, straighten, and repair minor defects and fabrication errors
which are normally encountered in the Owner-furnished equipment and materials. No
claims for extra compensation in connection with such work will be considered unless the
claim is made in accordance with the applicable provisions as noted above.
B.
When field labor is needed to correct significant errors in Owner-furnished equipment
and materials, the Contractor shall furnish such labor when so requested by the
manufacturer or by the Owner with the consent of the manufacturer. Such labor shall not
be included in the Contract, and the Contractor shall obtain payment for the labor from
the manufacture, except as otherwise agreed by the Owner and the Contractor.
PART 3 DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS
3.1
Definitions
Unless otherwise stated, the following terms, words, phrases, or other expressions used in these
contract documents shall have meanings as follows.
“Architect” shall mean a professional (licensed in the State of Michigan), practitioner trained in the
planning, design and oversight/supervision of the construction of buildings working either directly
Revision 20160229
Page 8 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
or under contract as a consultant for the Owner.
“Architect/Engineer” shall mean a professional (licensed in the State of Michigan), practitioner
trained in the planning, design and oversight/supervision of the construction of buildings working
either directly or under contract as a consultant for the Owner and/or a professional (licensed in the
State of Michigan), practitioner of engineering, concerned with applying scientific knowledge,
mathematics and ingenuity to develop solutions for technical, social and economic problems
working either directly or under contract as a consultant for the Owner.
"Certified" drawings shall mean drawings fully completed and certified by the Contractor as to the
compliance of the information contained thereon with the requirements of these specifications.
Certified drawings shall be clearly stamped "Certified."
"Construction Manager" shall mean the Owner's representative and designated by the Owner to be
in charge of the project administration and field management of the work under this Contract.
"Contract" or "contract documents" shall include the items enumerated under Owner's Contract for
Labor and Material.
"Contractor" shall mean the corporation, company, partnership, firm, or individual named and
designated in the Contract Agreement as the "Party of the Second Part", who has entered into this
Contract for the performance of the work covered thereby, and its, his, or their duly authorized
representatives.
"Date of contract", or equivalent words, shall mean the date written in the first paragraph of the
Contract Agreement.
"Day" or "days", unless herein otherwise expressly defined, shall mean a calendar day or days of
24 hours each.
"Demolition", means removal of any existing equipment or structures.
"Dispose" shall mean removing excess material and scrap form the site to a proper refuse area.
"Drawings" shall mean all (a) drawings furnished by the Owner as a basis for proposals, (b)
supplementary drawings furnished by the Owner to clarify and to define in greater detail the intent
of the contract drawings and specifications, (c) drawings submitted by the successful bidder with
his proposal, provided such drawings are acceptable to the Owner, (d) Approved for Construction
drawings furnished by the Owner during the progress of the work, and (e) engineering data and
drawings submitted by the Contractor during the progress of the work, provided such drawings are
acceptable to the Owner.
“Electrical Contractor” shall mean the specialty contractor working either directly for the Owner or
as a Subcontractor to the Owner’s General Contractor that is responsible for performing all aspects
of the general electrical scope of work in accordance with the Contract documents.
“Engineer” shall mean a professional (licensed in the State of Michigan), practitioner of
engineering, concerned with applying scientific knowledge, mathematics and ingenuity to develop
Revision 20160229
Page 9 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
solutions for technical, social and economic problems working either directly or under contract as a
consultant for the Owner.
"Exposed surfaces" shall mean surfaces of interior and exterior building components and
equipment which are not permanently encased or covered and which are visible and accessible for
painting.
“General Contractor” also referred to as the "Contractor" or “Prime Contractor”, shall mean the
corporation, company, partnership, firm, or individual named and designated in the Contract as the
"Party of the Second Part", who has entered into this Contract for the performance of the work
covered thereby, and its, his, or their duly authorized representatives.
"Grubbing" shall mean the removal and disposal of all stumps and roots larger than 2 inches in
diameter including matted roots.
"Initial Operation" shall mean the first integral operation of the complete system with subsystems
and supporting equipment in service or available for service.
“Installing Contractor” shall mean the contractor responsible for installing the specific work or
item referenced in compliance with industry standards and in accordance with the Contract
documents.
“Landscape Architect” shall mean a professional (licensed in the State of Michigan), practitioner
trained in the planning, design and oversight/supervision of the construction of landscaping in and
around buildings working either directly or under contract as a consultant for the Owner.
"Legal Address" - Where listed below, these are the only acceptable addresses that shall be deemed
as delivered.
"Official Acceptance" shall mean the Owner's written acceptance of all work performed under this
Contract, based on the Owner's final inspection and issuance of a final payment certificate.
"Operational" shall mean the condition of operation in which the completed systems are officially
declared by the Owner to be available for continuous operation.
"Marbleized-color group" for resilient flooring shall mean to make, color, grain or streak in
imitation of marble.
“Mechanical Contractor” shall mean the specialty contractor working either directly for the Owner
or as a Subcontractor to the Owner’s General Contractor that is responsible for performing all
aspects of the general mechanical scope of work in accordance with the Contract documents.
"Owner" shall mean Consumers Energy Company and its duly authorized agents.
"Preliminary" drawings shall mean drawings not fully completed or approved by the Contractor;
however, they shall be reasonably complete and suitable for the Owner’s use in establishing basic
plant arrangements and design requirements. Preliminary drawings shall be clearly stamped
"Preliminary."
Revision 20160229
Page 10 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
“Prime Contractor” also referred to as the "Contractor", shall mean the corporation, company,
partnership, firm, or individual named and designated in the Contract as the "Party of the Second
Part", who has entered into this Contract for the performance of the work covered thereby, and its,
his, or their duly authorized representatives.
"Punchlist" shall mean items not complete to Owners satisfaction.
"Razed" shall mean the removal of mechanical, electrical, and structural items to ground level.
"Resilient tile base" shall mean rubber material which bounces or springs back into shape after
being stretched or compressed.
"Startup" shall mean the time period required to bring the various systems from an inactive
condition, when construction is essentially complete, to the state ready initial operation. The
startup period shall include preliminary inspection and checkout of equipment and supporting
subsystems; initial operation of the complete system; operation of the complete unit to obtain data
and to perform calibration and corrective work; and shutdown, inspection, and adjustment prior to
acceptance is operational by the Owner.
“Subcontractor” shall mean a corporation, company, partnership, firm, or individual named
working directly for the Owner’s General Contractor (under a separate contract agreement) that is
responsible for performing specific aspects or portions of the scope of work for the General
Contractor in accordance with the Contract documents.
“Substantial Completion” shall mean the stage in the progress of the project when the work or
designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract documents so
that the Owner can occupy or use the work or a portion thereof for its intended use. At this point,
only minor, punch list type work remains, retention may be released, and the warranty period may
begin.
"System" is all of the various components and equipment which combine together to provide the
end result of the project.
“TAB Contractor” shall mean the specialty contractor working either directly for the Owner or as a
Subcontractor to the Owner’s General Contractor that is responsible for performing all aspects of
the Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of the water and air flow associated with the proper
operation of the heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems in accordance with the Contract
documents.
“Temperature Controls Contractor” shall mean the specialty contractor working either directly for
the Owner or as a Subcontractor to the Owner’s General Contractor that is responsible for
performing all aspects of the automatic temperature controls scope of work associated with the
proper operation of the heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems in accordance with the
Contract documents.
"The work" shall mean the equipment, supplies, materials, labor, and services to be furnished
under the contract and the carrying out of all obligations imposed by the contract documents.
Revision 20160229
Page 11 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
Whenever in these contract documents the words "as ordered", "as directed", "as required", "as
permitted", "as allowed", or words or phrases of like import are used, it shall be understood that the
order, direction, requirement, permission, or allowance of the Owner is intended only to the extent
of judging compliance with the terms of the contract; none of these terms shall imply that the
Owner has any authority or responsibility for supervision of the Contractor's forces or construction
operations, such supervision and the sole responsibility therefore being strictly reserved for the
Contractor.
Similarly the words "approved", "reasonable", "suitable", "acceptable", "proper", "satisfactory", or
words of the like effect and import, unless otherwise particularly specified herein, shall mean
approved, reasonable, suitable, acceptable, proper, or satisfactory in the judgment of the Owner.
Whenever in these contract documents the expression "it is understood and agreed" or an
expression of like import is used, such expression shall mean the mutual understanding and
agreement of the parties executing the Contract Agreement.
3.2
Codes and Regulations
The most recent edition, unless otherwise noted, of the following codes, guides, handbooks and
standards, in effect upon the date of this contract shall be the basis for establishing minimum
requirements of quality, capacity, chemical and physical properties, and workmanship where the
contract documents are not specific.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Revision 20160229
Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA)
American with Disabilities Act (ADA)
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
American Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
American Society Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE)
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
American Welding Society (AWS)
Anti Friction Bearing Manufacturer Association (AFBMA)
Associated Air Balance Council (AABC)
Associated General Contractors of America (AGC)
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC)
Building Officials and Code Administrators (BOCA)
Factory Mutual (FM)
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
Insulated Power Cables Engineers Association (IPCEA)
Michigan Department of Transportation (MDOT)
Michigan Occupational Safety Act (MIOSHA)
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
Page 12 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards.
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
Sheet and Metal Air Conditioning National Associates (SMACNA)
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
State of Michigan Building Codes
American Concrete Institute (ACI)
National Association of Architectural Metals Manufacturers (NAAMM)
PART 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL
4.1
General
A.
4.2
Quality Assurance Program
A.
4.3
The program shall be capable of providing assurance that design, purchasing,
manufacturing, shipping, storage, erection, installation, testing, and examination of all
equipment, materials, and services will comply with the requirements of these Contract
Documents.
Inspections and Audits
A.
4.4
As a means of assuring that the performance of the Work, either at the site or at other
locations that support the site, fulfills the requirements of the Contract Documents, the
Contractor and its Subcontractors shall establish and implement a program for quality
assurance and quality control.
The Contractor's Work and related records shall be subject to inspection and audit by the
Owner's representatives to assure compliance with applicable requirements. Upon
detection of noncompliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the
accepted quality assurance manual, and/or control procedures, a request for corrective
action may be issued by the Owner. The Contractor shall correct in a timely manner all
such deficiencies so identified.
Rejection of Work
A.
All materials or equipment furnished or Work performed under this Contract shall be
subject to inspection by the Owner.
B.
If any equipment, work, or materials are found not to meet the requirements of the
specifications, the lot, or any faulty portion thereof, may be rejected. Before offering
work for inspection by the Owner, the Contractor shall, by his own inspection, eliminate
any items which, in his opinion, are defective, or do not meet the requirements of the
Contract Documents. The fact that the equipment, work, or materials have been
successfully inspected, tested, and accepted shall not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility in the case of later discovery of flaws or defects.
Revision 20160229
Page 13 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
4.5
Notification
A.
For all activities identified by the Owner for inspection, the Contractor shall provide
advance notice as directed by the Owner's representatives.
PART 5 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, PROTECTION, AND STANDARDS OF WORK
5.1
General
A.
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall furnish all construction, utilities, and
temporary facilities and all equipment, materials, and supplies which are required for
prosecution of the Work but which will not be incorporated in the completed work.
B.
The Owner will designate the boundary limits of construction activities and the
Contractor shall not trespass in or on areas not so designated. The Contractor shall be
responsible for keeping its personnel out of areas not designated for the Contractor's use;
except, in the case of isolated work located within such areas. Display of Contractor's
and Subcontractor's project signs will not be allowed.
C.
All construction plant, temporary facilities, and construction utilities provided by the
Owner for the Contractor's use shall remain the property of the Owner and shall be
returned to the Owner in satisfactory condition when the work is completed. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of damage to Owner-furnished construction
plant and temporary facilities when such damage has resulted from the construction
activities under this Contract.
D.
All temporary structures and facilities furnished by the Contractor shall remain the
property of the Contractor and shall be maintained throughout the work. Any materials,
equipment, or temporary structures installed or erected on the jobsite or within permanent
buildings by the Contractor shall be removed by him when so directed by the Owner to
permit the execution of other work in connection with the project or at the completion of
the Contractor's work.
E.
All Contractor-furnished construction plant and facilities shall be in first-class condition
and shall be of the proper type and size to perform the work. The plant and facilities
shall be regularly and systematically maintained throughout the work to ensure proper,
efficient operation. Plant and facilities which are inadequate or improperly maintained
shall be promptly modified, repaired, or removed from the site and replaced as directed
by the Owner, and at the Contractor's expense.
F.
When the work is completed, all Contractor-furnished temporary structures and facilities
shall be removed from the site and the area shall be restored to its original condition, or to
the satisfaction of the Owner.
G.
Temporary structures for offices, change houses, warehouses, and other uses for the
Contractor or its subcontractors shall be provided by the Contractor. Such structures or
trailers shall be placed only in the locations assigned by the Owner.
Revision 20160229
Page 14 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
5.2
H.
Owner will occupy the building and project area during life of the Contract. Contractor
shall prearrange with Owner to make connections to utilities at such times as will not
interrupt utility services of proper operation of the building and which are otherwise
convenient and satisfactory to Owner. At no time shall Owner's telephone service or
Radio Rooms be caused to be out of Service without consent of the Owner.
I.
Contractor whose work is involved shall protect, reroute, shore up, cap, cut off and/or
replace existing pipes, electrical work and other active utilities which may interfere with
new work.
Compressed Air
A.
5.3
5.4
Construction Power
A.
The Owner will furnish energy for construction electric power, welding, and temporary
lighting at no charge.
B.
Power will be provided by the Owner to supply the Contractor construction power
requirements, from existing equipment.
C.
The Contractor shall provide all disconnect switches, breakers, transformers, wiring, and
other devices required to distribute power for his use and for the use of his
subcontractors.
D.
Temporary power facilities shall conform to applicable safety and code requirements,
shall be constructed to provide proper clearances and minimum interference with
construction, and shall be acceptable to the Construction Manager.
E.
All temporary wiring shall conform to Article 305 - TEMPORARY WIRING of the
National Electrical Code.
Temporary Lighting
A.
5.5
The Contractor shall provide all air compressors, fuels, lubricants, hoses, piping, and
other apparatus required for supplying compressed air required for prosecution of his
work. Location shall be approved by Owner.
All lights required by law or ordinance or necessary for the proper protection of the
public and workers or for the proper execution and inspection of the Contractor's work
shall be furnished, placed, and maintained by the Contractor at his expense.
Water
A.
Water for construction use will be furnished by the Contractor The Contractor shall
provide piping, valves, and hoses as required to distribute the water for his and his
subcontractor's use.
B.
The Contractor will provide a source of supply for sanitary drinking water. The
Contractor shall provide sanitary drinking water facilities for his employees including
Revision 20160229
Page 15 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
coolers, ice, disposable cups, and a trash barrel at each water cooler. Each dispenser shall
be emptied, cleaned, and refilled at the start of each day, and personnel shall be assigned
to assure maintenance of the water supply.
5.6
Break Facilities
A.
5.7
Sanitary Facilities
A.
5.8
5.9
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all security affecting the prosecution of its work.
B.
The Contractor will provide and maintain site perimeter fencing and relocate temporary
fencing and barriers as required.
C.
All construction personnel shall park in areas designated by the Owner. Construction
personnel shall enter and exit the construction site from these designated parking areas
through control points. Construction personnel shall be subject to search by the security
personnel at their discretion.
D.
Construction personnel shall work with Owner’s Project Manager for access to the
construction site.
E.
Designate secured on site area for storage of Owner supplied and installed materials.
Maintain area in secure condition until project is turned over to Owner for occupancy.
First Aid
The Contractor shall provide for its own first aid requirements.
Fire Protection
A.
5.11
Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary project site sanitary facilities for use by
construction personnel during all phases of the project
Security
A.
5.10
Break facilities will be determined by Owner.
The Contractor shall be responsible for fire protection as described in PROJECT
COORDINATION.
Trash Collection and Disposal
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the cleanliness of its work areas. The Contractor
shall provide its own trash collection and disposal services.
B.
All petroleum products, thinners, solvents, or other items considered as hazardous
materials shall be disposed of by the Contractor by means of a hazardous material process
meeting state and federal requirements.
Revision 20160229
Page 16 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
5.12
5.13
Scaffolding
A.
The Contractor shall furnish all scaffolding, staging, ladders, flooring, runways, and any
other temporary construction required for the execution of the work.
B.
All scaffolding, runways, and other temporary construction shall be self-supporting
throughout and shall be rigidly built so as to support the weight of all materials,
apparatus, equipment, and construction personnel to be placed thereon as required by
federal, state, and local laws.
Soil
A.
Imported Soils:
1.
All contractor supplied backfill materials (i.e. sand from supplier pits) shall be
sampled and tested to assure the backfill sands are environmentally acceptable.
The testing shall at a minimum include analyzes for the "10 Michigan Metals",
(Arsenic, Barium, Cadmium, Chromium, Copper, Lead, Mercury, Selenium,
Silver, and Zinc).
2.
A representative soil sample shall be obtained from each of the contractor's sand
sources, sent to an accredited Lab for analysis with a copy of the results sent to
the Project Manager and Consumers Energy Environmental Remediation
Department (Robert Neumann) for review and approval. Once a particular sand
source has been approved, it will not necessarily be subject to a re-analysis. A
subsequent re-analysis of the source may be necessary if the results exceed 10%
of the respective limits of any metal.
3.
Consumers Energy Trail Street Lab is an accredited lab for soil analysis. Using
Consumers Energy lab may allow the project team to expedite the analysis if
time is an issue.
B.
Exported Soils:
1.
Excavated soils that cannot remain on the project site shall be prepared and
disposed at an approved landfill. Contact the Field Environmental Coordinator
and Waste Classification Manager (Pat Zombo) and use the attached "Waste
Material Information Sheet" for waste classification and disposal parameters.
Using Consumers Energy lab may allow the project team to expedite the analysis
if time is an issue.
PART 6 PROTECTION OF WORK
A.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the protection of its work until its final
acceptance by the Owner.
B.
The Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner because of any damage or loss to
the Contractor's work and shall be responsible for the complete restoration of damaged
work to its original condition complying with the specifications and drawings.
C.
In the event the Contractor's work is damaged by another party not under his supervision
or control, the Contractor shall make his claim directly with the party involved. If a
Revision 20160229
Page 17 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
conflict or disagreement develops between the Contractor and another contractor
concerning the responsibility for damage or loss to the Contractor's work, the conflict
shall be resolved by the Owner. Such conflict shall not be cause for delay in the
restoration of the damaged work. The Contractor shall restore the work immediately and
the cost thereof will be assigned pending the resolution of the conflict.
6.2
6.3
Protection of Concrete Surfaces
A.
Concrete floors and other surfaces shall be protected from chipping, gouging, scratching,
staining, and other damage. Damaged sections shall be repaired or removed and replaced
subject to the Owner's discretion and acceptance.
B.
Heavy planks and mats shall be placed under equipment and materials being stored,
moved, assembled, or installed on or above concrete floor surfaces. Nonflammable, oilresistant coverings shall be used to protect concrete surfaces from staining.
Protection of Pipe, Ductwork, Electrical Raceway, Cable, and Lighting Fixtures
A.
6.4
The Contractor shall protect pipe, ductwork, electrical raceway, cable, lighting fixtures,
and associated support systems against damage from movement of equipment and
materials, welding, flame cutting, and other construction damage. Pipe, ductwork,
raceway and supporting structures for raceway and lighting fixtures shall not be used as
access scaffolding at any time. Whenever welding or flame cutting operations occur
above or near pipe, ductwork, raceways, cables, or lighting fixtures not shielded from
such operations by concrete floors or other protective covers, the Contractor shall protect
the pipe, ductwork, raceways, cables, and lighting fixtures from damage by means of fireresistant boards or blankets. Damaged materials shall be repaired or replaced subject to
the Owner's discretion and acceptance.
Protection of Public and Private Property
A.
The Contractor shall protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain all underground pipes,
conduits, drains, other underground construction, existing structures and property
uncovered or otherwise affected by the construction work performed by him. All
landscaping pavement, surfacing, driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, utility poles, guy
wires, fences, and other surface structures affected by construction operations, shall be
restored to their original condition, whether within or outside the easement. All
landscaping replacements shall be made with new materials.
B.
The Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to existing structures, work,
materials, or equipment because of his operations and shall repair or replace any damaged
structures, work, materials, or equipment to the satisfaction of, and at no additional cost
to, the Owner.
Revision 20160229
Page 18 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
PART 7 MATERIAL HANDLING AND STORGE
7.1
7.2
7.3
General
A.
The Contractor shall arrange for the receipt, receive from carriers at the project site,
check, unload, handle, and store all materials and equipment which are to be incorporated
under the Contact including equipment and materials furnished by Owner, unless
otherwise specified.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the prompt unloading of materials and equipment
and shall pay any damage.
C.
The Contractor shall provide all storage facilities. Storage areas on the site shall be
limited to those areas so designated by the Owner.
Hazardous Materials
A.
For all shipments of Contractor-furnished equipment or materials arriving at the jobsite,
the Contractor shall provide all documentation required by the article CONTRACT
ADDENDUM CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS HAZARDOUS MATERIALS.
B.
Asbestos and PCB containing materials will not be allowed.
C.
Hazardous materials documentation provided by suppliers of Owner-furnished equipment
and materials will be furnished to the Contractor.
Receiving
A.
The Contractor shall examine all shipments of Owner-furnished equipment and material,
except spare parts and maintenance tools, and shall notify the Owner and Construction
Manager immediately of any shortages, discrepancies, or damage prior to formal
acceptance from the shipper.
B.
The Contractor shall prepare a listing of the materials or equipment received and
acknowledges receipt of such items from the Owner. The Contractor shall take
immediate custody of all materials and equipment received in good condition and shall
thereafter be solely responsible for any damage or shortage until final acceptance of the
Contractor's work.
C.
The Contractor shall replace all Owner-furnished materials and equipment which are lost
or damaged while in the custody of the Contractor. Replacement materials and
equipment shall be of a type and quality equal to the original materials and equipment,
shall be acceptable to the Owner, and shall be obtained expeditiously to prevent delay of
the work. Extensions of time will not be granted for delays caused by failure to receive
replacement materials and equipment at the time required for their installation.
D.
The Contractor shall maintain a current, accurate inventory and record of location for all
equipment and materials in his custody.
Revision 20160229
Page 19 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
7.4
Storage
A.
Stored equipment and materials shall be adequately supported and protected to prevent
damage. Equipment shall be moved into the permanent building or onto its permanent
foundation as soon as construction will permit. The manufacturer's recommendations
shall be followed concerning storage methods and maintenance of all equipment.
B.
Stored materials and equipment shall not be allowed to contact the ground. In
warehouses that do not have dry concrete or suspended floors, materials and equipment
shall be stored on platforms or shoring.
C.
All openings in equipment and piping not stored under weatherproof covers shall be
closed to prevent entrance of dirt or moisture during storage.
D.
All platforms, enclosures, shoring, and weatherproof coverings for storage use shall
remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed upon completion of the work.
E.
Indoor storage furnished by the Contractor shall consist of suitable construction trailers or
portable enclosures and shall be weather tight, well ventilated, and secure against theft
and vandalism.
F.
Equipment and materials which incorporate electrical equipment or which have finish
painted surfaces, and other items which would be damaged by outdoor exposure, shall be
stored indoors. When such storage would present an unreasonable building space or
volume requirement, the equipment or materials may, when acceptable to the Owner, be
stored under weatherproof coverings on shoring or platforms. The coverings shall cover
the top and sides of the equipment, shall be lapped to shed water, and shall be fastened
securely around the base of the equipment.
G.
All small loose items which could be easily lost, stolen, broken, or misused shall be
stored indoors.
H.
All other equipment and materials shall be stored on open platforms or shoring.
I.
All storage methods shall be subject to the approval of the Owner.
J.
Any equipment removed to be reused is under the responsibility of the Contractor for
appropriate storage and security. Any damage or loss shall be repaired or replaced at
Contractor’s expense.
K.
The Contractor shall prepare mechanical equipment to be stored by the Owner as follows,
(equipment to be weather-protected).
1.
Fan inlets and outlets shall be covered to keep out water and dirt.
2.
Pipe openings shall be capped.
3.
Exposed metal parts shall be coated to prevent rusting, and finned coils shall be
covered with plywood to keep their fins from being damaged.
4.
Equipment nameplate data shall be recorded and this data shall be given to the
Owner.
Revision 20160229
Page 20 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
END OF DOCUMENT
Revision 20160229
Page 21 of 21
00 70 10
General Conditions
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Design Document Review
B.
Submittal procedures.
C.
Construction progress schedules.
D.
Proposed products list.
E.
Product data.
F.
Shop drawings.
G.
Samples.
H.
Design data.
I.
Test reports.
J.
Certificates.
K.
Manufacturer's instructions.
L.
Manufacturer's field reports.
M.
Erection drawings.
N.
Construction photographs.
Design Document Review
A.
Civil
1.
2.
Revision 20141008
30% - Proposed site plan showing all structures and site improvements.
Established finish floor for all structures. Proposed routing and approximate riser
locations for all underground utilities. Proposed topographic modification
shown. Standard details and section shown. Listing of specification section to
be included in package.
60% - Revised site plan including refined topographic data. Traffic flow patterns
reviewed and incorporated. Catch basins, manholes, and risers located and
elevations set. Identify piping sizes and depths / slopes / profiles. Customized
Page 1 of 9
Submittal Procedures
01 33 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
3.
4.
details and sections underway. Proposed lighting shown on plan. Technical
specs ready for review. Most unit price pay items identified and documented.
90% - Civil work 99% complete. Site plan complete, details complete, technical
specs complete. Electrical and mechanical items identified - may still need to be
sized, located, and coordinated. Itemized and quantified scope of work 99%
complete.
100% - All Consumers Energy comments have been addressed and signed off.
B.
Architectural
1.
30% - All spaces indicated, rooms numbered in accordance with Consumers
Energy standards. Vertical transfer locations identified. Ceiling heights indicated.
Overhead equipment identified.
2.
60% - Building elevations, building sections, wall sections and typical details
provided. Reflected ceiling plan provided. Door schedule provided. Finish
schedule provided. Security and fire alarm systems identified.
3.
90% - Dimensions compete. All wall sections and details provided. Integrated
reflected ceiling plan provided. Door hardware complete. Finish schedule
complete. Equipment locations and services indicated. Security and fire alarm
systems coordinated.
4.
100% - All Consumers Energy comments have been addressed and signed off.
C.
Structural
1.
30% - Foundation system determined based on geotechnical work. Building
framing system determined and initial column layout (column lines set). Roofing
framing system determined. Wall heights set. Bearing wall identified. All
elevated equipment identified. Wall openings sized and located. Design loads
identified.
2.
60% - Foundation design 90% complete. Framing design 80% complete. Column
locations confirmed and sized. Roofing framing layed out. Equipment locations
set with footprints and loads finalized. Any special details identified.
Interferences with other trades and support of their equipment identified.
3.
90% - 100% complete drawings set. All structural members sized and laid out.
Details complete. Interferences worked out. Specification complete.
4.
100% - All Consumers Energy comments have been addressed and signed off.
D.
Mechanical
1.
30% - Estimated mechanical equipment sizes coordinated with electrical.
Monument locations such as large equipment locations, main duct and piping
locations (without sizing), and large roof and wall penetration locations.
2.
60% - HVAC & Piping zoning. Main ductwork and piping sizes. Final
equipment locations and coordinated with electrical. Mechanical equipment
schedules.
3.
90% - 100% complete drawing set including but not limited to the following:
Final air and water distribution with all duct and pipe sizes. All final diagrams
including piping, controls with sequence of operation, equipment diagrams and
details, final equipment schedules and specifications, and fully coordinated with
electrical.
4.
100% - All Consumers Energy comments have been addressed and signed off.
Revision 20141008
Page 2 of 9
Submittal Procedures
01 33 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
1.3
E.
Electrical
1.
30% - Anticipated electrical distribution equipment(i.e. panelboards, service
transformer, generator, etc.) and receptacle locations
2.
60% - Lighting layout w/ representative photometrics, electrical circuiting to
major equipment and furniture.
3.
90% - 100% complete drawing set including but not limited to the following:
complete electrical panel schedule, electrical circuiting to all devices and
equipment and complete lighting layout and circuiting
4.
100% - All Consumers Energy comments have been addressed and signed off.
F.
Calculation Reports – Load and Energy Models. The submittal shall contain all of the
inputs, outputs and energy analysis.
1.
30% - Initial estimated load and energy calculations based on block model. Load
shall be estimated based on industry best practice and refined as the project
details are developed. Where information is missing regarding the building
envelope or HVAC systems, the energy model values shall appropriately refer to
ASHRAE 90.1 and 62.1 standards or specific values agreed upon between the
Contractor and Owner. This initial model shall target early system selection
options and target the energy performance required by Owner. Include any early
energy conservation measures which may add value to the Owner. These
measures shall include, but not limited to, building envelope improvement,
lighting power density reduction and mechanical equipment performance.
2.
60% - Incorporate energy conservation measures identified and chosen during the
30% model review. Load calculations shall be further refined. Industry standard
loads per square foot shall be replaced by known values and equipment counts.
Internal load determination must be explained within the energy model report in
the case it differs from equipment counts. Lighting power densities shall be that
of the reflected ceiling plans and actual fixture wattage table. Mechanical
systems shall be fully defined with system type and efficiency although sizing
may not be fully complete. Provide further energy conservation measures to
meet or exceed the requirements set by the Owner.
3.
90% - Comments and adjustments from 60% model must be addressed and
incorporated in the 90% model. The load calculations and energy model shall be
completed. All energy conservation measures discussed during earlier reviews
shall be incorporated to ensure the minimum requirements set by the Owner have
been satisfied. All equipment selections and sizing shall be 100% completed and
locked in the model. All inputs shall match the project requirements and
construction document schedules.
4.
100% - All Consumers Energy comments have been addressed and signed offoff
by the Owner.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
Contractor shall submit all required product data, shop drawings and samples to
Architect/Engineer and to Owner for review.
a.
Contractor shall review all submittals prior to submission and shall stamp
all submittals indicating items have been reviewed by Contractor for
compliance with contract requirements.
Revision 20141008
Page 3 of 9
Submittal Procedures
01 33 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
b.
c.
d.
e.
Subsequent reviews shall be performed sequentially with initial
submission to Architect/Engineer.
Architect/Engineer shall review all submittals and shall stamp all
submittals indicating items have been reviewed by Architect/Engineer
for compliance with design intent.
Submit to Owner upon completion of Architect/Engineer review.
Owner shall review all submittals and shall stamp all submittals
indicating items have been reviewed by Owner for compliance with
design intent.
B.
Submit initial schedule of submittal within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor
Agreement. After review, resubmit required revised data within ten days.
C.
Transmit each submittal with architect/engineer accepted form.
D.
Sequentially number transmittal forms. Mark revised submittals with original number and
sequential alphabetic suffix.
E.
Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor and supplier; pertinent drawing and detail
number, and specification section number, appropriate to submittal.
F.
Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification
of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of
information is in accordance with requirements of the Work and contract documents.
G.
Schedule submittals to expedite project, and deliver to architect/engineer. Coordinate
submission of related items.
H.
For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from
Contractor.
I.
Create a submittal schedule to track submittals, submit to owner for review at the 90%
design review meeting, or where design is complete submit to owner for review at preconstruction meeting. Schedule to be similar to attached Owner’s “Submittal Schedule
Template”
J.
Identify variations from Contract documents and product or system limitations which
may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work.
K.
Allow space on submittals for Contractor and architect/engineer review stamps.
L.
When revised for resubmission, identify changes made since previous submission.
M.
Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly
report inability to comply with requirements.
N.
Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
O.
Submittal Naming Convention
Revision 20141008
Page 4 of 9
Submittal Procedures
01 33 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
1.
2.
1.4
Document from Contractor to Owner including the Contractor and
architect/engineer review stamp.
Specification Section-Sequential Number–Revision Number–Description.PDF
Example:
233700-1-R0-Air Outlets and Inlets.PDF
a.
The Sequential Number is a numerical designation given to a submittal
for which there are multiple submittals within one specification
Example:
260000-1-xxxxx
260000-2-xxxxx
Document from Owner to Contractor including the Owner’s stamp.
Specification Section–Sequential Number-Revision Number–Description–CE
Review Date.PDF
Example:
233700-1-R0-Air Outlets and Inlets-CE 2014_02_14.PDF
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A.
Submit initial schedules within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. After
review, resubmit required revised data within ten days.
B.
Submit revised Progress Schedules at each Owner progress review meeting and with each
Application for Payment.
C.
Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to Project site file, subcontractors, suppliers, and
other concerned parties.
D.
Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections
indicated in schedules.
E.
Submit computer generated horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major portion
of Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week.
F.
Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages
and other logically grouped activities. Indicate start dates and duration.
G.
Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission.
H.
Submit separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and
samples, including Owner furnished products and products identified under Allowances,
and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect/engineer. Indicate decision
dates for selection of finishes. List all required submittals including description of
submittal, anticipated submission date and required approval date. When developing
schedule include sufficient time to allow submittal review, resubmission and review of
rejected submittals and product ordering, fabrication and delivery lead times.
I.
Indicate delivery dates for Owner furnished products and products identified under
Allowances.
Revision 20141008
Page 5 of 9
Submittal Procedures
01 33 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
J.
1.5
1.6
1.7
Revisions To Schedules:
1.
Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion
date of each activity.
2.
Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and
other identifiable changes.
3.
Identify and define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule.
Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect including effect of
changes on schedules of separate contractors.
PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST
A.
Within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, submit list of major products
proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each
product.
B.
For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model
or catalog designation, and reference standards.
PRODUCT DATA
A.
Product data: Submit to architect/engineer for review for limited purpose of checking for
conformance with information given and design concept expressed in contract
documents.
B.
Submit documents in Adobe Portable Document (PDF) format. When physical copies of
documents are required submit number of copies Contractor requires, plus two copies
architect/engineer will retain.
C.
Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.
Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this project.
D.
Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and
location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
E.
After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES article and for record documents described in Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements.
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit to architect/engineer for review for limited purpose of checking
for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract
documents.
B.
Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and
location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
Revision 20141008
Page 6 of 9
Submittal Procedures
01 33 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
1.8
1.9
C.
When required by individual specification sections, provide shop drawings signed and
sealed by professional engineer responsible for designing components shown on shop
drawings.
1.
Include signed and sealed calculations to support design.
2.
Submit drawings and calculations in form suitable for submission to and
approval by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.
Make revisions and provide additional information when required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
D.
Submit documents in Adobe Portable Document (PDF) format. When physical copies of
documents are required submit number of opaque reproductions Contractor requires, plus
two copies architect/engineer will retain.
E.
After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES article and for record documents described in Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements.
SAMPLES
A.
Samples: Submit to architect/engineer for review for limited purpose of checking for
conformance with information given and design concept expressed in contract
documents.
B.
Samples for selection as specified in product sections:
1.
Submit to architect/engineer for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
2.
Submit samples of finishes from full range of manufacturers' standard colors,
textures, and patterns for architect/engineer selection.
C.
Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of products, with
integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
D.
Include identification on each sample, with full project information.
E.
Submit number of samples specified in individual specification sections;
architect/engineer will retain one sample.
F.
Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual
specification sections.
G.
Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in specification
section.
H.
After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 70 00
- Execution and Closeout Requirements.
DESIGN DATA
A.
Submit for architect/engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.
Revision 20141008
Page 7 of 9
Submittal Procedures
01 33 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
B.
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
given and design concept expressed in contract documents.
TEST REPORTS
A.
Submit for architect/engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.
B.
Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with
information given and design concept expressed in contract documents.
CERTIFICATES
A.
When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer,
installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to architect/engineer, in quantities
specified for product data.
B.
Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit
supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C.
Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be
acceptable to architect/engineer.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A.
When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for
delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to
architect/engineer for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for product data.
B.
Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special
environmental criteria required for application or installation.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS
A.
Submit reports for architect/engineer's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.
B.
Submit report within 5 days of observation to architect/engineer for information.
C.
Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
given and design concept expressed in contract documents.
ERECTION DRAWINGS
A.
Submit drawings for architect/engineer's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.
B.
Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
given and design concept expressed in contract documents.
Revision 20141008
Page 8 of 9
Submittal Procedures
01 33 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
C.
1.15
Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by
architect/engineer or Owner.
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A.
Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work.
B.
Each month submit photographs with application for payment.
C.
Photographs: Electronic format.
D.
Take two site photographs from differing directions and five interior photographs
indicating relative progress of the Work, five days maximum prior to submitting.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Revision 20141008
Page 9 of 9
Submittal Procedures
01 33 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
SECTION 01 40 00
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Quality control and control of installation.
B.
Tolerances
C.
References.
D.
Mock-up requirements.
E.
Testing and inspection services.
F.
Manufacturers' field services.
G.
Examination.
H.
Preparation.
QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A.
Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions,
and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B.
Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C.
When manufacturers' instructions conflict with contract documents, request clarification
from architect/engineer before proceeding.
D.
Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more
stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more
precise workmanship.
E.
Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F.
Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by
manufacturer.
G.
Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement.
Revision 20140110
Page 1 of 5
Quality Requirements
01 40 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
TOLERANCES
A.
Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable
Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B.
Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. When manufacturers' tolerances conflict with
contract documents, request clarification from architect/engineer before proceeding.
C.
Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
REFERENCES
A.
For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus
standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements
are specified or are required by applicable codes.
B.
Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Owner-Contractor
Agreement except where specific date is established by code.
C.
Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.
D.
When specified reference standards conflict with contract documents, request
clarification from architect/engineer before proceeding.
E.
Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor
those of architect/engineer shall be altered from contract documents by mention or
inference otherwise in reference documents.
MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS
A.
Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in
respective product specification sections.
B.
Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices,
flashings, seals, and finishes.
C.
Accepted mock-ups shall be comparison standard for remaining Work.
D.
Where mock-up has been accepted by architect/engineer and is specified in product
specification sections to be removed; remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do
so by architect/engineer.
TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
A.
Employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory acceptable to
Owner to perform specified testing.
1.
Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone
number.
Revision 20140110
Page 2 of 5
Quality Requirements
01 40 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
B.
When designated in individual specification section Owner will employ and pay for
specified services of an independent firm to perform testing and inspection.
C.
The independent firm will perform tests, inspections and other services specified in
individual specification sections and as required by architect/engineer and authority
having jurisdiction.
D.
Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform
off-site testing as required by architect/engineer or Owner.
E.
Reports will be submitted by independent firm to architect/engineer, indicating
observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with
Contract documents.
F.
Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment,
tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested.
1.
Notify architect/engineer and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time
for operations requiring services.
2.
Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and
tests required for Contractor's use.
G.
Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of
obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of contract documents.
H.
Re-testing or re-inspection required because of non-conformance to specified
requirements shall be performed by same independent firm on instructions by
architect/engineer. Payment for re-testing or re-inspection will be charged to Contractor
by deducting testing charges from Contract Sum/Price.
I.
Agency responsibilities:
1.
Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.
2.
Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with architect/engineer and
Contractor in performance of services.
3.
Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified
standards.
4.
Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract
documents.
5.
Promptly notify architect/engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or
non-conformance of Work or products.
6.
Perform additional tests required by architect/engineer.
7.
Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.
J.
Agency Reports: After each test, promptly submit copies of report to Architect/engineer
and to Contractor. When requested by Architect/engineer, provide interpretation of test
results. Include the following:
1.
Date issued.
2.
Project title and number.
3.
Name of inspector.
4.
Date and time of sampling or inspection.
Revision 20140110
Page 3 of 5
Quality Requirements
01 40 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
K.
1.7
Identification of product and specifications section.
Location in Project.
Type of inspection or test.
Date of test.
Results of tests.
Conformance with Contract documents.
Limits On Testing Authority:
1.
Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements
of contract documents.
2.
Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3.
Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor.
4.
Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A.
When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers
or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions,
conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment,
test, adjust and balance of equipment and commissioning as applicable, and to initiate
instructions when necessary.
B.
Submit qualifications of observer to architect/engineer 30 days in advance of required
observations.
C.
Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers
that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
D.
Refer to Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, MANUFACTURERS' FIELD
REPORTS article.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work.
Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B.
Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work
being applied or attached.
C.
Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
Revision 20140110
Page 4 of 5
Quality Requirements
01 40 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
D.
3.2
Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B.
Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C.
Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner
prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond.
END OF SECTION
Revision 20140110
Page 5 of 5
Quality Requirements
01 40 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Products.
B.
Product delivery requirements.
C.
Product storage and handling requirements.
D.
Product options.
E.
Product substitution procedures.
F.
Equipment electrical characteristics and components.
PRODUCTS
A.
Furnish products of qualified manufacturers suitable for intended use. Furnish products of
each type by single manufacturer unless specified otherwise.
B.
Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as
specifically permitted by Contract Documents.
C.
Furnish interchangeable components from same manufacturer for components being
replaced.
PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Promptly inspect shipments to ensure products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct, and products are undamaged.
C.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
D.
Reject damaged, deteriorated or contaminated material and immediately remove from the
site. Replace rejected material with new material at no additional cost to the Owner.
PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
Revision 20140110
Page 1 of 3
Product Requirements
01 60 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
1.5
1.6
B.
Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
C.
Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an
environment favorable to product.
D.
For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
E.
Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage
or protection.
F.
Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide
ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.
G.
Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent mixing
with foreign matter.
H.
Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
I.
Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify
products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
Products specified by reference standards or by description only: Any product meeting
those standards or description.
B.
Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers: Products of one of
manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C.
Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers with provision for substitutions:
Submit request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the
following article.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A.
Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for Substitutions
during bidding period to requirements specified in this section.
B.
Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of
Contractor.
C.
Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed
substitution with contract documents.
D.
A request constitutes a representation that bidder:
1.
Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds
quality level of specified product.
2.
Will provide same warranty for substitution as for specified product.
Revision 20140110
Page 2 of 3
Product Requirements
01 60 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
3.
4.
5.
E.
Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be
required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently
become apparent.
Will reimburse Owner and architect/engineer for review or redesign services
associated with re-approval by authorities having jurisdiction.
Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing
or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will
require revision to Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A.
Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities,
sizes, and materials indicated. Include lugs for terminal box.
B.
Cord and Plug: Furnish minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for
connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual
specification sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Revision 20140110
Page 3 of 3
Product Requirements
01 60 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
SECTION 01 70 00
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Closeout procedures.
B.
Final cleaning.
C.
Starting of systems.
D.
Demonstration and instructions.
E.
Testing, adjusting and balancing.
F.
Protecting installed construction.
G.
Project record documents.
H.
Operation and maintenance data.
I.
Manual for materials and finishes.
J.
Manual for equipment and systems.
K.
Spare parts and maintenance products.
L.
Product warranties and product bonds.
M.
Maintenance service.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Submit written certification that contract documents have been reviewed, Work has been
inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with contract documents and ready
for architect/engineer's review.
B.
Provide submittals to architect/engineer required by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract sum, previous
payments, and sum remaining due.
D.
Owner will occupy all of building as specified in scope of work.
FINAL CLEANING
Revision 20140110
Page 1 of 8
Execution and Closeout Requirements
01 70 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
1.4
1.5
A.
Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.
B.
Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels,
stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted
and soft surfaces.
C.
Clean equipment and fixtures to sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to
surface and material being cleaned.
D.
Replace filters of operating equipment.
E.
Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
F.
Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
G.
Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from site.
STARTING OF SYSTEMS
A.
Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B.
Notify architect/engineer and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.
C.
Verify each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage.
D.
Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those
required by equipment or system manufacturer.
E.
Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
F.
Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative in
accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
G.
When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide
authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or
system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in
operation.
H.
When specified in individual specification Sections, submit a written report in accordance
with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures that equipment or system has been properly
installed and is functioning correctly.
DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks
prior to date of substantial completion.
Revision 20140110
Page 2 of 8
Execution and Closeout Requirements
01 70 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
1.6
1.7
B.
Demonstrate Project equipment and instruct in classroom environment located at project
site and instructed by manufacturer's representative who is knowledgeable about the
Project.
C.
For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other
season within six months.
D.
Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of
manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and
maintenance.
E.
Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing,
maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment
location.
F.
Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for
additional data becomes apparent during instruction.
G.
Required instruction time for each item of equipment and system is specified in
individual sections.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
A.
Contractor will employ services of independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and
balancing. Contractor shall pay for testing, adjusting, and balancing services.
B.
Independent firm will perform testing, adjusting, and balancing services specified.
C.
Reports will be submitted by independent firm to architect/engineer indicating
observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with
requirements of contract documents.
PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual
specification sections.
B.
Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in
immediate work area to prevent damage.
C.
Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
D.
Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or
movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
E.
Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. When traffic or activity
is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing
material manufacturer.
Revision 20140110
Page 3 of 8
Execution and Closeout Requirements
01 70 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
F.
1.8
1.9
Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the
Work as the Work progresses:
1.
Drawings.
2.
Specifications.
3.
Addenda.
4.
Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5.
Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
6.
Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B.
Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C.
Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
D.
Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly.
E.
Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual
products installed, including the following:
1.
Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2.
Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3.
Changes made by addenda and modifications.
F.
Record drawings and shop drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual
construction including:
1.
Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish main floor datum.
2.
Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3.
Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in
construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4.
Field changes of dimension and detail.
5.
Details not on original Contract drawings.
G.
Submit documents to architect/engineer prior to final application for payment.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring binders with durable
plastic covers.
B.
Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders
are required.
C.
Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as
described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
Revision 20140110
Page 4 of 8
Execution and Closeout Requirements
01 70 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
1.10
D.
Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger
drawings to size of text pages.
E.
Contents: Prepare table of contents for each volume, with each product or system
description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows:
1.
Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
architect/engineer, contractor, sSubcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
2.
Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by system and
subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names,
addresses, and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the
following:
a.
Significant design criteria.
b.
List of equipment.
c.
Parts list for each component.
d.
Operating instructions.
e.
Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
f.
Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning
methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental
agents.
3.
Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a.
Shop drawings and product data.
b.
Air and water balance reports.
c.
Certificates.
d.
Originals of warranties.
MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A.
Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents
before start of Work. Architect/engineer will review draft and return one copy with
comments.
B.
For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and
operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
C.
Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. Draft copy will
be reviewed and returned with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise content of
document sets as required prior to final submission.
D.
Submit two sets of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after final
inspection.
E.
Building products, applied materials, and finishes: Include product data, with catalog
number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Include information for
re-ordering custom manufactured products.
F.
Instructions for care and maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for
cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and
recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
Revision 20140110
Page 5 of 8
Execution and Closeout Requirements
01 70 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
1.11
G.
Moisture protection and weather exposed products: Include product data listing
applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Include
recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.
H.
Additional requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
I.
Include listing in table of contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for
insertion of data.
MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A.
Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents
before start of Work. Architect/engineer will review draft and return one copy with
comments.
B.
For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and
operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
C.
Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. Draft copy will
be reviewed and returned with architect/engineer comments. Revise content of document
sets as required prior to final submission.
D.
Submit two sets of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after final
inspection.
E.
Each item of equipment and each system: Include description of unit or system, and
component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete
nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.
F.
Panelboard circuit directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications; typed.
G.
Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.
H.
Operating procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating
instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and
emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and special operating instructions.
I.
Maintenance requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative
maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and
alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
J.
Include servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
K.
Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
L.
Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
Revision 20140110
Page 6 of 8
Execution and Closeout Requirements
01 70 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
1.12
1.13
M.
Include original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams
required for maintenance.
N.
Include control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.
O.
Include Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as
installed.
P.
Include charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to
flow and control diagrams.
Q.
Include list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended
quantities to be maintained in storage.
R.
Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01 40 00 - Quality
Requirements.
S.
Additional requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
T.
Include listing in table of contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for
insertion of data.
SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
A.
Furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual
specification sections.
B.
Deliver to project site and place in location as directed by Owner; obtain receipt prior to
final payment.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS
A.
Obtain warranties and bonds executed by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers, within ten days after completion of applicable item of work.
B.
Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from subcontractors,
suppliers, and manufacturers.
C.
Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
D.
Co-execute submittals when required.
E.
Include table of contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic
cover.
F.
Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
G.
Time Of Submittals:
Revision 20140110
Page 7 of 8
Execution and Closeout Requirements
01 70 00
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
1.
2.
3.
1.14
For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during
construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after
acceptance.
Make other submittals within ten days after date of substantial completion, prior
to final application for payment.
For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond date of substantial
completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as
beginning of warranty or bond period.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections for
one year from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Examine system components at frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean,
adjust, and lubricate as required.
C.
Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or
replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original
component.
D.
Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or subcontractor without prior
written consent of Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Revision 20140110
Page 8 of 8
Execution and Closeout Requirements
01 70 00
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 02 41 19
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions of Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
2.
Salvage of existing items to be reused.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.4
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician.
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification
program.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1.
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2.
If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate
contract.
Page 1 of 4
Selective Structure Demolition
02 41 19
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
E.
F.
G.
1.7
Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in buildings and structures to be
selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review
and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.
1.
Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
2.
Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials
except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to
determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned
collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition
operations.
Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings
preconstruction photographs, preconstruction videotapes and templates.
1.
Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation."
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage.
1.
Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in
Section 011000 "Summary."
Page 2 of 4
Selective Structure Demolition
02 41 19
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
B.
C.
3.3
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.
2.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
4.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and
cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
b.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material.
c.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
d.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
e.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
f.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
g.
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished
according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
3.4
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Page 3 of 4
Selective Structure Demolition
02 41 19
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
2.
B.
C.
3.5
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
3.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression
devices during flame-cutting operations.
4.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
5.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
6.
All materials and services slated for removal are to be fully removed, cleaned up and
firestopped as required in Closeout Procedures, Final Cleaning, and 078416 Firestopping.
Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1.
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
3.6
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
3.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
4.
Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Page 4 of 4
Selective Structure Demolition
02 41 19
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 07 13 29
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their
load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
1.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in
a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that result in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
2.
Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, which results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that result in increased maintenance or
decreased operational life or safety.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in
occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Engineer's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic
qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
WARRANTY
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
Work Order #
Page 1 of 3
Cutting and Patching
07 13 29
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
EXAMINATION
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be
performed.
1.
Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.
2.
Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during
cutting and patching operations.
C.
Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
D.
Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting
to minimize interruption to occupied areas.
3.3
A.
PERFORMANCE
General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
B.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of
other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original
condition.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering
and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Work Order #
Page 2 of 3
Cutting and Patching
07 13 29
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
5.
C.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.
1.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
integrity of installation.
2.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching
and refinishing.
a.
b.
3.
D.
Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #
Page 3 of 3
Cutting and Patching
07 13 29
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS
1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
Work includes surface preparation and field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other
coatings.
ASTM International (ASTM): ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish,
Lacquer, and Related Products. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this
standard.
The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual.
Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and product data for all finishing products to be
utilized on site.
Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors for each color and system selected with
specified coats cascaded. Submit on heavy paper, 8-1/2x11 inch in size.
Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
Container label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
Paint materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and maximum of 90
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside temperature ranges
required by paint product manufacturer.
Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow when relative humidity is outside humidity
ranges, or moisture content of surfaces exceed those required by paint product manufacturer.
Minimum application temperatures for latex paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for
exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
Minimum application temperature for varnish finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior,
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candle measured mid-height at substrate surface.
Supply 1 gallon of each color and type for Owner’s use; store where directed.
Label each container with color, type and room locations in addition to manufacturer's label.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
Manufacturers:
A.
Benjamin-Moore & Company.
B.
Devoe Paint Co.
C.
The Glidden Co.
D.
ICI Paint Stores
E.
PPG Architectural Finishes.
F.
Sherwin-Williams
G.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Prepare coatings to soft paste
consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to homogeneous coating, for good
flow and brushing properties and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
Paints and Coatings
09 90 00
Revision 20130827
Page 1 of 4
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
2.3
2.4
2.5
Accessory materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not
specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified; commercial quality.
Patching materials: Latex filler.
Fastener head cover materials: Latex filler.
3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Verify surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by product manufacturer.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report conditions
capable of affecting proper application.
Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes
unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
A.
Plaster and gypsum wallboard: 12 percent.
B.
Masonry, concrete, and concrete unit masonry: 12 percent.
C.
Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
Surface appurtenances: Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and
fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. Mask non-removable items; sprinklers,
equipment, labels, signs, lights, etc.
Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces capable of affecting work of this section. Remove or
repair existing coatings exhibiting surface defects. Seal with shellac marks which may bleed
through surface finishes.
A.
Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium
phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
B.
Insulated coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.
C.
Gypsum board surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after
repair.
D.
Galvanized surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent.
Apply coat of etching primer.
E.
Concrete and unit masonry surfaces scheduled to receive paint finish: Remove dirt, loose
mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with
solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by
weathering of corroding metals with solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly
wetting with water. Allow to dry.
F.
Plaster surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching
plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali
surfaces.
G.
Uncoated steel and iron surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust.
Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by power tool wire brushing or
sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply treatment of phosphoric acid
solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after
repairs.
H.
Shop primed steel surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather
edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare
steel surfaces.
I.
Interior wood items scheduled to receive paint finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to
priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and
cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats.
Paints and Coatings
09 90 00
Revision 20130827
Page 2 of 4
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
J.
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
Interior wood items scheduled to receive transparent finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior
to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and
cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats.
K.
Exterior wood scheduled to receive paint finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter.
Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior paintable
caulking compound after prime coat has been applied.
L.
Exterior wood scheduled to receive transparent finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign
matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted
exterior caulking compound after sealer has been applied.
M.
Wood doors scheduled for painting: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces with
tinted primer.
N.
Metal doors scheduled for painting: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.
Extend existing paint and coatings installations using materials and methods compatible with
existing installations and as specified.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding
coat unless specified otherwise.
A.
Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
B.
Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just
prior to applying next coat.
Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into grain before set.
Wipe excess from surface.
Prime concealed surfaces of exterior woodwork with primer paint.
Prime concealed surfaces of interior wood surfaces scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish
with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner.
Finishing mechanical and electrical equipment:
A.
Refer to mechanical identification specification for schedule of color coding and
identification banding of equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit.
B.
Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and
electrical components and paint separately.
C.
Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed
ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are shop finished.
D.
Paint interior surfaces of air ducts [and convector and baseboard heating cabinets] visible
through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. Paint
dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match
face panels.
E.
Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.
F.
Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment
before installing equipment.
G.
Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in accordance with
requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows, names, and
numbering.
H.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings
removed prior to finishing.
Collect waste material which may constitute fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
Schedule - shop primed items for site finishing:
Paints and Coatings
09 90 00
Revision 20130827
Page 3 of 4
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
3.16
3.17
3.18
A.
Exposed surfaces of lintels.
B.
Guardrails and handrails.
C.
Ladders, ladder safety cage.
D.
Metal stairs: Exposed surfaces of stringers, exposed vertical risers, exposed underside.
Schedule - exterior surfaces:
A.
Wood - painted (opaque): One coat of latex primer sealer. Two coats of latex enamel,
semi-gloss.
B.
Wood - transparent: One coat of stain.
C.
Pavement markings: One coat of paint, white.
1.
Accessible parking stalls; One coat of paint, blue.
D.
Gypsum board or cement plaster soffits: One coat of primer sealer latex. One coat of
latex, flat.
E.
Steel - unprimed: One coat of latex primer. Two coats of latex enamel, gloss.
F.
Steel - shop primed: Touch-up with zinc rich primer. Two coats of latex enamel, gloss.
G.
Steel - galvanized: One coat galvanize primer. Two coats of latex enamel, gloss.
Schedule - interior surfaces:
A.
Concrete floor surfaces: Slip resistant top coat with embedded broadcast aggregate finish,
minimum slip resistance rating greater than 36 when measured in accordance with ASTM
E303-93.
B.
Wood - painted: One coat of latex primer sealer. Two coats of latex enamel, semi-gloss.
C.
Wood - transparent: Filler coat (for open grained wood only). One coat of stain. One coat
sealer. One coat of varnish, satin.
D.
Concrete, concrete block: One coat of block filler. Two coats of latex flat. semi-gloss.
E.
Steel - unprimed: One coat of alkyd primer. Two coats of latex enamel, semi-gloss.
F.
Steel - primed: Touch-up with alkyd primer. Two coats of latex enamel, semi-gloss.
G.
Steel - galvanized: One coat galvanize primer. Two coats of latex enamel, semi-gloss.
H.
Gypsum board: One coat of alkyd primer sealer. Two coats of latex enamel, eggshell.
I.
Gypsum board and plaster ceilings: One coat of alkyd primer sealer. Two coats of latex
enamel, flat.
J.
Wall surfaces under vinyl wall covering: One coat of alkyd primer sealer.
K.
Insulated coverings - canvas and cotton: One coat of alkyd primer sealer.
L.
One coat alkyd enamel, semi-gloss.
Colors:
A.
Walls: Benjamin-Moore: Super White Ready Mix #02, Eggshell.
B.
Interior Doors: Pratt & Lambert: Gigs’ Grey #POR-2239-000, Satin.
C.
Interior Door Frames: Pratt & Lambert: Gigs’ Grey #POR-2239-000, Semi Gloss.
D.
Acoustic Panels: Benjamin-Moore: Super White Ready Mix #02, Matte.
E.
IPA Accent Band: Sherwin-Williams: #SW1244 Rhythm N’ Blues.
F.
Underground hoist cover plates and frames: Safety Yellow, with non-skid additive.
G.
Mezzanine stairs and railings: Safety Yellow.
H.
Dock leveler and frame: Safety Yellow, with non-skid additive
I.
Carport/Truckport: Sherwin-Williams: #SW6069 French Roast.
J.
Exterior Doors and Frames: Sherwin-Williams: #SW6069 French Roast.
END OF SECTION
Paints and Coatings
09 90 00
Revision 20130827
Page 4 of 4
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
SECTION 09 99 99
FINISH COLOR SCHEDULE
Resilient Wall Base:
Roppe: Black-Brown #P193
Johnsonite: Burnt Umber #63
Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT):
12x12: Armstrong: Imperial Texture Standard Excelon; Earthstone Greige #51804
12x24: Armstrong: Striations Bio Based Tile; Tea Time #3616
Resilient Athletic Flooring:
Mondo America, Inc.; Sport Impact; Sealskin; Dark Grey #018
Resilient Tread and Riser Covers (landings to match):
Roppe: Fawn #P140
Ceramic Floor Tile (CT):
American Olean: Mushroom Speckled #A41
Grout: Mapei Keracolor S, #19 Pearl Grey
Ceramic Wall Base (CT):
American Olean: Mushroom Speckled #A41
Grout: Mapei Keracolor S, #19 Pearl Grey
Ceramic Wall Tile (CT):
American Olean: Gloss Almond #0012
Grout: Mapei Keracolor U, #94 Straw
Ceramic Accent Wall Tile (CT):
American Olean: Nutmeg #0037
Grout: Mapei Keracolor U, #94 Straw
Quarry Tile (QT):
American Olean: Fawn Gray #Q06
Grout: Mapei Keracolor S, #19 Pearl Grey
Paint (PT):
Walls: Benjamin-Moore: Super White Ready Mix #02, Eggshell.
Interior Doors: Pratt & Lambert: Gigs’ Grey #POR-2239-000, Satin.
Interior Door Frames: Pratt & Lambert: Gigs’ Grey #POR-2239-000, Semi Gloss.
Acoustic Panels: Benjamin-Moore: Super White Ready Mix #02, Matte.
IPA Accent Band: Sherwin-Williams: #SW1244 Rhythm N’ Blues.
Carport/Truckport: Sherwin-Williams: #SW6069 French Roast.
Exterior Doors and Frames: Sherwin-Williams: #SW6069 French Roast.
Hazard Markings: Safety Yellow.
Color Schedule
09 99 99
Revision 20150922
Page 1 of 2
Exhibit A-1
Consumers Energy
Plastic Laminate (PL):
Nevamar: Botanical Allusion #AL5002-HGS-T (countertop; green)
Nevamar: Tropical Allusion #AL5001-HGS-T (countertop; blue)
Nevamar: Fossil Gray #S6031-HGS-T (cabinet face frame, side panels, drawer faces, door faces)
Nevamar: Chalk White #S7024-HGS-T (cabinet interiors)
Formica: Vibrant Green #6901-58 (Direct Payment Office countertop; Consumers Energy green)
Formica: Spectrum Blue #851-58 (Direct Payment Office countertop; Consumers Energy blue)
Consumers Energy Logo Colors:
Pantone #368 (green swoosh)
Pantone #300 (blue lettering)
END OF SECTION
Color Schedule
09 99 99
Revision 20150922
Page 2 of 2
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
Section 1 General
1.01
1.02
1.03
SCOPE
A.
General: These specifications are intended to cover the modernization of One (1) passenger
hydraulic elevator in a first-class manner. The elevator is located at 35350 Kelly Rd., Clinton
Township, MI 48035.
B.
Elevator Work: The work shall include, but not be limited to, complete control systems,
controller assemblies, machine assemblies, door operation systems, door protection systems,
signal systems with voice annunciation, cab assemblies and refurbishment of safety buffers. All
elevator work must be brought up to current code. Elevator Contractor must include schedule,
plan and sequence of work with bid.
C.
Non Elevator Work: All non elevator work in the machine room, hoistway, and pits is the
responsibility of the general contractor. This work includes, but is not limited to all electrical,
drywall, fire safety, and air temperature control work. This work also includes all building code
upgrades necessary due to the elevator modernization.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall review contract documents and any existing conditions in
order to identify conflicts with their products which might create construction problems.
Elevator Contractor shall perform the specified work in accordance with the requirements of the
Elevator Specifications, all local elevator and building codes and bid documents.
B.
Document Review: Elevator Contractor shall review contract documents and any existing
conditions in order to identify conflicts with their products which might create
construction/installation problems. No change orders will be accepted unless required changes
to scope per Owner/ Management only.
C.
Exceptions: Elevator Contractor shall include all work necessary to complete the elevator
modernization as required by the Contract Documents unless exceptions are noted in writing
with bid. All exceptions must be part of the contract if they are to be included in the project.
D.
Definitions: Definitions for terms used in these specifications may be found in ASME A17.1.
WORK INCLUDED
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall include all work necessary to complete the elevator
installation per the Contract Documents and all local elevator and building codes.
B.
Code Compliance: Elevator Contractor shall provide any additional material or modifications to
equipment required to meet enforceable Codes, Standards and Laws. If current elevator code
changes occur prior to the finalizing of documents and contracts, the elevator contractor must let
Owner/Management know of the changes prior to acceptance of project contract. If
Owner/Management is not notified, the Elevator Contractor will solely be responsible for any
and all costs associated with the elevator code upgrades.
C.
First-Class Condition: Elevator Contractor shall include servicing, lubrication and painting of all
new and retained equipment to insure all equipment is in first-class condition at the completion
of the project.
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 1 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
1.04
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
D.
Multiple Parts: Elevator Contractor shall provide the proper number of devices or parts required.
In all cases where a device or a part of the equipment is herein referred to in the singular, it is
intended to apply to the number of devices or parts required to complete the installation.
E.
Removal of Material: Elevator Contractor shall remove from the location all elevator equipment
which is not retained. Elevator Contractor shall provide dumpsters and shall coordinate their use
with the Owner/ Management. All material is to be recycled when possible and recycle
confirmation may be required for verification by Owner.
F.
Compatibility: Elevator Contractor shall provide material which is compatible with the retained
elevator equipment
G.
Accommodation: Elevator Contractor shall pay for changes to structural, mechanical, electrical
or other systems required to accommodate Elevator Contractor's elevator equipment. All fees
for any close-out documents and as built drawings that need to be modified will be the duty of
the Elevator Contractor.
NON ELEVATOR WORK RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR
A.
General: General Contractor shall coordinate the work identified with the other contractors.
General Contractor must inform the Consumers Energy Project Manager and the Building
Manager in writing before the start of the contract of any deficiencies the building needs to
address that affect the elevator contractor and the project. General Contractor is responsible to
bring all elevator work up to all building code requirements and codes.
B.
Machine Room Requirements:
C.
1.
Enclosure: Make each elevator machine room to meet code and keep the rooms at
ambient temperature.
2.
Access: A minimum 42” wide by 84” high fire-rated door shall be provided which is
self-closing and self-locking. Proper emergency egress shall be provided. Permanent
non-combustible stairs with handrails shall be provided where floor levels for access
are different.
3.
Cooling/Heating:
Fahrenheit.
4.
Fire Extinguisher: Provide ABC fire extinguisher. Mount to the wall adjacent to the
access door.
5.
Non-Elevator Equipment: Pipes, ducts or any other non-elevator equipment shall be
removed from the machine room.
Provide conditioned air to keep room between 90º and 45º
Hoistway Requirements:
1.
Enclosure: Retain walls. Any holes in the interior hoistway walls shall be patched to
maintain fire rating.
2.
Projections: Retain beveled guards where the side or rear wall projects, recedes or is
set-back more than 2 inches. Any damaged guards shall be repaired.
3.
Non-Elevator Equipment: Pipes, ducts or any other non-elevator equipment shall be
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 2 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
removed from the hoistway.
D.
E.
Electrical Requirements: all work to be completed per State of Michigan and local code.
1.
Mainline Disconnect: One lockable, three-phase, 100 amp fused (breaker) disconnect
(switch) shall be provided for each elevator in the machine room located within sight of
both controller and machine assembly. This disconnect shall be labeled to identify the
location of the supply side over current protection.
2.
Group/Simplex Controller Disconnect: One fused service with switch shall be provided
for each elevator group/simplex elevator in each machine room/or location per current
code. The source shall be from an emergency power circuit.
3.
Cab Lighting Disconnect: One lockable fused single-phase 120 volt service with switch
shall be provided for each elevator in the machine room. The source shall be from an
emergency power circuit. This disconnect shall be provided with a sign to identify the
location of the supply side over current protective device. The over current device
protecting the branch circuit shall be located in the elevator machine room/or location
per current code.
4.
Machine Room Lighting: Adequate lighting (minimum 20 ft-c) shall be provided in the
machine room. One light switch shall be provided on the lock-jamb side adjacent to
each machine room access door. A minimum of one (1) 120 volt single-phase 20 amp
duplex GFI-type outlet shall be provided in the machine room. The lighting and outlet
shall be from a separate branch circuit.
5.
Pit Lighting: Adequate lighting (minimum 10 ft-c) shall be provided in the pit area. At
least one covered (protected) light fixture shall be provided for each elevator located to
remain clear of the elevator equipment at all times. Light switch shall be provided
within reach of the access door for each elevator where applicable or otherwise
immediately adjacent light fixture. A minimum of one (1) 120 volt single-phase 20 amp
duplex GFI-type outlet shall be provided in each pit area. The lighting and outlet shall be
from a separate branch circuit.
6.
Standby Power: Adequate power to operate all or one elevator in each group shall be
provided from the standby generator. Means for absorbing regenerate power shall be
provided.
7.
Standby Power Signals: Two signals shall be provided to each elevator operational
control system. One signal shall activate when the power has transferred to the standby
power source. The other signal shall activate prior to transfer back to normal power.
This pre-transfer signal shall be adjustable and initially set at 30 seconds
8.
Elevator Control Panel Conduit: Conduit shall be provided from each elevator hoistway
to the Elevator Control Panel.
9.
Electrical Piping: All electrical piping runs shall be run overhead or in a manner which
does not restrict the clearance around and the access to both the electrical and
elevator equipment.
Communication Requirements:
1.
Cab Telephone Service: Piping, wiring, box and connection to terminals in the elevator
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 3 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
controller shall be provided for elevator. The telephone system shall provide means to
establish communication with the elevator cab from an outside source, such as the
machine room. The cab emergency phone shall be programmed to ring at the
Consumers Energy Security Command Center which is manned 24/7.
F.
1.05
1.06
2.
Cab Emergency One-Way Speaker: Speaker, piping, wiring, box and connection to
terminals in the elevator controller shall be provided for each elevator. The speaker
shall be mounted on top of the elevator cab.
3.
Machine Room Telephone/Data Service: Piping, wiring and box shall be provided in
each elevator machine room for voice and remote monitoring system.
4.
Piping: All piping runs shall be run overhead in the machine room or in a manner which
does not restrict the clearance around and the access to both the electrical and elevator
equipment.
Life Safety Requirements:
1.
Smoke Detectors: Smoke sensors shall be provided as required and dry contacts
terminated in the machine room adjacent to the group controller assembly.
2.
Interface Devices: Wiring, box with LED indicator and connection to terminals in the
elevator controller shall be provided for each elevator group. Inputs signals shall be
provided for main floor return, alternate floor return and flashing fire indicator.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Approved Manufacturers: Elevator Contractor shall provide material from specified
manufacturers. Manufacturers named in these specifications may be found in the latest edition
of the Elevator World Source.
B.
Other Manufacturers: Elevator Contractor may provide material from other manufacturers if
approved by the Owner/Management prior to bid. Approval must be done in writing through
The Elevator Consultants.
C.
Other Models: Elevator Contractor may provide other material from approved manufacturers if
approved by the Owner/Management prior to bid. Approval must be done in writing through
The Elevator Consultants.
CODE COMPLIANCE
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall comply with most-stringent applicable provisions of all local
Elevator and Building Codes, Standards and Laws including revisions and changes in effect on
date of these specifications. All elevators at building address are to be made to work with
initiating devices for fire proper fire service operation.
B.
Elevator:
1.
2.
3.
4.
ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
ASME A17.2 - Inspectors' Manual.
ASME A17.3 - Safety Code for Existing Elevators and Escalators.
State of Michigan Elevator Rules and Codes
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 4 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
C.
1.07
1.08
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
Local fire authority
Handicapped Accessibility:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Local Building Code
International Building Code
Life Safety:
1.
2.
F.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
NEMA- National Electrical Manufacturers Association
Building:
1.
2.
E.
December 13, 2016
Electrical:
1.
2.
D.
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
Americans with Disability Act
State and Municipal Laws and/or Acts
ANSI A-117.1 - Specifications for Making Building and Facilities Accessible to, and Usable
by, the Physically Handicapped
Laws: Any other Ordinances and Laws applicable within the governing jurisdiction.
SCHEDULE
st
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall submit a Gantt Chart schedule with bid based on a June 1
contract date. A complete modernization schedule, including material delivery dates, revised
Gantt Chart and payment schedule within 14 days of Award of Contract. Progress of
modernization will be logged onsite using the Modernization Work Flow in the ElevatorAppTM.
B.
Award of Contract: Elevator Contractor shall not proceed until the contract is signed by
Owner/Management.
C.
Modernization Period: The Modernization Period shall be defined as the time from the start of
the first elevator through Final Acceptance of all elevators. The Elevator Contractor shall not
begin the modernization of any elevator until all material for the elevator is delivered.
D.
Temporary Acceptance: Elevator Contractor shall place the elevator into service after the
Acceptance Review with permit and provisional permit upon signing of the Temporary
Acceptance by the Owner/Management and The Elevator Consultants. Elevator Contractor shall
coordinate the completion of the remaining work for the elevator after Temporary Acceptance
with the Owner/Management and The Elevator Consultants.
E.
Final Acceptance: Elevator Contractor shall continue to work at the Location until the Final
Acceptance Review is completed, Operational Permit is granted, and elevator passes final
Inspection to gain Certification. Passing of Final Review shall serve as Date of Final Acceptance.
SUBMITTAL
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall assemble complete package within 30 days of Award of
Contract. Elevator Contractor to provide schedule of submittals at time of contract signing.
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 5 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
December 13, 2016
B.
Product Data: Elevator Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of the manufacturer's specifications
and installation instructions for each product furnished.
C.
Power Data: Elevator Contractor shall provide electrical calculations for all three-phase and
single-phase feeder requirements. The electrical calculations shall include full load maximum
current, cab lighting current, in-rush current, maximum heat loads and shall be signed by a P.E.
D.
Test Data: Elevator Contractor shall provide certified laboratory test reports on components as
specified or required by referenced codes.
E.
Keying: Elevator Contractor shall coordinate all keying with the Owner/Management. Key
switches shall be the Elevator Contractor's standard unless otherwise specified.
F.
Material Samples: Elevator Contractor shall provide three (3) samples for each material
furnished in a 6” X 6” minimum size.
G.
Initial Shop Drawings: Elevator Contractor shall submit one (1) reproducible and six (6) copies of
the layout, cab and fixture drawings for review. Electronic copies of the Initial shop Drawings are
acceptable. Layout drawings shall include, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.09
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
Machine room plan indicating equipment sizes, location of equipment and
location of electrical service connection.
Vibration/noise transmissibility characteristics, including both mechanical and
electrical, for all power transmission components. The method of elimination/
attenuation of all potential vibration/noise transmission shall be provided.
Section through the elevator hoistway indicating the size, weight, location and
support spacing of the guide rails with support detail and fastening methods.
Structural loads imposed by the elevator to the guide rails, support brackets,
and building structure.
Sizes and location of blockouts, back-up material and openings required for
hoistway, hoistway entrance doors, and hall fixtures.
Interior details of elevator car and detail drawings of all control and signal
panels, including views of wall stations, car operating panel, etc.
H.
Drawing Review: Drawing review shall not be interpreted as an indication that submittal is
correct or that work represented by submittal complies with the Contract Documents.
I.
Submittal Response: One (1) reproducible and two (2) copies shall be returned to the Elevator
Contractor within 14 days. Submittal response is not justification for revision of delivery or
installation schedules without prior written notification.
J.
Revised Shop Drawings: Elevator Contractor shall incorporate changes and return one (1) copy
within 7 days.
K.
Final Review: Elevator Contractor shall not order or purchase any equipment or materials until
related submittals have received final review by elevator consultant.
PERMITS, INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall coordinate all inspections and reviews.
B.
Permits: Elevator Contractor shall obtain and pay for permits, licenses and inspection fees
necessary to complete the elevator installation and related work.
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 6 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
1.10
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
C.
Inspections: Elevator Contractor shall make all tests required by the referenced codes and/or all
inspection authorities involved in the project including assisting smoke detector/elevator
response tests for the elevator recall system. Elevator Contractor shall notify inspection
authorities with a minimum of 3-days’ notice and have inspection performed prior to reviews.
Inspection delays are not justification for revision of installation schedules without prior written
notice of acceptance by Owner/Management and The Elevator Consultants.
D.
Reviews: Elevator Contractor shall provide the personnel for Acceptance Reviews, Final Reviews
and Warranty Reviews as indicated in the Contract Documents. Elevator Contractor shall provide
7-days’ notice to the Owner/Management and The Elevator Consultants for each review. If more
than two (2) reviews are necessary for acceptance, the Elevator Contractor shall pay The Elevator
Consultants two thousand dollars for each additional review. This payment will be in advance of
the review.
RECORD DOCUMENTS AND POST-INSTALLATION SUBMITTAL
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall assemble complete package within 15 days of Final
Acceptance.
B.
Final Shop Drawings: Elevator Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of "AS
INSTALLED" (As-Built) drawings. All changes shall be revised on the manufacturer's drawings. No
hand written changes will be accepted. Electronic copies of the Final Shop Drawings are also to
be distributed to Ownership.
C.
Electrical Wiring Diagrams: Elevator Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of "AS
INSTALLED" (As-Built) electrical wiring diagrams (EWD's). All changes shall be revised on the
manufacturer's drawings. One copy shall be encapsulated in plastic and mounted in the machine
room. No hand written changes will be accepted. Electronic copies of the Electronic Wiring
Diagrams are also to be distributed to Ownership.
D.
Adjuster's Test Reports: Elevator Contractor shall provide reports with all controller settings,
parameters and adjustments, along with all data from safety tests performed. All settings and
adjustments shall be noted. Electronic copies of the Adjuster’s Test Reports are also to be
distributed to Ownership.
E.
Maintenance Manuals: Elevator Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of neatly bound
manuals including instructions explaining all operating features, parts lists (part numbers and
available vendors), recommended spare parts, lubrication charts and recommended
maintenance schedule. Elevator Contractor shall also provide three (3) separate copies of the
adjustment, system overview, service tool and troubleshooting manuals. Electronic copies of the
Maintenance Manuals are also to be distributed to Ownership.
F.
Keys: Elevator Contractor shall provide one emergency door key and six (6) sets of properly
tagged keys to operate all keyed switches and locks upon completion of the first elevator.
G.
Service/Diagnostic Tools:
1.
Device: Elevator Contractor/Manufacturer shall provide one (1) device (hand-held
electronic terminal or lap-top computer with associated software, firmware, cables,
associated apparatus and manuals) necessary for adjusting, troubleshooting, testing and
servicing the elevator equipment. This device shall be provided to the
Owner/Management and The Elevator Consultants upon completion of the elevator and
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 7 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
shall be for the exclusive use of the Owner/Management and The Elevator Consultants
at the Location. As part of the Final Acceptance, the tool shall be demonstrated to
operate completely and to be fully functional.
H.
1.11
1.12
2.
Updates or Future Publications: The successful modernization/installation Elevator
Elevator Contractor shall provide any and all information, printed material, and or
publications pertaining to the provided elevator equipment. All updates and/or
recommends, software upgrades, software updates, equipment recall updates and
recommended changes to the equipment by the original manufacture of the equipment
shall be provided to the Owner/Management and The Elevator Consultants for a period
of 30 years. These upgrades and updates will be provided at no cost to
Owner/Management and The Elevator Consultants regardless of the service provider.
This shall include any and all information that is provided to the successful
modernization/ installation Elevator Contractor's/Manufacturer’s branch offices, service
representatives, mechanics or factories that were used at the time of the
modernization/installation.
3.
Reprogramming: Elevator Contractor/Manufacturer shall re-program and/or re-charge
the service tool at any time for no additional cost for a period of 30 years.
Special Tools: Elevator Contractor/Manufacturer shall provide to Owner/Management and The
Elevator Consultants one full set of all special tools, such as customize extractors, pullers,
wrenches, screw drivers, feeler gauges, etc., upon completion of the first elevator. These tools
become the property of the Owner/Manager and The Elevator Consultants.
WARRANTY
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall guarantee that the materials and workmanship of the
elevator equipment installed under these specifications shall be first-class in every respect.
Warranty starts for one (1) year on all equipment after the last elevator modernized passes final
inspection and review of consultant, Owner / Management and city inspector.
B.
Documentation: Elevator Contractor shall provide a written guarantee, signed by the Elevator
Contractor agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and workmanship of the elevator
work.
C.
Period: Elevator Contractor shall make good any defects which may develop within one (1) year
of Final Acceptance of the last elevator completed.
D.
Review: Elevator Contractor shall provide personnel for one (1) warranty review.
Owner/Management and The Elevator Consultants may schedule this review anytime during the
warranty period. Elevator Contractor shall provide any modifications to the elevator equipment
and any adjustment necessary to meet requirements of the Contract Documents identified
during the warranty review within 30 days of notification.
TRAINING
A.
General:
Elevator
Owner/Management.
B.
Emergency Operations Training Program: Elevator Contractor shall provide two 2-hour sessions
of training at the Location. Training shall include complete instruction on use of the Elevator
Control Panel features.
Contractor
shall
provide
training
to
representatives
of
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 8 of 24
the
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
C.
1.13
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
Control System Training Program: Elevator Contractor shall provide a complete training
program of the control system at the Control Manufacturer's Training Center and/or on site of
modernized building whichever is preferred by Owner/ Management. Elevator Contractor shall
be responsible for the cost of the program for three representatives of the Owner /Management
and / or The Elevator Consultants. Owner / Management shall be responsible for travel expenses.
All training shall be made available prior to the end of the initial warranty period or during the
maintenance period with reasonable and adequate notice of a minimum of 90 days so that
accommodations and scheduling can be accomplished.
MAINTENANCE
A
General: Elevator Contractor shall provide all maintenance, repair and adjustment to all the
elevator equipment from the Date of Award through the end of the 12 month Warranty Period.
Any service required to keep the elevators running is what is expected during the interim and
warranty period. No charges for any services outside of normal hours to keep the elevators
running will be accepted under this contract. Any elevator that is out of service during interim or
warranty maintenance must be back in service within 2 hours unless parts need to be ordered.
B.
Owners/Management Maintenance Representative: Elevator Contractor shall coordinate all
maintenance, callback and repairs with the Owner/Management. If there is no answer, a
message may be left on the voicemail system. The foreman, or if unavailable, another
representative shall sign all maintenance and callback reports.
C.
Service Time Frequency: Elevator Contractor shall provide service examinations once a month
for preventative maintenance of the hydraulic elevator for a minimum of one (1) hour of
preventative maintenance a month.
D.
Service Examinations: Elevator Contractor shall inspect all mechanical and operational aspects of
the elevator equipment. Work shall include the repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at
rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of
original equipment. Should a monthly service visit be missed or a period in excess of 32 days
passes without the elevator being serviced, the elevator service time and warranty shall be
extended for an additional 32 days. This extended service and warranty period shall be subject to
the same requirements, including service visits and warranty and service extension for missed
visits.
E.
Elevator Personnel: Elevator Contractor shall provide a qualified elevator mechanic directly in
the employ of the Elevator Contractor to perform all Service Examinations and Callbacks.
F.
Cleaning and Service: The elevator equipment and equipment areas shall be left in a clean
condition after each examination. Cleaning shall include car top, pit area, hoistway, and machine
room area. Any oil or lubrication leaks shall be wiped clean and the cause of the leak shall be
corrected.
G.
Electronic / Written Reports: Elevator Contractor shall provide signed, dated, detailed reports of
the service work performed to the Owner/ Management immediately or within a reasonable
time after the service work was performed. These reports can be in electronic form completed
at the building for the building. These reports shall be legible. Poor quality carbon copies will not
be acceptable. The mechanic who performed the work and the Owner / Management must sign
reports and / or use third- party electronic reporting system provided by Owner/ Management.
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 9 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
H.
Notification: Elevator Contractor shall notify the Owner/Management of what specific piece of
equipment will be serviced and when it will be performed prior to performing service on the
elevator equipment. This can be done in written format or electronically at sign-in of the
building.
I.
Repairs and Notification: Elevator Contractor shall notify the Owner/Management should it
become necessary to remove an elevator from service for an extended period of time beyond
normal industry standard service requirements. This work shall be coordinated with the
Owner/Management and appropriate departments.
J.
Callbacks: Elevator Contractor shall respond to all callbacks for interim and warranted items 24
hours per day, 7 days a week, including all Holidays, within 2 hours’ time of being notified of the
call, at no additional cost to the Owner/Management during the 12 month warranty period. If
the elevator has 3 or more callbacks in a given month or is out of service for more than one day,
the warranty will automatically be extended one month. An electronic/ written report stating
the nature of the callback, any parts that were used and the action taken to correct the problem
which resulted in the call shall be provided to the Owner/Management. This report shall be
signed by the Owner/Management representative. This report shall be clear, legible, signed and
dated by the mechanic that performed the work. This report can be done in electronic format at
the building. The warranty covers all elevators for 12 months with the same beginning and end
dates.
K.
Reviews: Elevator Contractor shall provide personnel for maintenance reviews.
Owner/Management may schedule this review anytime during the installation and warranty
periods. Elevator Contractor shall provide any modifications to the elevator equipment and any
adjustment necessary to meet requirements of the Contract Documents identified during the
review within 30 days of notification.
Section 2 Products
2.01
GENERAL
A.
Outline:
Elevator #1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Quantity: One (1) elevator
Elevator Number: #1
Type: Hydraulic
Capacity: 4,000 Pounds
Speed: 50 FPM (improve speed to a minimum of 100 FPM)
Stops/Openings: 3 stops; 3 openings
Floors Served: Three
Entrance Type: Automatic
Design Parameters: No manufacturer names, signage, or nameplates will be noticeable on any
equipment by the general public. No company signage is allowed on equipment that will be in
view of the general public. The elevator system shall be designed, installed and adjusted to meet
the following requirements:
1.
Flight Time: The elevator shall arrive at the next typical floor with the doors open
two-thirds within standard time. This shall be accomplished regardless of load on the
elevator or direction of the elevator.
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 10 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
2.
Door Motion Times: The elevator shall open its doors within standard time. The
elevator shall close its doors within standard or the minimum allowed by Code,
whichever is greater. Door times are measured from the start of movement until
movement is stopped.
3.
Floor Accuracy: The elevator shall stop within 1/4" of floor regardless of load or
direction and re-level to within 1/4" during loading/unloading.
4.
Speed: The elevator shall operate within 3% of the contract speed regardless of load or
direction.
5.
Ride: The elevator shall operate smoothly, with less than 10 milli-g horizontal and
vertical acceleration peak-to-peak, less than 4.0 feet per second-squared vertical
acceleration and deceleration and less than 6.0 feet per second-cubed vertical jerk.
PMT calculations will be done by Elevator Company at time of acceptance to verify.
6.
Noise: The elevator shall operate quietly, with less than 55 dBA within the cab with the
doors closed, 60 dBA with door operation and 75 dBA within the machine room. Noise
is measured with a Dranatz Sound Meter on the A scale with the background less than
45 dBA.
7.
Electrical:
8.
9.
a.
Mainline Feeders: The elevator shall have a starting current and a running
current of less than required for the existing feeders and disconnects with the
three-phase incoming voltage being maintained within +10% of the Volts AC
and within +3% of 60 cycles.
b.
Mainline Harmonics: The elevator shall add not more than 5% harmonic
distortion and shall meet the requirements of IEEE 519.
c.
Lighting Feeders: The elevator shall have lighting and fan current of less than
20 amps with the single-phase voltage being maintained within +10 of 120
Volts AC.
Environment:
a.
Temperature: The elevator shall be capable of operating properly with the
temperature being maintained between 65 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit in all
equipment areas.
b.
Humidity: The elevator shall be capable of operating properly with the
humidity being maintained below 75% non-condensing in all equipment areas.
c.
Machine Room Heat Emissions: The elevator shall not produce more than
17,000 BTU's total in this area.
Car Weight: The suspended load of the elevator shall be maintained within the 5% of
the current suspended load of a fully loaded car, which includes the car structure, car
equipment, door equipment and cab assembly.
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 11 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
2.02
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
CONTROL SYSTEMS
A.
Operational Control:
1.
Simplex Operation: Provide simplex operational control to operate the passenger
elevator automatically in response to car and hall calls. The elevator shall be assigned
calls as they are registered. The elevator shall stop for hall calls only in the direction of
travel. The elevator shall reverse automatically in response to a hall call in the opposite
direction of travel. The elevator shall reverse without door cycle after hold open time
has expired when there is no further demand in the direction of travel and shall close
after the additional hold open time has expired.
2.
Programmed Shut-Down Operation: Provide means to stop the elevator at the next
un-secure floor, open the doors, close the doors and remove the elevator from service
with the door open button active. The controller shall prevent the operation of the
elevator until the problem is manually reset. This operation shall activate by an encoder
over-speed monitor, reduced incoming power monitor or the controller
over-temperature monitor.
3.
System Diagnostics: Provide means to identify faults within the control system,
including those which do not remove an elevator from service.
4.
Firefighters' Service Operation: Provide means to operate the elevator during an
emergency. Provide connections for smoke detector activation of lobby, alternate floor
automatic return and flashing fire indicator. Provide keys to match existing elevators
after upgrade.
5.
Inspection Operation: Provide means to operate the elevator at reduced speed from the
top of the elevator. Activation of Inspection Operation shall remove the elevator from
operation.
6.
Independent Service Operation: Provide means to operate the elevator in response to
only car calls. Close doors by holding a car call until doors are completely closed.
Activation of Independent Service Operation shall remove the elevator from operation.
The elevator shall park with the doors open at the last floor served.
7.
Hoistway Access Operation: Provide means to operate elevator at the top and bottom
terminals at reduced speed with both the hoistway doors and the car doors open.
Terminal access shall be zoned to stop the elevator level with the top access floor and
provide a minimum 7'-0" clear height at the bottom access floor.
8.
Oil Temperature Control Operation for Hydraulic: Provide means to maintain proper
operating temperature of hydraulic oil for consistent operation of the elevator. When oil
temperature is detected below the proper range and there are no hall calls or car calls,
the elevator shall be automatically lowered to the lowest landing and with the doors
closed, oil may be bypassed with the pump motor running until the oil is within the
proper range. The elevator shall immediately respond to any hall calls or car calls and
shall return to this feature when all calls have been answered.
9.
Power Loss, Low Oil and Moisture Sensor Operation: Provide means to automatically
return the elevator to the lowest landing in the event of a power loss, low oil or moisture
in the PVC liner. After the elevator has returned to the lowest landing, the doors shall
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 12 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
open and the elevator shall be removed from service until power is restored. The doors
shall close after door hold time has expired. The door open button shall remain
operational after doors are closed.
B.
10.
Load By-Pass Operation: Provide means to by-pass hall calls in the event that the
elevator is sufficiently loaded. Initial setting of the load sensing device shall be 50% of
the capacity of the elevator.
11.
Anti-Nuisance Operation: Provide means to cancel car calls in the event that the
elevator makes three (3) consecutive stops without interruption of the door screen.
12.
Standby Power Operation: Provide means to automatically return one elevator in each
group at a time to the main floor.
13.
Hall and Car Lantern Operation: Provide means to indicate direction of elevator travel in
response to a call. Lantern shall light with the door open movement and shall stay lit
until doors begin to close. Audible signal shall sound when the lantern is lit and shall
sound once for up travel and twice for down travel.
14.
Emergency Lighting Test Operation: Provide means to remove power to the normal
lighting and illuminate the emergency lighting in the elevator cab from the battery
source.
15.
Long Door Hold Operation: Provide means to hold the doors open for an extended
period. The activation means shall be a button located in the main car station. Initiation
of a car call shall cancel the long door hold open time remaining, but not the other door
hold timers.
16.
Card Reader Operation: Provide future means to limit access to floors from a card
reader system. Provide an input for each floor served and other inputs as required.
17.
Hall Button Failure Operation: Provide means to maintain the registration of hall calls in
the event the elevator is removed from service for less than 5 minutes except for
Firefighter's Service Operation. After 5 minutes, all hall calls shall be cancelled and
remain cancelled. The timer shall be reset every time one elevator is back in-service.
18.
Button Access Code Security Operation: Provide means to utilize the car station
pushbuttons to limit access. The codes shall be easily changed.
Motion Control
1.
Automatic Operation: Provide motion control which automatically decelerates levels
and stops the elevator in response to a call.
2.
Pre-Start Operation: Provide means to power the fields to full strength and pick the
brake prior to the door being fully closed. The movement of the elevator shall be less
than 1/16" during this operation.
3.
Hydraulic Reduce Current Starting Operation: Provide means to start the power unit
with reduced current by utilizing a solid-state starting of the pump motor
4.
Hydraulic Over-Travel Limiting Operation: Provide means to prevent the operation of
the elevator when it travels beyond the leveling zone at a terminal floor.
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 13 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
C.
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
5.
Re-Leveling Operation: Provide means to move the elevator after the elevator has
stopped to maintain floor accuracy. The limit switches shall be magnetic.
6.
Reduced Power Operation: Provide a means of monitoring incoming voltage. When
improper power is detected, the elevator shall first attempt a Programmed Shut-Down
Operation. When improper power to safely operate the elevator is detected, the
elevator shall stop immediately. The monitor shall prevent the operation of the elevator
if proper power is not available.
7.
Terminal Slowdown Operation: Provide independent means to slowdown the elevator
at between 3.5 and 5.0 feet per second squared should the elevator not initiate normal
slowdown.
8.
Over-Travel Limiting Operation: Provide means to prevent the operation of the elevator
when it travels beyond the leveling zone at a terminal floor. The limit switches shall be
magnetic.
Door Control
1.
Automatic Operation: Provide door control which automatically opens and closes
doors.
2.
Force Limiting Operation: Provide means to limit the door pressure while closing to a
maximum of 30 pounds (measured from rest) and a maximum of 7.5 foot-pounds kinetic
energy.
3.
Reduced Stall Force Operation: Provide means to reduce the force exerted on the
doors during a stall condition. Door pressure shall be zero pounds after one second.
4.
Reduced Speed Closing Operation: Provide means to reduce the speed during closing
to a maximum of 2.5 foot-pounds kinetic energy. Doors shall close at reduced speed
during Firefighter's Service Operation as required.
5.
Nudging Operation: Provide means to sound audible electronic tone when doors are
held open for longer than the setting of the Nudging Timer. Doors shall remain fully
open if door screen continues to be obstructed. Doors shall fully reopen if door screen
becomes obstructed during closing.
6.
Door Hold Operation: Provide separately adjustable timers to vary the time the doors
hold open as follows:
a.
Car Call Timer: The amount of time the doors shall be held open in response to
a car call. Timer setting shall be between 3.0 and 6.0 seconds.
b.
Hall Call Timer: The amount of time the doors shall be held open in response
to a hall call or coincident call. Timer setting shall be between 4.0 and 8.0
seconds.
c.
Interrupted Screen Timer: The amount of time the doors shall be held open
after the screen is reestablished. Timer setting shall be between 1.0 and 3.0
seconds. Timer shall be reset with each interruption of the door screen.
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 14 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
7.
2.03
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
d.
Door Reversal Timer: The amount of time the door shall be held open after
doors are fully reopened. Timer setting shall be between 1.0 and 3.0 seconds.
e.
Nudging Timer: The amount of time the doors shall be held open before
sounding an audible tone. Timer setting shall be between 20 and 30 seconds.
f.
Long Door Hold Timer: The amount of extended time the doors shall be held.
Timer setting shall be between 15 and 60 seconds.
g.
Initial Timer Settings: Timers shall be initially set to the minimum allowed by
handicapped accessibility standards. Car call and door close buttons shall have
no effect on timers.
Door Stall Operation: Provide means to re-open doors in the event that the doors do
not close all the way within 30 seconds of closing operation. Provide means to remove
the elevator from service after the third unsuccessful attempt.
CONTROLLER ASSEMBLIES
A.
General: Provide non-proprietary material from Motion Control Engineering (MCE) in Rancho
Cordova, CA or GAL Manufacturing Corporation in Bronx, NY.
B.
Microprocessor: Provide a complete non-proprietary microprocessor-based system for
operational and communication functions. Provide explicit model with each bid.
C.
Software: Provide type.
D.
Service Tool: Provide all service tools required for service, troubleshooting, adjusting and
testing.
E.
Position Sensing: Provide digital solid-state type with maximum 1/4" per pulse. Provide a
system that does not utilize a stationary tape in the hoistway. A LED-type position indicator shall
be located in the controller.
F.
Contactors and Relays: Provide D.C. type which shall be sized to insure proper conductivity and
reliable operation.
G.
Identifications: Provide permanent non-obstructed markings for all components, including size
and type of fuses, identical to those symbols found on the Electrical Wiring Diagrams.
H.
Remote Monitoring: Provide terminals for connection to a remote monitoring system.
I.
Cabinets: Provide NEMA I controller cabinets with hinged doors. Door shall swing as to not
block the line of sight with the machine assembly
J.
Labeling: Provide UL, CSA or ASME A.17.5 label for all equipment. The labels shall be easily
viewed.
K.
Code Data Plate: Provide a data plate that indicates the A17.1 Code to be used for inspections
and tests. The data plate shall be of such material and construction that the letters and figures
stamped, etched, cast, or otherwise applied to the face shall remain permanently and readily
legible. The data plate shall be easily viewed, securely attached in the controller cabinet. The
height of the letters and figures shall be not less than 1/8 inch.
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 15 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
2.04
2.05
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT ASSEMBLIES
A.
General: Provide material from Minnesota Elevator Company or approved equal.
B.
Frame: It shall be constructed of ¼’ thick powder painted steel. Frame shall be bolted
construction to allow disassembly where doors are too narrow for complete pumping unit. A
separate sub frame for mounting of the pump and motor shall be isolated from the main frame
by elastomeric mounts.
C.
Storage Tank: The storage tank shall be constructed of 12-gauge steel and shall be provided with
a removable cover. A combination oil level sight gauge / thermometer shall be mounted to the
side of the tank. Provide rupture valve and pressure switch to prevent operation of the elevator
when there is a hydraulic system failure. Oil reservoir shall hold 10 gallons in addition to the oil
required to operate the elevator. Provide both the pressure and electrical data plate mounted to
the tank.
D.
Valve: Provide a four valve unit which shall be readily accessible for adjustment. Control valves
shall be solenoid operated and shall open and close gradually for smooth motion control. The
control valve shall be manifold with up, down and check valve sections. A control section
including solenoid valves will direct the main valve and control up and down starting, transition
from full speed to leveling speed, up and down stops, pressure relief and manual lowering.
Down speed and up and down leveling shall be controlled at the main valve sections. Contract
speed must be attained in both the up and down direction with elevator empty. All of these
functions shall be fully adjustable for maximum smoothness and to meet contract conditions.
The manual lowering feature will permit lowering the elevator at slow speed in the event of
power failure or for adjusting purposes. Provide test seal and test data tag for relief valve.
E.
Pump: The pump shall be a positive displacement screw type to give smooth operation and shall
be especially designed and manufactured for elevator service.
F.
Motor: The motor shall be of the alternating current, polyphase squirrel cage induction type and
shall be of a design especially adapted to electro-hydraulic requirements.
G.
Muffler: Provide one in the oil line near the power unit to reduce the pulsations and noise
present in the flow of the hydraulic fluid. An air-bladder silencer shall be provided at the control
valve discharge.
H.
Oil Cooler: If deemed necessary, the tank shall have an industrial grade, field mounted oil cooler,
Minnesota Elevator Model AOC, BOL or equal.
I.
Vibration Sound Dampeners: Provide rubber type to isolate the power unit from the building
structure.
J.
Isolation Couplings: Provide a minimum of two in the oil line.
K.
Piping/Oil: Provide a direct run with new piping from the power unit to the cylinder with a
minimum of bends. Provide test data tag.
L.
Shut-off Valve: Provide one manual type in machine room near power unit.
JACK ASSEMBLIES
A.
General: Replace existing. Provide new as the existing is a single bottom jack assembly
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 16 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
according to existing records. The new jack assembly must be provided to run the existing
elevator according to the newly specified speed and capacity. Provide alternate for removing
existing single-bottom jack assembly and installing a complete twin-post hole-less jack assembly
application. Manufacturer make and model must be submitted with the alternate bid. Sizing the
proper machine, proper horsepower, pump motor and valve for the hole-less application are
required with the alternate bid.
2.06
2.07
2.08
CAB ASSEMBLIES, GUIDE AND BALANCE SYSTEMS
A.
General: Provide material from Hollister-Whitney Elevator Corp., Elsco, or approved equal.
B.
Car Frames: Refurbish as new and provide Car Top Inspection Stations with properly covered
work light and GFI-type outlet permanently mounted to the crosshead of each elevator. Provide
a second properly covered work light with a magnetic base. Provide Crosshead Data Tags
permanently mounted to the crosshead adjacent to the original data tags. Both the stations and
the data tags shall be easily accessed from the hoistway landing without getting onto the car.
C.
Sling and Platforms: Refurbish as new and provide new isolation.
D.
Car Guide Assemblies: Provide new roller guide assemblies up to 350 fpm.
E.
Car Balance: Provide mounting locations and additional weight for balance of the elevator.
SAFETY AND SPRING SYSTEMS
A.
General: Refurbish material to like new condition.
E.
Car Buffers: Retain and Refurbish like new unless new buffers are required. If new buffers are
required, then they will be provided and installed using Hollister Whitney materials.
DOOR OPERATION SYSTEMS
A.
General: Provide material from the GAL Manufacturing or approved equal. Provide model
MOVFR for modernization.
B.
Operator: GAL MOVFR for modernization.
C.
Car Door Contact: Provide new contact on the car door which shall prevent the operation of the
elevator when the car door is not closed.
D.
Restrictor: Provide new device which mechanically restricts the opening of the car doors outside
the unlocking zone.
E.
Header: Replace as necessary with new operator. If the header is to be retained, then refurbish
like new.
F.
Tracks: Hoistway and car tracks are to be replaced.
G.
Hangers: Replace with new.
H.
Gibs: Provide new two nylon-type and one metal-type gib per door panel. Fire stops shall be
properly bent down on hoistway door panels.
I.
Interlocks: Provide new electro-mechanical devices which shall prevent the operation of the
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 17 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
elevator when the hoistway doors are not closed and locked.
2.09
2.10
J.
Closer: Provide new spirator or sash weight type which shall close the hoistway doors from any
open position.
K.
Door Screen: Provide new infra-red pulsed type which shall initiate door reopening operation
shall allow reduced speed door closing operation. Provide two-relay type controller which shall
allow reduced speed door closing operation.
HOISTWAY ENTRANCE ASSEMBLIES
A.
General: Provide new material from specified manufacturer as noted in bid.
B.
Entrance Frames: Retain all and re-paint
C.
Door Panels: Provide 4" high floor marking on hoistway side of one door panel. Provide new
hoistway door panels in #4 Stainless Steel finish on first and second floors. Retain and repaint
hoist way door panels at the basement level.
D.
Sills: Retain, clean and refurbish as new. Provide new if required.
E.
Entrance Markings: Provide plates on both sides of the hoistway entrance centered 60" above
the finished floor permanently applied to the entrance frame. All floors shall be identified by 2"
high raised numbers/letters/symbols and braille. Provide Entrada or SCS die-cast model in
historical context. Match Existing Braille and replace where necessary
F.
Escutcheons: Retain holes in door panels. Unplug hole in hoistway door panel to allow special
tool for releasing interlock for each elevator at each floor. Provide cover for escutcheons where
missing.
G.
Facia: Provide standard facia as required and refurbish as necessary.
CAB ASSEMBLIES
A.
General: Elevator cabs are to be refurbished using Globe Architectural and Metal.
B.
Shell: Refurbish like new.
C.
Cab Interior: Replace with new cab including new lighting, fronts and doors. Provide 3
renderings of cab interiors with each bid submittal.
Cab front panel and control finish is to be #4 brushed stainless steel.
Cab interior panels are to be plastic laminate finish manufactured by the Formica Corporation or
Wilsonart Inc. with black reveals.
Cab interior doors to be #4 brushed stainless steel.
Install new cab handrail bar and bump rail on 3 interior cab elevations in a #4 brushed stainless
finish.
D.
Emergency Lighting: Provide new battery unit with solid-state charger to operate its alarm bell
and a minimum of two cab lights. Lights shall be part of normal lighting system and shall
properly illuminate main car station.
E.
Lighting: Provide new recessed LED ceiling lighting fixtures in cab interior.
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 18 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
2.11
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
F.
Emergency Exit: Provide hinged hatch for evacuation of the elevator through the top of the
elevator. Provide a new contact to prevent operation of the elevator when the hatch is not
closed and wing nuts to lock-down exit.
G.
Emergency One-Way Communications: Mount speaker provided by Owner/Management
arranged to provide proper sound level in the cab as required.
H.
Ventilation: Provide quiet two speed fan for proper air flow through elevator cab.
I.
Car Top Safety Railing: Provide safety railing, intermediate support and toe guard on top of the
elevator on all three sides.
J.
Flooring: Provide finish flooring as specified in bid documents as Owners standard vinyl
composition tile (Armstrong, Striations 12”x24”BBT, #T3616 Tea Time).
SIGNAL SYSTEMS
A.
General: Provide new material from Globe Architectural and Metal, Innovation Industries, Inc.,
and EPCO.
B.
Main Car Station: Provide #4 Stainless Steel Swing Panel for all Elevators with the following:
1.
Car Position Indicator: Provide minimum 1" high digital segmented type with direction
indicators representing the floor served and the direction of travel.
2.
Pushbuttons: Provide 1-1/8" flush vandal resistant pushbuttons with white LED
illumination. Provide standard pushbuttons for each floor served which illuminate to
indicate call has been registered. Provide emergency control pushbuttons for alarm,
door open, door close and emergency two-way communication device. Provide type
and manufacturer with bid.
3.
Pushbutton Markings: All pushbuttons shall be identified by raised
numbers/letters/symbols and braille. Floor pushbuttons shall have a 5/8" high
designation in the face of each button. All other pushbuttons shall have 1/8" high
designations in the face of each button for identification. Provide Entrada or SCS
die-cast model.
4.
Voice Module: Provide adjustable electronic tones for each floor as required by
current code. Install voice module which announces each floor and other messages if
code requirement at time of bid contract signing.
5.
Firefighters' Service Controls: Provide light jewel and audible solid-state signal in main
car station.
6.
Emergency Communication: Mount vandal-resistant telephone unit in main car station.
Phone shall be programmed to signal Front Desk.
7.
Engraving:
Provide engraving for Capacity, Elevator Number and Emergency
Communication. Engrave Firefighter's Service Operation instructions as required.
8.
Location: Pushbuttons shall be located between 35" and 48" above the finished cab
floor. Emergency control pushbuttons shall be grouped at the bottom. Firefighter's
Service controls shall be grouped above the pushbuttons. Emergency communication
device shall be behind a round grille with 1/16" holes above the firefighter's service
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 19 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
controls.
C.
D.
2.12
Firefighters' Cabinet
1.
Access: Provide a flush, #4 Stainless Steel door with keyed lock with firefighters'
instruction engraved on the inside of the access door.
2.
Controls: Provide switches for Phase II and Stop. Provide light jewel and pushbuttons
for door open, door close and car cancel.
3.
Location: Cabinet shall be located in the main car station.
Service Cabinet
1.
Access: Provide a flush, keyed, #4 Stainless Steel Steel door with window for Certificate
of Inspection. Window size shall be identical to local certificate size.
2.
Controls: Provide switches for Stop, Inspection, Independent Service, Lighting and Fan.
Provide test button for Emergency Lighting.
3.
Location: Cabinet shall be located below the main car station.
4.
Lanterns: Provide car riding vandal resistant in #4 Stainless Steel with LED lights and
adjustable audible electronic tone. Provide type and manufacturer with bid.
G.
Firefighters' Service Station: Provide new as necessary
H.
Firefighters' Key Box: Provide surface mounted type with #4 Stainless Steel doors for all
elevators. Provide keys and mount per local requirements.
I.
Hoistway Access Stations: Provide switch with #4 Stainless Steel faceplates at each terminal
located adjacent to the hoistway entrance.
J.
Pit Emergency Stop Switch: Provide with red switch.
K.
Keying: Keying shall be coordinated with the Owner/Management. Provide standard keyed
switches unless otherwise specified. All keys for all elevators in building will be made to match.
L.
Lobby Position Indicator(s): Provide digital segmented type with direction indicators
representing the floor served and the direction of travel.
M.
Hall Stations: Provide flush mounted #4 Stainless Steel Hall Stations at current locations, per
floor with 1-1/8" standard pushbuttons with white LED illumination. Corresponding signals shall
both illuminate when either button is registered. Pushbuttons shall match the Car Stations
pushbuttons.
WIRING
A.
General: Provide material from Draka Elevator Products, Inc. The associated electrical work
will match the Consumers Energy electrical specifications at the barest minimum.
B.
Conductors: Provide new copper wiring throughout, including the motor leads. There shall be no
splices.
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 20 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
2.13
2.14
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
C.
Traveling Cables: Provide a minimum of two cables for each elevator. The cables shall have a
flame retardant and moisture resistant outer cover. Provide pads where necessary to prevent
damage to the cables during operation of the elevator. Provide 15% spare wires in each traveling
cable.
D.
Terminals: Provide permanent identification at all connections.
E.
Grounding: A properly sized grounding wire shall be provided from the elevator machine
room's mainline disconnect switch to a motor control center panel. A separate properly sized
ground wire shall be provided from the main line disconnect to the elevator controller. All
elevator equipment including, but not limited to, the motor drives, motors, controllers and
encoders shall be properly grounded to this system.
F.
Spares: Provide an additional 15% conductors for future use. Provide a minimum of eight
4-gage conductors and four additional twisted shielded pair conductors between the machine
room and the main car station. Tag conductors as "SPARES".
G.
Abandoned Electrical Conduit: Identify all elevator wiring and mark any wire that is not elevator
related and note if wires are live.
PIPING
A.
General: Provide material from Hollister-Whitney Elevator Corp., and approved vendors. The
associated electrical work will match the Consumers Energy electrical specifications at the
barest minimum.
B.
Conduit/Duct: Provide galvanized steel with removable covers. Only compression type of
electrical fittings shall be used.
C.
Electrical Piping: All electrical piping runs shall be run overhead or in a manner which does not
restrict the clearance around and the access to both the electrical and elevator equipment.
ATTIC STOCK
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall provide additional material prior to Final Acceptance.
B.
Software: Provide one spare set of proms for each elevator.
Section 3 Execution
3.01
INITIAL SITE REVIEW
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall thoroughly review all elevator areas before commencing work.
B.
Dimensions: Elevator Contractor shall verify proper space has been provided for elevator
equipment in the machine room, hoistway and pit areas. Elevator Contractor shall also verify
field dimensions in these areas are ready for the installation of the elevator equipment.
C.
Clearances: Elevator Contractor shall verify field dimensions to ensure proper clearances for
the elevator equipment can be maintained within the space provided. There shall be a
minimum clearance from anything located on the car or cab to anything attached to or in the
hoistway of 3/4 inch unless closer running clearances are required for the proper operation of
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 21 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
the elevator system. Items requiring 3/4 inch running clearances include, but are not limited to,
electrical conduit, raceways, junction boxes, rail brackets, pit ladders, light fixtures, and sump
discharge lines.
3.02
3.03
D.
Electrical: Elevator Contractor shall verify proper electrical power has been provided.
Temporary power of the same characteristics as the permanent power shall be used if available.
E.
Environmental:
provided.
F.
Variations: Elevator Contractor shall provide written notification of any and all conditions which
will prevent producing satisfactory work within the schedule.
G.
Acceptance of Conditions: Elevator Contractor shall accept conditions prior to commencement
of work. Start of work shall be interpreted as the acceptance of the conditions as they exist.
Elevator Contractor shall verify proper operating environment has been
TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall properly protect equipment and architectural finishes during
transportation and storage.
B.
Transportation: Elevator Contractor shall deliver and store materials in original protective
packaging.
C.
Storage: Elevator Contractor shall store equipment in the machine room. Storage outside the
machine room shall be coordinated with the building.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall perform all work in a first-class workmanship manner.
B.
Standards: Elevator Contractor shall install equipment per Manufacturer's standards and in
accordance with referenced codes.
C.
Tolerances: Elevator Contractor shall install equipment to maintain proper clearances during the
operation of the elevator.
D.
Maintainability: Elevator Contractor shall install equipment so components may be easily
accessed for removal during maintenance and repair.
E.
Field Welding: Elevator Contractor shall utilize certified welders. Oxidation and residue shall be
chipped and cleaned away. All welds shall be wire brushed and painted with two coats of primer
prior to finished coat.
F.
Un-used Equipment: Elevator Contractor shall remove all un-used equipment.
G.
Lubrication: Elevator Contractor shall lubricate all equipment.
H.
Wiring: Elevator Contractor shall wire equipment as indicated on the electrical wiring diagrams.
I.
Coordination: Elevator Contractor shall coordinate all Work by Owner/Management scheduled
during the Modernization Period.
J.
Protection:
Elevator Contractor shall advise Owner/Management of Elevator Contractor's
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 22 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
protection procedures to prevent damage or deterioration of work completed during the
remainder of the installation period.
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
ADJUSTMENTS
A.
B.
General: Elevator Contractor shall properly adjust the components provided.
Design Parameters: Elevator Contractor shall adjust the elevator to meet the design parameters.
C.
Guide Rails: Elevator Contractor shall realign car and counterweight guide rails vertically with
tolerance of 1/16". All connections shall be checked and tightened. Joints shall be secured
without gaps. Any irregularities on the machined surface shall be filled, sanded and filed to a
smooth surface.
D.
Balance: Elevator Contractor shall balance elevator front-to-back and side-to-side to equalize
pressure of roller car guide rollers on the car guide rails.
E.
Guide Assemblies: Elevator Contractor shall adjust car and counterweight guides to maintain
roller contact with the guide rails regardless of load or position in hoistway.
TESTING
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall test the elevator in accordance with applicable codes.
Elevator Contractor shall coordinate all testing with the Owner/Management.
B.
Buffers: Elevator Contractor shall test the buffers with full load and the counterweight buffers
with no load at maximum speed.
C.
Firefighter's Service Operation: Elevator Contractor shall test the Firefighter's Service Operation
on overtime with the inspection authority.
D.
Standby Power Operation: Elevator Contractor shall test the Standby Power Operation on
overtime with the standby power source if necessary.
CLEAN-UP
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall keep work areas orderly and free from debris during the
installation.
B.
Daily Removal: Elevator Contractor shall remove packaging and other materials on a daily basis
as the equipment is installed.
C.
Daily Cleaning: Elevator Contractor shall clean work areas on a daily basis of dirt, oil and grease.
Non-elevator areas shall be kept clean at all times.
D.
Final Cleaning: Elevator Contractor shall clean machine rooms, controllers, hoistways, pits,
hoistway equipment, hoistway entrance assemblies, pit equipment, door operating equipment,
cab enclosures and fixtures of dirt, oil, grease and fingermarks prior to Acceptance Reviews.
PAINTING AND FINISHING
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall paint and finish materials provided.
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 23 of 24
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
3.08
Section 14210 - Passenger Elevator
December 13, 2016
B.
Equipment: Elevator Contractor shall clean and paint all equipment which is provided with one
coat of installer's standard enamel unless the equipment has a baked enamel or special
architectural finish.
C.
Equipment Signage: Elevator Contractor shall stencil paint 4" high elevator number on the
mainline disconnect, car lighting disconnect, each control cabinet, crosshead and car buffer.
Elevator Contractor shall also provide all safety signage, such as limited two-way radio use
and/or more than one circuit.
D.
Guide Rails: Elevator Contractor shall clean and retouch the shank and base of the T-Section of
the guide rails with one field coat of black rust inhibitant paint (Rustoleum) where necessary.
E.
Equipment Areas: Elevator Contractor shall paint the machine room, pit floors, machines and all
other elevator equipment that was refurbished as new.
F.
Field Refinishing: Elevator Contractor shall finish any metal work provided.
G.
Field Re-touch: Elevator Contractor shall paint surfaces damaged during installation with the
original color and blend-out any variations.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
General: Elevator Contractor shall have all the work under the contract for the project at the
location checked during the course of the installation.
B.
Progress Reviews: Elevator Contractor shall provide personnel for review. Corrective work
required shall be accomplished as directed.
C.
Inspections: Elevator Contractor shall complete all corrective work identified by Code Authority
during acceptance inspection prior to Acceptance Review.
D.
Acceptance Reviews: Elevator Contractor shall provide personnel for reviews. Elevator
Contractor shall complete all corrective work identified prior to Final Acceptance Review.
E.
Final Acceptance Reviews: Elevator Contractor shall provide personnel for reviews to verify
completion of punch list.
F.
Warranty Review: Elevator Contractor shall provide personnel for one warranty review.
G.
Additional Reviews: Elevator Contractor shall compensate The Elevator Consultants $2,000.00
per review visit should all corrective work identified not be completed as required.
END
2016 The Elevator Consultants | Confidential and Proprietary. This document is exclusive property of The Elevator Consultants and no
part of this may be reproduced or shared in any format without prior written permission.
Page 24 of 24
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 22 05 00
PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SPECIFICATIONS AND DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and related specifications for this project including General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division 1, General Requirements, Instructions to Bidders, Addenda's, etc. apply to
and are considered a part of Division 22 - Mechanical Work.
B.
Information in this division is intended to clarify or make additions to the requirements set forth
in the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division I of these specifications.
Any conflict between this Division 22 and other sections or divisions of the specifications or
drawings shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer in writing as a request for
addendum prior to the bid opening.
C.
Furnish all equipment, materials, articles, items, operations or methods listed, mentioned or
scheduled on drawings, these specifications, manufacturer's installation instructions and include
all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for their complete installation and
operation.
D.
All information contained in this section applies to all sections within Division 22 as if it was
part of each section.
1.2
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
The drawings and these specifications are intended to supplement each other and any material
or labor called for in one shall be furnished even if not specifically mentioned in both. Any
material or labor which is neither shown on the drawings nor listed in this specification, but is
normally incurred or required for completion of work shall be furnished. If there is a
discrepancy between the drawings and specifications, the more stringent of the two shall be
followed.
B.
Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show approximate location and general
arrangement of systems and equipment. No attempt has been made to show every ell, tee, etc.
Drawings shall not be scaled for location of systems, equipment, etc. All dimensions whether
given on drawings or scaled shall be verified in field and coordinated with all other trades and
existing field conditions. Some plumbing, piping, equipment, etc. locations may require
changes in location due to field conditions and coordination with other trades will be made with
no additional cost to the Owner. Failure to check will be no reason for additional compensation.
C.
These drawings and the associated specifications are intended to provide complete furnishing,
installation and operational plumbing systems as specified under Division 22 and as called for
on the drawings. If these drawings and associated specifications have information omitted that
would not allow a completely operational system as is the intent of the Engineer, the bidder
shall notify the Engineer a minimum one week prior to the bid date to allow for addenda. Once
bids have been received, the Contractor shall be responsible for material, labor, etc., to furnish
and install a completely operational plumbing system as is the intent of these drawings and
associated specification.
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-1
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
D.
The installation of all systems, equipment, etc., is subject to clarification with submitted shop
drawings and field coordination requirements. Equipment outlines shown on drawings or
dimensioned on drawings are limiting dimensions. Any equipment that reduces the indicated
clearances or exceeds specified or scheduled equipment dimensions shall not be used.
E.
The Architect/Engineer and Owner reserve the right to make minor changes in the location of
equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. at the time of rough-in without additional cost to the Owner.
F.
The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall have completed for his portion of work, at least one
installation of size and type comparable to this project and has been in satisfactory operation for
at least two complete years. The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall also have a developed
service department capable of negotiating service contracts with the Owner for systems herein
specified.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
AUTOCAD BACKGROUND FILES
The Contractor shall include in their bid any cost for requesting AutoCAD backgrounds for their
use from the Architect or Engineer. The cost will be $150.00 for the first plan, and $50.00 for
each additional plan that may be requested for AutoCAD use. A waiver of responsibility for the
Architect and Engineer related to Contractor use of the CAD files shall be signed by the
Contractor.
MANUFACTURER’S SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Some equipment, plumbing fixtures, materials, etc. that are scheduled on the drawings or listed
in any addenda may not be specified in this specification. The manufacturer's specification and
capacities shall be considered included and part of this specification whether it is specified in
this specification or noted or scheduled on the drawings. The contractor shall remove and
replace any "substituted" equipment or material, that has been installed or is on site, which in the
opinion of the Architect/Engineer does not meet the scheduled equipment or materials
manufacturer's capacities or specification at no additional cost to the Owner.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in pipe shafts.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-2
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
F.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G.
The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.6
LOCAL CONDITIONS
A.
Before submitting proposals, each contractor shall examine these specifications and associated
drawings, addenda, etc. and shall examine the site of the project. The bidder shall fully
investigate the site of this project, investigate coordination of his work with all other trades and
existing conditions and completely satisfy himself as to the conditions to which the work is to be
performed before submitting his/her bid. No allowances or considerations will be given at a later
date for alleged misunderstanding as to the requirements of the work, materials to be furnished,
or conditions required by the nature of this project site and coordination by the neglect on the
bidder's part to make such an examination and coordination.
B.
Drawings show approximate location of existing services. The mechanical and electrical trades
shall check with local utility companies or municipal agencies for exact location of services
which they expect to encounter. The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall be responsible for
hiring a company such as "Miss Dig" to stake out and locate all utilities in areas of excavation
before commencing any work. The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall verify all elevations and
locations of existing underground lines which are to be connected into or routed over or under.
This verification shall be done prior to beginning work at this project.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All work shall be performed in accordance with all local and state codes, laws and regulations
applicable to the work for this project. The contractor shall be responsible for all permits and
costs for inspections, etc., and for checking with each utility company supplying service to this
project and shall determine from them all, any changes in boxes, meters, valves, service, etc., and
shall include all cost for inspections, revisions to services, etc. in his bid as required by local
agencies, utilities, etc. No extra payment will be made for such items after the contractor
submits his bid.
B.
In addition to all applicable Federal, State and local codes, the standards and codes listed below
shall apply to all mechanical work. The reference to codes and standards shall be referenced to
the latest edition or revision.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
American Gas Association (AGA)
American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
American Society for Testing materials (ASTM)
American Water Works Association (AWWA)
American Welding Society
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-3
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
C.
1.8
ANSI code of Pressure Piping and Unified Pressure Vessels
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
Standards of the Hydraulic Institute
Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)
Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA)
In the event of conflict between drawings, codes, standards or specifications, the most stringent
requirement shall apply
SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Submit electronic sets of complete shop drawings for all plumbing equipment and materials
associated with Division 22 and associated drawings to the Architect/Engineer for review before
fabrication of work or ordering of equipment. Shop drawings shall be submitted at the earliest
possible time.
B.
Shop drawings shall be first reviewed by the contractor. Inaccurate shop drawings shall be
corrected by the contractor to meet specifications and schedules for this project. The contractor
shall then initial the shop drawings as having been reviewed before submitting to the
Architect/Engineer. Shop drawings shall have, in addition to the mechanical information, the
electrical requirements for minimum circuit amperes and maximum fuse size ratings of the
equipment.
C.
Drawings which are rejected must be corrected and returned for Architect/Engineer review
before ordering.
D.
Furnish to the job site copies or prints of shop drawings that have been reviewed by the Engineer
as soon as possible.
E.
Include a copy of each shop drawing in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
F.
The checking and reviewing of shop drawings by the Architect/Engineer shall be construed as
assisting the contractor and the Architect/Engineer's action does not relieve the contractor from
the responsibility for errors or omissions which may exist thereon. The contractor shall be held
responsible for errors or omissions that are discovered after approval process and must be made
good by the contractor.
1.9
A.
PERMITS, INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall take out all permits and arrange for necessary
inspections and shall pay all assessments, fees and costs, etc., and make all tests as required by
applicable codes. At the completion of the project, the Mechanical Trades Contractor shall
furnish certificates of inspection and approval and secure final occupancy permit. Record copies
shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance manuals.
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-4
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.10
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Maintain an up-to-date set of "record" drawings showing actual equipment, plumbing piping, etc.
installation locations. Exact dimensions from column lines for all concealed work and tie-ins
with elevations noted shall be included.
B.
Include a set of reproducible drawings and a set of prints in each Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
C.
The Engineer reserves the right to request and be furnished any additional information he deems
necessary to be shown on the record drawings.
1.11
A.
1.12
OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS
Upon completion of the project, the contractor shall be responsible for instructing the Owner's
operating staff, in the presence of the Architect/Engineer's representative, in the proper operation
and maintenance of the mechanical systems and equipment. Include a statement signed by the
Owner that instructions have been given for proper operation and maintenance of the mechanical
systems and equipment.
GUARANTEES
A.
Furnish a written guarantee, to the Architect/Engineer, that will make the contractor responsible
at his own expense for any imperfections in material and/or workmanship which may develop
under ordinary use within a period of one (1) year from final Owner's acceptance of the work.
B.
Furnish all written guarantees from equipment and/or material manufacturers which shall include
the operating and performance conditions and capabilities upon which they are based.
1.13
A.
1.14
PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS
Retain all portable and detachable parts of installation such as keys, spare accessories, operating
manuals, etc. include in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Furnish to the Architect/Engineer two (2) copies of an approved bound (3 ring binder) book with
tabs for sections covering each item of equipment. These notebooks shall include shop drawings,
maintenance manuals, operating manuals and parts lists to instruct the Owner on proper
operation and use as well as maintenance for each piece of equipment. These books shall also include contractors’, subcontractors’ and manufacturers' names, telephone numbers and addresses.
C.
The manuals must be approved by the Architect/Engineer before final payment to the contractor.
The Engineer reserves the right to request and be furnished any additional information that he
deems necessary to be included in the manuals.
1.15
A.
RESPONSIBILITIES FOR USE OF SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS
Contractor shall notify Architect/Engineer in writing at least ten (10) calendar days before bids
are due for approval to use materials and/or equipment other than that which has been specified
or scheduled. If substitute materials and/or equipment are approved and used, it will be this
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-5
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
contractor's responsibility to guarantee that the items will function as the specified equipment or
materials, will in no way alter the design of the structure or system, and will not require any
additional mechanical work such as piping, plumbing, etc. Any additional cost required by
substitute materials will be the responsibility of the contractor.
B.
It will be the contractor's responsibility, at his own expense, to remove or replace any nonapproved equipment or material or any approved equipment or materials not originally specified
or scheduled if equipment and materials do not meet with the satisfaction of the
Architect/Engineer.
C.
It shall be the Contractor’s (Mechanical Trades) responsibility to coordinate and pay for any
Electrical Contractor costs due to any changes in substitute materials and/or equipment’s power
requirements, which differ from that shown on the design documents.
D.
No consideration will be given to requests for substitute materials because of delivery problems
unless the contractor can prove that orders were placed as soon as possible after contract was
awarded and that delays were not caused by submittal of unscheduled or unspecified
(substituted) materials to the Architect/Engineer.
1.16
COST BREAKDOWN AND EQUIPMENT LIST
A.
The successful bidder shall be responsible for submitting a cost breakdown to the
Architect/Engineer and Owner within ten (10) calendar days after date of request of the
breakdown. During progress of the work, if changes occur which cause additional cost, the price
on such items shall be broken down in accordance with the items listed in the breakdown.
B.
The bidders shall be responsible for submitting a complete list of all equipment manufacturers,
makes, models, etc. that will be used for this project with their proposal. The equipment list
shall be typed on the contractors letterhead and shall be signed by the authorized officer.
1.17
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
Materials and equipment furnished under this project shall have a minimum warrantee of one (1)
year. All materials and equipment shall be new, of first class quality and shall be furnished,
delivered, erected, installed and finished in every detail and shall be so selected and arranged as
to fit into the building space. All material or equipment that is not specified but necessary for this
project shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
C.
Any materials or equipment not specified or scheduled but similar to that which has had prior
approval shall be listed as a substitution and noted on the proposal form as such.
D.
The contractor shall include all miscellaneous materials and labor required to completely install
and operate the plumbing systems as is intended by these drawings and specification.
1.18
A.
SCHEDULE, COORDINATION AND INSTALLATION OF WORK
The contractor shall carry on work in such a manner as to meet the dates as scheduled by the
General Contractor and shall work overtime at no expense to the Owner as required to comply
with the schedule. This contractor shall schedule all work with Owner and Architect/Engineer
and schedule shut down of systems with Owner.
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-6
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
B.
Examine the site and all drawings and specifications and coordinate work with all other trades
before commencing work for this project. Arrange work essentially as shown with the exact
layout to be made on the job to suit actual conditions. Precise locations of equipment and
materials shall be coordinated and shall be the responsibility of this contractor. Should any
conflicts in location occur, and necessary deviations from drawings are required as determined
by the Architect/Engineer, the contractor shall make necessary adjustments without additional
cost to the Owner.
C.
All equipment, plumbing piping, etc. shall be located and/or routed to allow for the most
convenient access for servicing.
D.
Arrange for necessary access doors, panels, etc. to allow servicing of equipment, piping, valves,
etc. Perform any cutting and patching as required, made necessary by failure to make proper
arrangements.
E.
Indicated equipment connections, sizes and locations shall be verified and connected according
to manufacturer's shop drawings and installation instructions. Thoroughly investigate the space
provided for equipment and connections before ordering equipment. All equipment shall be
selected to fit into the space allowed, including connections with adequate space allowed for
operation and maintenance.
F.
All work shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, using skilled personnel thoroughly
qualified in the trade or duties that they are to perform. Rough work will be rejected.
G.
Coordinate all equipment deliveries and schedules to allow timely installation. Contractor shall
separate equipment into sections and reassemble in building if required by the installation at no
extra cost to the Owner.
H.
Furnish a superintendent approved by the Architect/Engineer to oversee and coordinate the work
to be performed with all other trades.
I.
Coordinate location of pipes, plumbing, etc. with other building components such as structural
components (beams, joists, columns, etc.), electrical components (lighting, conduits, etc.) and
architectural components (walls, ceilings, floors, pipe chases, roof, etc.).
J.
Before starting work, Contractor shall verify that available space for proposed pipes, equipment
etc. is adequate for the intended purpose and will result in a first class installation. Regardless of
drawings, responsibility for first class operating systems rests with the Contractor.
K.
Arrange for chases, slots, openings, etc. and other building components to allow for plumbing
systems installation. Coordinate cutting and patching of these components to accommodate
installation. This contractor shall be responsible for accurately locating for the general trades all
chases, shafts, etc. and shall be responsible for all cutting and patching if these chases were not
accurate or not coordinated in time with the general trades. Coordinate installation of all sleeves
in walls, floors or other structural or architectural components.
L.
Sequence, coordinate and integrate installation of equipment and materials for efficient work
flow during the project. Particular attention should be spent on larger pieces of equipment.
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-7
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
M.
Install equipment and materials with provisions for necessary access for service and
maintenance. Allow space for removal of all parts that may require replacement or servicing.
N.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete
and other structural components as they are constructed.
O.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that
are concealed behind finished surfaces. When access panels are required, valves and equipment
components requiring access shall be located to minimize the number of panels.
P.
Examine the work as it progresses and alert the Architect/Engineer in writing of any instances or
obstructions that will prevent this contractor from performing his/her work.
Q.
The Mechanical Trade shall be responsible for all coordination of all site utilities, the gas
company, etc. including coordination of all new and existing natural gas loads.
1.19
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
C.
Furnish and maintain a weatherproof storage facility on the site of adequate size to store
miscellaneous equipment and/or materials to prevent exposure to the weather. Location of shed
shall be determined by the Owner and Architect/Engineer. The Owner reserves the right to deny
storage of materials or equipment in any existing or new buildings.
1.20
COOPERATION WITH ARCHITECT/ENGINEER AND OTHERS
A.
Coordinate all aspects of the plumbing system installation with all other trades, existing
conditions, etc.
B.
If the bidder believes that changes in design are required to meet intended design capacities and
operation or material and/or equipment is obviously omitted from these specifications and
drawings, the bidder shall contact the Architect/Engineer in writing at least ten (10) days before
bid date. The acceptance of a bid by the Owner shall be binding and shall indicate that the
bidder does not require any changes in design nor additional costs in order to meet the design and
performance of the mechanical system as indicated in these specifications and drawings.
1.21
A.
WORK INVOLVING OTHER TRADES
Equipment or materials specified in Division 22 may have to be installed by other trades (such as
electrical trades or architectural trades) due to code requirements or union jurisdictional
requirements. Where this occurs, this contractor shall include all costs required by other trades
to complete the work and hire the respective trade to perform this work.
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-8
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.22
PERFORMANCE DATA AND ACCESSIBILITY
A.
All performance data specified in this specification or scheduled on drawings shall be considered
actual performance of the equipment after installation. The supplier and installer shall be
responsible for suitable allowances to adjust equipment to design capacities when actual
operating and installation conditions differ from drawings.
B.
All equipment and materials shall be installed to allow access for servicing and maintenance.
Coordinate final location of such equipment and materials that are concealed with required
access doors on panels. Allow ample space for replacement or servicing.
1.23
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Unless noted otherwise, the Mechanical Trades shall be responsible for all cutting, patching and
associated work required under Division 22. This work shall be performed by trades normally
performing this type of work except drilling of holes shall be done by the contractor requiring
same. This includes replacing areas of cutting required by this work with proper reinforcing,
termite shielding, materials, finishing, etc. to restore the areas to their original condition, and
filling all openings around ducts, piping, etc. with approved fire retardant materials. Regardless,
all drilling of holes shall be the responsibility of the Contractor requiring same.
B.
If noted on drawings that the General Trades will be responsible for all cutting and patching, it
will be the Mechanical Trades responsibility to notify all General Trades during bidding of all
areas requiring cutting and patching. Regardless, all drilling of holes shall be the responsibility
of the contractor requiring same.
1.24
WORK IN EXISTING BUILDINGS
A.
Coordinate and schedule all work in existing building with Owner and Architect/Engineer.
Systems shall be kept in operation at all times if at all possible. If a system shut-down is
required, the contractor shall schedule with the Owner, the time and length of shut-down. A
system shall not be shut down without written permission from the Owner.
B.
All existing equipment, plumbing, piping, etc. that is to be removed shall remain the property of
the Owner. The contractor shall remove and locate this material that remains the property of the
Owner to a location determined by the Owner somewhere on site. If the Owner does not want to
maintain possession of the removed material, the contractor shall be responsible for removing
material from the site and disposing of this material as necessary to meet all codes and requirements and shall pay all costs as required for any disposal fees, inspections, permits, etc.
C.
All existing piping, equipment, etc. whether shown on drawings or not that is to be removed
and/or abandoned and does not remain property of the Owner shall be removed from site.
D.
Any existing plumbing, piping, valves, mechanical equipment, etc. serving the existing building
which are shown or not shown on drawings and are required for systems operation shall remain
in use. If these systems require relocation to allow installation of new systems, the contractor
shall be responsible for relocating to an Owner and Architect/Engineer approved location. The
contractor shall pay all cost for this work and include such cost in his/her bid. (As specified
previously, contractor shall be responsible for examining site and include all cost for work
required to complete this project.)
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-9
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
E.
1.25
When active services, etc. are encountered in this project, the contractor shall furnish and install
bracing, support, etc. as required to protect and keep these services active. (As specified
previously, these drawings are diagrammatical. The contractor shall be responsible for
verification of all existing services, piping, equipment, etc.).
ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT, VALVES, ETC.
A.
Coordinate access panels with type of construction and furnish access panels in areas that are
non-accessible. Access panels shall be furnished by this contractor and installed by the General
Contractor. The access panels shall be all approved, UL labeled and fired rated and shall be
located and sized to allow access to equipment, valves, etc.
B.
Where access panels are required, valves, equipment etc. shall be located as to require the least
number of access panels.
1.26
A.
1.27
A.
1.28
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
Connections to equipment, plumbing fixtures, etc. shall be made in accordance with shop
drawings, rough-in dimensions furnished by the manufacturer, codes, etc. and may vary with
connections shown on drawings. The contractor shall be responsible for making connections and
number of connectors as per shop drawings, codes, etc. at no additional cost to the Owner.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
The Electrical Trades shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all electrical equipment,
wiring, etc. required for operation of mechanical equipment unless otherwise noted on the
drawings. The Mechanical Trades shall furnish detailed information and wiring diagrams to the
Electrical Trades for all equipment specified and/or scheduled for this project. In the event that
the Mechanical Trades furnishes an "approved equal" or "alternate" that require changes in the
original electrical design, the Mechanical Trades shall pay all costs to the Electrical Trades as
required to make satisfactory adjustments. All electrical work shall be done in accordance with
the latest edition of the National Electric Code.
MOTORS, MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECTS
A.
Unless otherwise noted on drawings, motors shall be of constant speed 1750 rpm, new NEMA
Design B, 40ºC rise, horse power rated, open drip-proof except TEFC in dirty atmosphere,
induction type motor with service factor of 1.15 and be of sufficient capacity to continuously
operate the apparatus to which it is connected under all conditions of operation without
exceeding nameplate ratings.
B.
Motors shall be premium efficiency as calculated using IEEE test method 112B.
C.
Motors ½ Hp. or larger shall be three phase; motors under ½ Hp. shall be 115 volt, 60 cycle,
single phase. Before ordering the motors, the contractor shall verify correct motor voltage with
the Electrical Trades and field conditions.
D.
The Mechanical Trades shall furnish, for equipment under Division 22, all special switches,
disconnects, starters, alternators, etc. as specified or scheduled to be factory furnished and/or
factory installed with the equipment including wiring diagrams, etc. whether it is to be factory
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-10
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
installed or field wired. All other motor starters, disconnects, etc. not noted as factory furnished
shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Trades.
E.
Starters that are to be factory furnished with equipment shall be of the combination type and
shall be as specified under Electrical Trades Division. Furnish overload protection for each
phase.
F.
All wiring methods and materials shall meet NEMA, National Electric Code and State of
Michigan Code requirements.
G.
All displays on control panels shall be on face of the panels.
1.29
BASES AND SUPPORTS
A.
This contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all equipment pads and supports for
equipment and materials required by Division 22 unless otherwise noted on drawings.
B.
All floor mounted mechanical equipment shall have a reinforced concrete pad furnished unless
otherwise noted on drawings. The concrete pads shall be tied to the building floor with
expansion bolts located maximum of 4’-0” on centers with a minimum of four (4) bolts, set
before pouring and concealed within the pad. The Mechanical Trades shall verify exact pad or
support size with the equipment manufacturer and shall size pad with adequate area to allow
sufficient room for equipment mounting hardware, etc. Concrete pads shall have a 45 degree
bevel at the top edge. The contractor shall verify exact location of concrete pads.
C.
Furnish all steel, hanging material, rods, etc. for suspending equipment off floor unless otherwise
noted on drawings for equipment to be furnished under Division 22. This includes all structural
steel for supporting between beams.
D.
All support structure shall be of strength to safely withstand all stresses and loads to which they
will be subjected and shall distribute load properly over the building area. Supports shall be
designed to avoid undue strain to equipment and to avoid interference with piping, pipe
connections, service and maintenance clearances, etc.
E.
Where equipment is to be floor mounted and requires legs, this contractor shall furnish and
install structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings for legs. Fasten and brace to equipment
and furnish flange at base to allow bolting to floor.
F.
Where equipment is to be ceiling or wall mounted, furnish necessary platform, structural steel,
hardware, etc. as is most suitable for support of this equipment.
G.
All supports shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer.
H.
All piping, plumbing, etc. shall be suspended from structural steel members utilizing rods and
approved hanger devices. Do not use metal deck for support. Beam clamps such as the Grinnell
Fig. 260 or approved equal shall be used. Sheet metal “straps” shall not be used in place of rods.
I.
The mechanical trades shall be responsible for furnishing and setting in place all mechanical
equipment, roof curbs and plumbing, piping roof curbs. The general trade shall be responsible
for the roof work and associated flashing. The mechanical trade shall furnish and install treated
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-11
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
wood base blocking as required to level curb and to match roof insulation thickness. Curb shall
be as specified, or if not specified should be similar to Pate or Thy-curb with heavy gauge
galvanized steel, insulated and with wood nailer. Height of curb scheduled or specified shall be
height required to top of curb above finished roof. If height is not specified or noted, a minimum
12” high above finished roof will be required. (pipe support units shall be at height required).
1.30
SLEEVES, PLATES AND COLLARS
A.
Furnish all sleeves, plates and collars for plumbing piping, etc. passing through walls, floor
ceilings, foundations, etc. Coordinate with the General Contractor the exact location and size of
required openings. No pipe shall pass through a wall, floor ceiling, etc. without a sleeve. This
contractor shall be responsible for sleeve locations and securing sleeves before concrete is
formed.
B.
Sleeves for steel pipe shall be standard weight black steel pipe. For walls, foundations and
ceilings, sleeve shall be kept flush with finished surfaces. For floors, the sleeve shall be set flush
with bottom of concrete construction and be extended up ¼" above concrete floor. Sleeves shall
be set in place before construction of walls, floors, ceilings, etc.
C.
Sleeves for copper pipe shall be type "M" hard copper tubing installed typical to that of steel pipe
sleeves.
D.
Sleeves for piping shall be sized to allow insulation to run continuous through sleeve whenever
possible and to allow not less than ¼" all around bare pipe or insulation.
E.
Where insulated piping passes through walls or floor sleeves, furnish 22 gauge galvanized band
around insulation of same length as the sleeve length. Band shall fit snugly over insulation and
be held in place by steel metal collars all around insulation to cover openings.
F.
All penetration voids shall be sealed smoke tight with non-combustible materials similar to 3M
or Hilti firestop systems to maintain the integrity of the fire rated structure. In a non-rated
assembly, seal all voids with non-hardening sealant.
G.
Where bare piping 2" and smaller pass through wall or floors, furnish polished chrome plated
brass escutcheons, split type. Bare piping 2½" and larger that pass through walls or floor, furnish
22 gauge galvanized steel metal collars so as to cover opening.
H.
Where piping penetrates an outside wall, below grade, utilize a mechanical sleeve, similar to
Link-Seal, with stainless steel nuts and bolts on fasteners.
1.31
A.
1.32
A.
RIGGING AND HOISTING
Perform all required rigging, hoisting, transportation, moving, etc. of all equipment, materials,
etc. to be furnished and/or installed under Division 22 whether furnished by this contractor or by
the Owner or other trades.
STORAGE FACILITY
Furnish and maintain a weatherproof storage facility on the site of adequate size to store
miscellaneous equipment and/or materials to prevent exposure to the weather. Location of shed
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-12
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
shall be determined by the Owner and Architect/Engineer. The Owner reserves the right to deny
storage of materials or equipment in any existing or new buildings.
1.33
PROTECTION FROM DAMAGE
A.
The contractor shall be responsible for all materials, equipment, etc. and all work installed by
himself and shall protect it from damage until final acceptance of this project by the Owner.
B.
Furnish all coverings and protection from dirt, dust, rain, storm, heat, traffic, wear, etc. and all
possible injury including that by other workmen. Any equipment, workmanship, materials, etc.
damaged prior to final acceptance by the Owner of this project shall be properly repaired at no
expense to the Owner.
C.
Protect all plumbing fixtures and other equipment from damage by covering or coating. Any
dented, scratched, rusted or marred surface finishes will not be accepted.
D.
Protect all equipment, materials, etc. from freezing.
1.34
COMMON PIPE MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
C.
Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:
system contents.
Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
a. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness
unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
1. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
2. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
b. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according
to ASTM B 813.
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-13
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
5. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant
piping, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
7. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
a. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
b. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
c. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
d. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
8. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
1.35
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hangers and saddles shall be Modern Pipe Support Corp., Grinnel/Anvil, Autogrip, or M-CO.
Inserts shall be of the type to receive a machine bolt head or nut after installation, permit
horizontal adjustment, and shall be flush with the surface. For copper pipe with steel hangers,
clean and wrap pipe with two layers of plastic insulating tape at point of contact. Roller supports
shall be adjustable type with insulated standoff. Rods shall be used for suspended installation.
Sheet metal “straps” shall not be used in place of rods.
B.
Hangers for piping with vapor barrier sealed insulation shall be multipurpose pipe saddles fitting
over the insulation. Wire or perforated strap iron will not be permitted for pipe supports. Do not
support hangers from roof deck. Furnish and install all support steel as required to suspend from
structural steel joist or beams. Hangers shall be clevis or split ring type with vertical adjustment
and beam clamp similar to Grinnell/Anvil Fig. 260, with maximum spacing per ASHRAE
Standards:
C.
Pipe Size
Steel Pipe
Copper Pipe
PVC Pipe
Rod Size
½ to ¾ inch
1 inch
1 ¼ inch
1½ inch
2 inch
2½ inch
3 inch
3 ½ inch
4 inch
5 inch
6 inch
8 inch
10 inch
12 inch
6 feet
7 feet
7 feet
7 feet
10 feet
11 feet
11 feet
13 feet
14 feet
14 feet
14 feet
16 feet
16 feet
20 feet
5 feet
5 feet
7 feet
7 feet
8 feet
9 feet
9 feet
11 feet
12 feet
12 feet
-----
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
3/8”
3/8”
3/8”
1/2”
1/2"
5/8”
5/8”
5/8”
3/4”
3/4"
3/4"
7/8“
7/8”
1”
Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69 and MSS SP89.
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-14
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
D.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes ½ to 1½ Inch : Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
E.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
F.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes thru 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
G.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 5 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double
hanger.
H.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
I.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes up thru 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
J.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
K.
Vertical Support: Steel riser unistrut clamps at high, mid, and low locations.
L.
Floor Support for Cold Pipe all sizes and Hot Pipe Sizes up thru 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable
pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
M.
Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
N.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
O.
Inserts: Malleable iron case of steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral
adjustments, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms, size inserts to suit threaded
hanger rods.
1.36
PLUMBING, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORT
A.
Attachments of mechanical equipment to structural members are the responsibility of the
installing trade. Structural members shall not be field cut, welded or otherwise modified without
approval of the Architect/Engineer. Attachment to steel joist shall be made at panel points.
When routing piping or ductwork perpendicular to joist, a support shall be provided at every
steel joist; when parallel to joist, a support shall be provided at no more than 6’ on centers or two
panel bays. Structural members shall not be overloaded as a result of attachments.
Attachment/equipment loading for all trades resulting in total load greater than an equivalent
uniform 5 psf for any member shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review.
Mechanical Trades may contact the project Structural Engineer as required for panel point
location assistance and welder certification requirements. Electrical Trades are still responsible
for design, layout, and fabrication and installation of electrical supports and support attachment
methods. Mechanical Trades shall submit attachment methods to the Structural Engineer for
review.
B.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.
D.
Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-15
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
E.
Do not use powder-actuated anchors.
F.
Do not drill or cut structural members without permission from Architect/Engineer.
G.
Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon
head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock
washers under all nuts.
1.37
A.
1.38
PIPING SYSTEMS SHUT OFF VALVES
Shut off valves shall be installed at all branch lines off main piping, or where mains
divide/separate to serve different areas, to allow isolation of all branch piping and systems they
serve such as toilet rooms, areas or wings of the building, etc.
CLEANING AND FINISHING
A.
During construction period, remove all debris, rubbish, tools, equipment, unused materials, etc.
as required or requested by the Architect/Engineer. All cost for cleanup and removal will be the
responsibility of the contractor.
B.
Upon completion of the project and before final acceptance by the Owner, the entire installation
shall be thoroughly cleaned, all rubbish and unused material removed to the satisfaction of the
Architect/Engineer. All dust and dirt shall be removed from all equipment, piping, ductwork,
etc.
C.
Thoroughly clean all floor drains, cleanouts, and plumbing fixtures. Clean all trays and strainers.
D.
Finish paint all equipment, materials, piping, etc. as noted on drawings or listed in this
specification. Match Owner's existing color scheme. Any Division 22 equipment which has
been scratched or damaged shall be finished equal to the original finish.
1.39
A.
1.40
A.
1.41
A.
EQUIPMENT/SYSTEMS START-UP
Furnish and schedule manufacturer’s start-up service for all equipment and systems. These startup services shall be performed in the presence of, and to the satisfaction of the Owner and
Architect/Engineer.
EQUIPMENT/SYSTEMS SIGN-OFF
The Mechanical Trades shall furnish written sign-offs on all systems stating that the equipment
and systems have been checked, tested, started and that their operation has been verified correct
through the entire range of operation that can be expected through the seasons.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Contractor shall submit a letter to the Architect/Engineer advising that all work has been
completed in accordance with plans and specifications and the project is ready for a final walkthru.
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #_____________
END OF SECTION
Plumbing Requirements
22 05 00-16
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 22 05 10
PLUMBING SYSTEMS TESTING, CLEANING AND STARTUP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Testing of piping systems.
B.
Cleaning of piping systems.
C.
Substantial completion check list and sign-off forms.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
All drawings and specification sections apply to work in this section. Furnish all items, articles,
materials, equipment, operations or methods that are mentioned, listed or scheduled on drawings
or are in this specification including all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous incidentals
necessary and/or required for the completion of this project. The work covered under this section
of the specifications is in no way complete within itself, but is supplementary to the entire
specification and drawings.
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, material, or
methods that are mentioned, listed or scheduled on drawings or are in this specification. This
includes all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous incidentals necessary and/or required
for the cleaning, and testing of the piping systems for this project. The work covered under this
section of the specification is in no way complete within itself, but is supplementary to the entire
specification and drawings.
B.
The substantial completion forms shall be required to be signed and submitted to the
Architect/Engineer for approval prior to any insulation of piping systems or installation of ceiling
tiles. The person that signs the substantial completion forms shall witness the testing of the
systems. The signature person’s company shall be responsible for all cost incurred with future
work by the Architect/Engineer or Owner due to inadequate testing, cleaning or operation of the
piping systems.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Record actual installation locations of piping and equipment including sampling points and
location of chemical injectors.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Conform to applicable code for addition of non-potable chemicals to building mechanical
systems, and for public sewage systems.
Work Order __________
Plumbing Systems Testing, Cleaning and Start up
22 05 10 - 1
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
B.
Products requiring electrical connection and listed and classified by UL as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS – Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
SANITARY AND STORM PIPING SYSTEMS
Testing
1.
Conduct a water, air or peppermint test on the entire system in accordance with the State
Plumbing Code. Test underground sanitary, storm and vent piping with at least a 10 foot
head of water.
SYSTEM COMPLETION CHECKLIST
A.
The checklist which follows this specification section is to be considered part of the
specifications.
B.
The checklist is to be completed by the Installing Contractor and the prime Mechanical
Contractor for each item as directed.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order __________
Plumbing Systems Testing, Cleaning and Start up
22 05 10 - 2
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SYSTEMS COMPLETION
CHECKLIST
Inspection/Review Item
Notice
Required
Installing Contractor
Name
Date Owner’s Representative Remarks
Signature
Signature
Plumbing Systems
Testing of Sanitary and Storm
Systems
Valving
Sump Pumps
Pipe Labeling and Valve
Tagging Identification
Owner’s Training
48 hours
Tested per specification
When
completed
Verify that valves have been installed at all
branch piping locations
48 hours
Verify system installation complete and
operational.
When
completed
Verify system identification is complete per
specification and valve chart submitted.
7 days
Verify that Owner has been instructed on
operation and maintenance of systems.
By signing this form, the Contractor is certifying that he has personally witnessed completion of that item, and it is complete and complies with all respects to the drawings and
specifications.
All items are to be signed off on and submitted to MacMillan Associates Inc. before a final project walk-thru by the Engineer is requested. If the Engineer discovers items
incomplete and/or not in accordance with this checklist, the drawings, or the specifications, the Contractor will be backcharged for the Engineer’s time and expenses.
SC-3
3
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 22 05 53
PLUMBING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Nameplates.
B.
Tags.
C.
Stencils.
D.
Pipe Markers.
1.2
A.
1.4
REFERENCES: Material and/or equipment specified in this section shall meet or exceed one or
more of the property requirements or installation requirements of the following
specifications/publications as applicable to the specific product or end use:
ANSI or equal standards for the Identification of Piping Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit list of working, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.
B.
Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve
manufacturer’s name and model number.
C.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
D.
Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
NAMEPLATES
Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color. Furnish and install on all mechanical equipment.
TAGS
A.
Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1½ inch diameter with smooth edges.
B.
Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.
2.3
A.
STENCILS
Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
Work Order #_________
Plumbing System Identification
22 05 53-1
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
2.4
¾ to 1¼ inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, ½ inch
high letters.
1½ to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, ¾ inch high
letters.
2½ to 6 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch long color field, 1¼ inch
high letters.
8 to 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 24 inch long color field, 2½ inch
high letters.
Over 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 32 inch long color field, 3½ inch
high letters.
Ductwork and Equipment: 2½ inch high letters.
Stencil Paint shall be semi-gloss enamel, colors conforming to ASME A13.1.
PIPE MARKERS
A.
Color: Match existing or conform to ANSI/OSHA standards.
B.
Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around
pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of
fluid being conveyed.
C.
Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and
printed markings.
D.
Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape,
minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
2.5
CEILING TACKS
A.
Description: Steel with ¾ inch diameter color coded head.
B.
Color code as follows:
1.
Green
- Plumbing valves
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B.
Prepare surfaces as required by manufacturer's installations for stencil painting.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with
sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B.
Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
Work Order #_________
Plumbing System Identification
22 05 53-2
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
C.
Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
E.
Identify each piece of equipment with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps,
may be identified with tags.
F.
Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
G.
Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers or stenciled painting.
Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
Locate identification not to exceed 10 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to
each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
H.
Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel
closest to equipment.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #_________
Plumbing System Identification
22 05 53-3
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 22 06 00
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
General information for piping systems, plumbing fixtures, sump pumps, etc. and general
installation information.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
Field verify all equipment and fixture locations.
B.
Confirm that mill work is constructed with adequate provisions for the installation of countertop
plumbing fixtures.
C.
Confirm all mounting heights and locations of plumbing fixtures to meet all barrier free and
American Disabilities Act codes and regulations.
1.3
A.
EQUIPMENT, FIXTURE & MISCELLANEOUS SPECIFICATIONS
All equipment, plumbing fixtures, specialties, etc. that have been scheduled on drawings shall
have the manufacturer's specification automatically included as part of this specification. All
"approved substitute" or "voluntary alternate" equipment fixtures, etc. shall meet the capacities,
quality, etc. of the scheduled items specification and capacities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
See Section 22 10 00 for Plumbing Piping.
MATERIALS AND FINISH
A.
Fixtures shall be of best quality vitreous china, acid resisting enameled cast iron or stainless
steel, free from discoloration, chips, dents, warps, flaws, cracks, scratches, etc. or other
blemishes. All vitreous china and enamel shall be white unless otherwise noted. Fixtures shall
have manufacturer's guarantee label or trademark indicating first quality.
B.
All exposed pipe, fittings, traps, wastes, faucets, valves, handles, escutcheons, bolts, screws and
accessories shall be polished chrome plated brass unless noted otherwise. Exposed traps shall be
chrome plated brass, adjustable with cleanout plug and escutcheon.
2.3
A.
PLUMBING FIXTURES - GENERAL
Furnish all fixtures as shown and scheduled on drawings.
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Specialties
22 06 00-1
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
B.
Unless noted as “no substitutions”, similar fixtures by the following manufacturers with equal or
better qualities will be accepted as equal for:
1.
Drainage Specialties - Josam, Sioux Chief, Smith, Wade, Watts, Zurn
2.
Plumbing Fixtures - American Standard, Bradley, Crane, Elkay, Fiat, Florestone, Just,
Kohler, Mansfield, Moen Commercial, ProFlo, Sloan, Stern-Williams, Zurn.
3.
Plumbing Specialties – Schier, Watts, Wilkins, Zurn.
4.
Flush Valves - Delany, Delta, Sloan (Royal), Zurn, American Standard.
5.
Faucets - American Standard, Chicago, Delta, Sloan, T & S, Woodford, Zurn.
6.
Toilet Seats - Bemis, Centoco, Church, Olsonite, Kohler.
7.
Mixing Valves and Accessories - Powers, Symmons, Watts, Zurn, Reliance, Conbraco
Appollo.
a. See 2.22 (this section) for emergency showers and eyewash stations.
8.
Electric Water Coolers and Drinking Fountains: Elkay, Halsey Taylor, Haws, Oasis.
C.
Provide all chair carriers, mounting hardware, etc. as required by the plumbing fixtures and wall
construction. Where fixtures are located on walls, furnish and install suitable steel shapes well
anchored in place and supported from floor as necessary to support fixtures. Each fixture shall
be supported solidly and shall be sufficiently strong to withstand severe usage.
D.
Where plumbing fixtures occur in walls with pipe spaces in back of same, the supports for
fixtures shall consist of chair carriers built into the wall with bolt projecting through face of wall
for attachments of fixture brackets.
2.4
A.
SUMP PUMP
Refer to Schedule on Drawings and furnish all.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Coordinate cutting and forming of floor construction to receive drains to required invert and rim
elevations.
B.
Coordinate all rough-in and/or final connections to equipment and plumbing fixtures. Plumbing
fixtures shall be located as required to meet all barrier free and American Disabilities Act codes
and regulations.
C.
Coordinate all piping invert elevations, location, routing, etc. to allow proper drainage from all
plumbing fixtures to sewer mains. Verify all services existing and new for elevations, locations,
etc. before commencing installation.
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Specialties
22 06 00-2
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
3.2
A.
3.3
FIXTURE CONNECTIONS
In general, unless otherwise noted on the drawings, the sizes of all the branch connections to
fixtures shall be no smaller than those listed in the following schedule and as required by local
and state plumbing codes, latest edition:
Fixture
Waste
Vent
Floor Sink
3”
1½”
INSTALLATION
A.
Plumbing fixtures and trim shall be protected against damage during construction. Fixtures
damaged during this period shall be replaced.
B.
All valves, waste and water supply piping servicing fixtures exposed beyond face of finished
walls shall be brass, nickel, and chromium plated. Where fixtures are mounted in countertops
and cabinet work concealing valves and piping, chrome plated brass finishes are not required.
C.
Waste connections to floor or wall outlet fixtures shall be gas and water-tight; fastened with an
approved setting compound, gasket or washer. Rubber gaskets or putty are not acceptable. The
fixture shall be set the proper distance from the wall or floor.
D.
All brackets, cleats, plates, anchors, etc. required to support fixtures or piping rigidly in place
shall be provided as work of this section and shall be installed behind finished walls.
E.
Provide and install basic fixtures from one major fixture manufacturer. Also, accessories such as
faucets, strainers, stops, traps, etc. shall be manufactured by one major company where possible.
F.
All fixtures shall be set rigid, tight, plumb, level and true to assure rigidity and permanence.
G.
Floor Drains
H.
1.
Floor drain pans shall be furnished and installed for all floor drains (except when floor
drain is located in floors on fill) and be made of lead sheets weighting 4 lbs. per square
foot or of an approved material, extending a minimum of 12" beyond lip of the flashing
ring with outer edges turned up. All floor drains, floor sinks, etc. shall have deep traps
installed.
2.
All fixtures shall be trapped if required by local or state plumbing codes.
3.
All trap seals that are subject to loss by evaporation shall have a trap seal device installed
as required by Local or State Plumbing Codes. A trap seal device shall conform to ASSE
1018 or ASSE 1044.
All plumbing fixtures shall be installed, vented, piped, trapped, etc. in accordance with all codes
and regulations pertaining to this projects location.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #_____________
Plumbing Specialties
22 06 00-3
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 22 10 00
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
Sanitary and storm piping system.
REFERENCES: Material and/or equipment specified in this section shall meet or exceed one or
more of the property requirements or installation requirements of the following
specifications/publications as applicable to the specific product or end use:
A.
ANSI B31.1 - Power Piping.
B.
ANSI B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping.
C.
ANSI B31.4 - Liquid Petroleum Transportation Piping Systems.
D.
ANSI B31.9 - Building Service Piping.
E.
ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
F.
ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
G.
ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800.
H.
ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
I.
ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250.
J.
ASME B16.18 - Cast Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings.
K.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings
L.
ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.
M.
ASME B16.26 - Cast Bronze Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
N.
ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings DWV.
O.
ASTM A47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.
P.
ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded.
Q.
ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
Work Order #______________________
Plumbing Piping
22 10 00-1
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
R.
ASTM A106 - Carbon Steel Seamless Pipe.
S.
ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated
Temperatures.
T.
ASTM A536 – Ductile Iron Castings.
U.
ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
V.
ASTM B42 - Seamless Copper Pipe.
W.
ASTM B43 - Seamless Red Brass Pipe.
X.
ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube.
Y.
ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
Z.
ASTM B251 - Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube.
AA.
ASTM B302 - Threadless Copper Pipe (TP).
AB.
ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).
AC.
ASTM C14 - Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe.
AD.
ASTM C425 - Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings.
AE.
ASTM C443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets.
AF.
ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
AG.
ASTM C700 - Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated.
AH.
ASTM D1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
AI.
ASTM D2235 - Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile - Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and
Fittings.
AJ.
ASTM D2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR).
AK.
ASTM D2466 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
AL.
ASTM D2513 - Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing and Fittings.
AM. ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
AN.
ASTM D2680 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Composite-Sewer Piping.
Work Order #______________________
Plumbing Piping
22 10 00-2
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
AO.
ASTM D2683 - Socket-Type Polyethylene Fillings for Outside Diameter-Controlled
Polyethylene Pipe.
AP.
ASTM D2729 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
AQ.
ASTM D2751 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
AR.
ASTM D2846 - Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe, Fittings, Solvent Cements and
Adhesives for Potable Hot Water Systems.
AS.
ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and
Fittings.
AT.
ASTM D3033 - Type PSP Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
AU.
ASTM D3034 - Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
AV.
ASTM D3309 - Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Hot Water Distribution System.
AW. ASTM F477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.
AX.
ASTM F493 - Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and
Fittings.
AY.
ASTM F891, Schedule 40 Cellular Core PVC-DWV Pipe.
AZ.
AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.
BA.
AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids.
BB.
AWWA C110 - Ductile - Iron and Gray - Iron Fittings 3 in. through 48 in., for Water and Other
Liquids.
BC.
AWWA C111- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
BD.
AWWA C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for
Water or Other Liquids.
BE.
AWWA C606 – Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
BF.
AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.
BG.
CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.
BH.
CISPI 310 - Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.
BI.
CAN-3 B281 - Aluminum Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Components.
BJ.
NCPWB - Procedure Specifications for Pipe Welding.
Work Order #______________________
Plumbing Piping
22 10 00-3
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
BK.
NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
BL.
NFPA 58 - Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
B.
Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor
regulations.
C.
Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9.
D.
All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single
manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.
E.
All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc. shall be date stamped for
quality assurance and traceability.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.
B.
Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
C.
Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
F.
Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings.
installation.
G.
Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections
of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
Maintain in place until
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SANITARY, STORM AND VENT SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF
BUILDING (Must be approved by governing authorities)
A.
Gravity Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight.
1.
Fittings: Cast iron.
2.
Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene
gaskets.
B.
Gravity Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight
1.
Fittings: Cast iron.
2.
Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system.
Work Order #______________________
Plumbing Piping
22 10 00-4
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
C.
Gravity Schedule 40 PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729 and ASTM F891 DWV non-pressure cellular
core.
1.
Fittings: PVC.
2.
Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.2
SANITARY, STORM AND VENT PIPING, ABOVE GRADE (Must be approved by governing
authorities)
A.
Gravity Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight.
1.
Fittings: Cast iron.
2.
Joints: ASTM C564, hub and spigot, neoprene gasket system.
B.
Gravity Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
1.
Fittings: Cast iron.
2.
Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
C.
Gravity Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 40, galvanized.
1.
Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and fittings; ASME B16.4, screwed fittings.
2.
Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, screwed type. ASTM A47.
3.
Ductile Iron Fittings: Grooved end, ASTM A536.
4.
Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Ductile iron, galvanized. (as specified for Forced
Drains)
D.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729 (when approved by the Architect/Engineer).
1.
Fittings: PVC.
2.
Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
E.
CPVC Pipe: ASTM D2846 (When approved by the Architect/Engineer).
1.
Fittings: ASTM D2846, CPVC
2.
Joints: ASTM D2846, solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement.
2.3
A.
2.4
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Refer to Section 22 05 00.
FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A.
Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under:
1.
Ferrous pipe: 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions.
2.
Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered joints. (Solder shall be lead
free.)
B.
Pipe Size Over 2 Inches:
1.
Ferrous pipe: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene
gaskets.
2.
Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig slip-on bronze flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed
neoprene gaskets.
C.
Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings:
Work Order #______________________
Plumbing Piping
22 10 00-5
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Unions and flanges for servicing and disconnect are not required in installations using
grooved joint couplings. (The couplings shall serve as disconnect points.)
Housing: Two ductile iron clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular
deflection, contraction, and expansion where required; electroplated steel bolts, nuts, and
washers conforming with ASTM A449; galvanized for galvanized pipe.
Sealing gasket: "C" shape or FlushSeal composition sealing gasket.
Gaskets shall be UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF-61 for Potable water
service.
Basis of Design: Victaulic Company, Style 607H (Installation-Ready for Copper Tubing)
and Style 107H or 177 (Installation-Ready for Steel Piping).
D.
Dielectric Connections: Dielectric nipples shall be non-conducting for connection of dissimilar
materials. Dielectric nipples shall be similar to Victaulic Style 647 or Style 47. A brass adapter
dielectric union is not acceptable.
2.5
GATE VALVES
A.
Up to and including 3 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, handwheel, inside
screw, single wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends.
B.
Over 3 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, single wedge, flanged or
grooved ends. Basis of Design: Victaulic Series 771V.
2.6
GLOBE VALVES
A.
Up to and including 3 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw,
renewable composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with back seating capacity (repackable
under pressure).
B.
Over 3 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged
ends, renewable seat and disc.
2.7
A.
B.
2.8
A.
BALL VALVES
Up to and including 3 Inches:
1.
Bronze one piece body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever
handle and balancing stops, solder or threaded ends with union.
2.
Brass two piece body, chrome plated brass ball and stem, PTFE seats-and seals, lever
handle, and Vic-Press ends. Victaulic Series P589.
Over 1-1/2 Inches: Cast ductile iron steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing
box seals, lever handle, or gear drive handwheel for sizes 10 inches and over, flanged or grooved
ends. Basis of Design: Victaulic Series 726.
BUTTERFLY VALVES
Bronze body
Work Order #______________________
Plumbing Piping
22 10 00-6
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
B.
2.9
1.
Elastomer coated ductile iron disc with integrally cast stem, copper-tube dimensioned
grooved ends, lever handle or gear operator. Basis of design: Victaulic Series 608.
2.
Stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded ends, extended neck, 10 position
lever handle.
Cast or ductile iron body, chrome plated ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable pressure
responsive EPDM seat, wafer or lug ends or grooved ends if Victaulic grooved fittings are used,
with extended neck and 10 position lever handle. (Stem shall be offset from the disc centerline to
provide full 360-degree circumferential seating). Sizes 6" and larger furnish gear drive
handwheel. Basis of Design: Victaulic MasterSeal™.
SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
Up to and including 3 Inches: Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends.
B.
Over 3 Inches: Iron body, stainless steel or bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat,
grooved or flanged ends. Basis of Design: Victaulic Series 712.
2.10
SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES
A.
Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer, or
flanged ends.
B.
Ductile iron body, stainless steel spring and shaft aluminum-bronze disc with elastomer seal or
elastomer coated ductile iron disc with welded-in nickel seat, grooved ends. Basis of Design:
Victaulic Series 716.
2.11
A.
INSERTS
Inserts: Malleable iron case of steel shell and expansion plug for threaded connection with
lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit
threaded hanger rods.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
EXAMINATION
Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel or groove plain end ferrous pipe.
B.
Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
Work Order #______________________
Plumbing Piping
22 10 00-7
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
D.
3.3
Unions and flanges for servicing and disconnect are not required in installations using grooved
joint couplings. (The couplings shall serve as disconnect points.)
PLUMBING PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Dielectric nipples for connection of dissimilar materials. A brass adaptor dielectric union is not
acceptable.
C.
Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.
D.
Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.
E.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F.
Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access
doors.
G.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and
apply one coat of zinc rich primer to weld.
H.
Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting.
I.
Underground sewers shall be a minimum of 3" in diameter. Sewers located within building shall
have a minimum slope of ¼" per foot for piping 3" and smaller and a minimum slope of 1/8" per
foot for piping 4" and larger.
J.
All junctions of drainage piping shall be made with combination "Y" and 1/8 bend fittings.
K.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
L.
Solder or "sweat" joints shall be used for all copper and brass fittings, valves and tubing, using
the soldering flux and methods recommended by the manufacturer of the tubing and fittings.
Solder shall be silver solder for buried piping. No lead solder shall be used on any potable water
piping.
M.
Install ductile iron pipe and fittings in accordance wht AWWA C600 and manufacturer’s
instructions.
N.
Steel Rods, Bolt, Lugs, and Brackets: Coat buried steel with one coat of coal tar coating before
backfilling.
3.4
A.
PLUMBING PIPING APPLICATION
Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners in accessible locations, risers and pipe chases
with Architect/Engineer's approval.
1.
Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest published
installation instructions. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations,
Work Order #______________________
Plumbing Piping
22 10 00-8
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Gaskets shall be of an
elastomer grade suitable for the intended service, and shall be molded and produced by
the coupling manufacturer. The grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained
representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of
grooving tools and installation of grooved joint products. The representative shall
periodically visit the jobsite and review contractor is following best recommended
practices in grooved product installation. (A distributor’s representative is not considered
qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visit(s).)
B.
Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Unions are not
required in installations using grooved mechanical joint couplings. (The couplings shall serve as
unions and disconnect points).
C.
Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to
pipe.
D.
Install gate, ball, or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or
vertical risers. All branch piping take-offs from mains, risers, or branch piping shall have valves
installed to allow isolation of branch piping.
E.
Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.
3.5
INSTALLATION OF INSERTS
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
C.
Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced
concrete beams.
D.
Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.
E.
Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
F.
Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with
recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.
3.6
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
B.
Install hangers to provide minimum ½ inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
C.
Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
D.
Use hangers with 1½ inch minimum vertical adjustment.
E.
Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between
hangers.
Work Order #______________________
Plumbing Piping
22 10 00-9
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
F.
Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.
G.
Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.
H.
Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
I.
Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
J.
Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
K.
Prime coat and finish paint exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in
crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. Hangers and
supports located in mechanical spaces are considered exposed.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #______________________
Plumbing Piping
22 10 00-10
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 23 05 00
HVAC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SPECIFICATIONS AND DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and related specifications for this project including General and Supplementary
Conditions, Division 1, General Requirements, Instructions to Bidders, Addenda's, etc. apply to
and are considered a part of Division 23 - Mechanical Work.
B.
Information in this division is intended to clarify or make additions to the requirements set forth
in the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division I of these specifications.
Any conflict between this Division 23 and other sections or divisions of the specifications or
drawings shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer in writing as a request for
addendum prior to the bid opening.
C.
Furnish all equipment, materials, articles, items, operations or methods listed, mentioned or
scheduled on drawings, these specifications, manufacturer's installation instructions and include
all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for their complete installation and
operation.
D.
All information contained in this section applies to all sections within Division 23 as if it was
part of each section.
1.2
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
The drawings and these specifications are intended to supplement each other and any material
or labor called for in one shall be furnished even if not specifically mentioned in both. Any
material or labor which is neither shown on the drawings nor listed in this specification, but is
normally incurred or required for completion of work shall be furnished. If there is a
discrepancy between the drawings and specifications, the more stringent of the two shall be
followed.
B.
Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show approximate location and general
arrangement of systems and equipment. No attempt has been made to show every ell, tee, etc.
Drawings shall not be scaled for location of systems, equipment, etc. All dimensions whether
given on drawings or scaled shall be verified in field and coordinated with all other trades and
existing field conditions. Some ductwork, piping, equipment, etc. locations may require
changes in location due to field conditions and coordination with other trades will be made with
no additional cost to the Owner. Failure to check will be no reason for additional compensation.
C.
These drawings and the associated specifications are intended to provide complete furnishing,
installation and operational HVAC systems as specified. If these drawings and associated
specifications have information omitted that would not allow a completely operational system as
is the intent of the Engineer, the bidder shall notify the Engineer a minimum one week prior to
the bid date to allow for addenda. Once bids have been received, the Contractor shall be
responsible for material, labor, etc., to furnish and install a completely operational mechanical
system as is the intent of these drawings and associated specification.
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-1
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
D.
The installation of all systems, equipment, etc., is subject to clarification with submitted shop
drawings and field coordination requirements. Equipment outlines shown on drawings or
dimensioned on drawings are limiting dimensions. Any equipment that reduces the indicated
clearances or exceeds specified or scheduled equipment dimensions shall not be used.
E.
The Architect/Engineer and Owner reserve the right to make minor changes in the location of
equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. at the time of rough-in without additional cost to the Owner.
F.
The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall have completed for his portion of work, at least one
installation of size and type comparable to this project and has been in satisfactory operation for
at least two complete years. The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall also have a developed
service department capable of negotiating service contracts with the Owner for systems herein
specified.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
AUTOCAD BACKGROUND FILES
The Contractor shall include in their bid any cost for requesting AutoCAD backgrounds for their
use from the Architect or Engineer. The cost will be $150.00 for the first plan, and $50.00 for
each additional plan that may be requested for AutoCAD use. A waiver of responsibility for the
Architect and Engineer related to Contractor use of the CAD files shall be signed by the
Contractor.
MANUFACTURER’S SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Some equipment, materials, etc. that are scheduled on the drawings or listed in any addenda may
not be specified in this specification. The manufacturer's specification and capacities shall be
considered included and part of this specification whether it is specified in this specification or
noted or scheduled on the drawings. The contractor shall remove and replace any "substituted"
equipment or material, that has been installed or is on site, which in the opinion of the
Architect/Engineer does not meet the scheduled equipment or materials manufacturer's capacities
or specification at no additional cost to the Owner.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-2
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
E.
1.6
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
LOCAL CONDITIONS
A.
Before submitting proposals, each contractor shall examine these specifications and associated
drawings, addenda, etc. and shall examine the site of the project. The bidder shall fully
investigate the site of this project, investigate coordination of his work with all other trades and
existing conditions and completely satisfy himself as to the conditions to which the work is to be
performed before submitting his/her bid. No allowances or considerations will be given at a later
date for alleged misunderstanding as to the requirements of the work, materials to be furnished,
or conditions required by the nature of this project site and coordination by the neglect on the
bidder's part to make such an examination and coordination.
B.
Drawings show approximate location of existing services. The mechanical and electrical trades
shall check with local utility companies or municipal agencies for exact location of services
which they expect to encounter. The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall be responsible for
hiring a company such as "Miss Dig" to stake out and locate all utilities in areas of excavation
before commencing any work. The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall verify all elevations and
locations of existing underground lines which are to be connected into or routed over or under.
This verification shall be done prior to beginning work at this project.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All work shall be performed in accordance with all local and state codes, laws and regulations
applicable to the work for this project. The contractor shall be responsible for all permits and
costs for inspections, etc., and for checking with each utility company supplying service to this
project and shall determine from them all, any changes in boxes, meters, valves, service, etc., and
shall include all cost for inspections, revisions to services, etc. in his bid as required by local
agencies, utilities, etc. No extra payment will be made for such items after the contractor
submits his bid.
B.
In addition to all applicable Federal, State and local codes, the standards and codes listed below
shall apply to all mechanical work. The reference to codes and standards shall be referenced to
the latest edition or revision.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Air Diffusion Council (ADC)
Air Moving and Conditioning Assoc., Inc. (AMCA)
American Boiler Manufacturer's Association (ABMA)
American Gas Association (AGA)
American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
American Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
American Society for Testing materials (ASTM)
American Welding Society
ANSI code of Pressure Piping and Unified Pressure Vessels
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-3
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
C.
1.8
Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manuf. (IBR)
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning contractors National Association (SMACNA)
Standards of the Hydraulic Institute
Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)
Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA)
In the event of conflict between drawings, codes, standards or specifications, the most stringent
requirement shall apply
SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Submit electronic sets of complete shop drawings for all mechanical equipment and materials
associated with Division 23 and associated drawings to the Architect/Engineer for review before
fabrication of work or ordering of equipment. Shop drawings shall be submitted at the earliest
possible time.
B.
Shop drawings shall be first reviewed by the contractor. Inaccurate shop drawings shall be
corrected by the contractor to meet specifications and schedules for this project. The contractor
shall then initial the shop drawings as having been reviewed before submitting to the
Architect/Engineer. Shop drawings shall have, in addition to the mechanical information, the
electrical requirements for minimum circuit amperes and maximum fuse size ratings of the
equipment.
C.
Drawings which are rejected must be corrected and returned for Architect/Engineer review
before ordering.
D.
Furnish to the job site copies or prints of shop drawings that have been reviewed by the Engineer
as soon as possible.
E.
Include a copy of each shop drawing in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
F.
The checking and reviewing of shop drawings by the Architect/Engineer shall be construed as
assisting the contractor and the Architect/Engineer's action does not relieve the contractor from
the responsibility for errors or omissions which may exist thereon. The contractor shall be held
responsible for errors or omissions that are discovered after approval process and must be made
good by the contractor.
G.
The Sheet Metal Contractor, etc. shall include in their bid any cost for requesting AutoCAD
backgrounds for their use from the Architect or Engineer at a minimum $100.00 for the first file,
and $50.00 for each additional file that may be requested for AutoCAD use.
1.9
A.
PERMITS, INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall take out all permits and arrange for necessary
inspections and shall pay all assessments, fees and costs, etc., and make all tests as required by
applicable codes. At the completion of the project, the Mechanical Trades Contractor shall
furnish certificates of inspection and approval and secure final occupancy permit. Record copies
shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance manuals.
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-4
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.10
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Maintain an up-to-date set of "record" drawings showing actual equipment, piping, duct, etc.
installation locations. Exact dimensions from column lines for all concealed work and tie-ins
with elevations noted shall be included.
B.
Include a set of reproducible drawings and a set of prints in each Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
C.
The Engineer reserves the right to request and be furnished any additional information he deems
necessary to be shown on the record drawings.
1.11
A.
1.12
OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS
Upon completion of the project, the contractor shall be responsible for instructing the Owner's
operating staff, in the presence of the Architect/Engineer's representative, in the proper operation
and maintenance of the mechanical systems and equipment. Include a statement signed by the
Owner that instructions have been given for proper operation and maintenance of the mechanical
systems and equipment.
GUARANTEES
A.
Furnish a written guarantee, to the Architect/Engineer, that will make the contractor responsible
at his own expense for any imperfections in material and/or workmanship which may develop
under ordinary use within a period of one (1) year from final Owner's acceptance of the work.
B.
Furnish all written guarantees from equipment and/or material manufacturers which shall include
the operating and performance conditions and capabilities upon which they are based.
C.
Permanent equipment that is used for temporary heat or cooling shall be guaranteed for one (1)
year from the date of final acceptance of the project.
1.13
A.
1.14
PORTABLE AND DETACHABLE PARTS
Retain all portable and detachable parts of installation such as keys, spare accessories, operating
manuals, etc. include in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Furnish to the Architect/Engineer two (2) copies of an approved bound (3 ring binder) book with
tabs for sections covering each item of equipment. These notebooks shall include shop drawings,
maintenance manuals, operating manuals and parts lists to instruct the Owner on proper
operation and use as well as maintenance for each piece of equipment. These books shall also include contractors’, subcontractors’ and manufacturers' names, telephone numbers and addresses.
B.
Manuals shall also include sequence of operation, control equipment literature, wiring and
control diagrams, certificates of guarantees, certificates of inspection, mechanical system test and
balancing reports. The contractor shall accumulate and summarize the control and maintenance
sequence in a typewritten sheet to be included in the report.
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-5
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
C.
1.15
The manuals must be approved by the Architect/Engineer before final payment to the contractor.
The Engineer reserves the right to request and be furnished any additional information that he
deems necessary to be included in the manuals.
RESPONSIBILITIES FOR USE OF SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS
A.
Contractor shall notify Architect/Engineer in writing at least ten (10) calendar days before bids
are due for approval to use materials and/or equipment other than that which has been specified
or scheduled. If substitute materials and/or equipment are approved and used, it will be this
contractor's responsibility to guarantee that the items will function as the specified equipment or
materials, will in no way alter the design of the structure or system, and will not require any
additional mechanical work such as piping, ductwork, etc. Any additional cost required by
substitute materials will be the responsibility of the contractor.
B.
It will be the contractor's responsibility, at his own expense, to remove or replace any nonapproved equipment or material or any approved equipment or materials not originally specified
or scheduled if equipment and materials do not meet with the satisfaction of the
Architect/Engineer.
C.
It shall be the Contractor’s (Mechanical Trades) responsibility to coordinate and pay for any
Electrical Contractor costs due to any changes in substitute materials and/or equipment’s power
requirements, which differ from that shown on the design documents.
D.
No consideration will be given to requests for substitute materials because of delivery problems
unless the contractor can prove that orders were placed as soon as possible after contract was
awarded and that delays were not caused by submittal of unscheduled or unspecified
(substituted) materials to the Architect/Engineer.
1.16
COST BREAKDOWN AND EQUIPMENT LIST
A.
The successful bidder shall be responsible for submitting a cost breakdown to the
Architect/Engineer and Owner within ten (10) calendar days after date of request of the
breakdown. During progress of the work, if changes occur which cause additional cost, the price
on such items shall be broken down in accordance with the items listed in the breakdown.
B.
The bidders shall be responsible for submitting a complete list of all equipment manufacturers,
makes, models, etc. that will be used for this project with their proposal. The equipment list
shall be typed on the contractors letterhead and shall be signed by the authorized officer.
1.17
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
Materials and equipment furnished under this project shall have a minimum warrantee of one (1)
year. All materials and equipment shall be new, of first class quality and shall be furnished,
delivered, erected, installed and finished in every detail and shall be so selected and arranged as
to fit into the building space. All material or equipment that is not specified but necessary for this
project shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
B.
Any materials or equipment not specified or scheduled but similar to that which has had prior
approval shall be listed as a substitution and noted on the proposal form as such.
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-6
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
C.
The contractor shall include all miscellaneous materials and labor required to completely install
and operate the mechanical systems as is intended by these drawings and specification.
1.18
TEMPORARY HEATING OR COOLING OF SPACE/BUILDING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A.
It is not recommended to use HVAC equipment being furnished for the project for temporary
heating and cooling of the space/building during construction. If it is necessary to utilize the
HVAC equipment for tempering air, filters shall be placed at face of each return diffuser or
grille. Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for removing temporary; filters at each return
diffuser, cleaning return air ductwork and installing new filters within the HVAC equipment
before space/building is turned over to the Owner.
1.19
A.
B.
SCHEDULE, COORDINATION AND INSTALLATION OF WORK
The contractor shall carry on work in such a manner as to meet the dates as scheduled by the
General Contractor and shall work overtime at no expense to the Owner as required to comply
with the schedule. This contractor shall schedule all work with Owner and Architect/Engineer
and schedule shut down of systems with Owner.
Examine the site and all drawings and specifications and coordinate work with all other trades
before commencing work for this project. Arrange work essentially as shown with the exact
layout to be made on the job to suit actual conditions. Precise locations of equipment and
materials shall be coordinated and shall be the responsibility of this contractor. Should any
conflicts in location occur, and necessary deviations from drawings are required as determined
by the Architect/Engineer, the contractor shall make necessary adjustments without additional
cost to the Owner. Any damage to HVAC equipment due to HVAC equipment operation during
construction shall be paid for by the Mechanical Contractor.
C.
All equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. shall be located and/or routed to allow for the most
convenient access for servicing.
D.
Arrange for necessary access doors, panels, etc. to allow servicing of equipment, piping, valves,
fire dampers, etc. Perform any cutting and patching as required, made necessary by failure to
make proper arrangements.
E.
Indicated equipment connections, sizes and locations shall be verified and connected according
to manufacturer's shop drawings and installation instructions. Thoroughly investigate the space
provided for equipment and connections before ordering equipment. All equipment shall be
selected to fit into the space allowed, including connections with adequate space allowed for
operation and maintenance.
F.
All work shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, using skilled personnel thoroughly
qualified in the trade or duties that they are to perform. Rough work will be rejected.
G.
Coordinate all equipment deliveries and schedules to allow timely installation. Contractor shall
separate equipment into sections and reassemble in building if required by the installation at no
extra cost to the Owner.
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-7
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
H.
Furnish a superintendent approved by the Architect/Engineer to oversee and coordinate the work
to be performed with all other trades.
I.
Coordinate location of pipes, ductwork, etc. with other building components such as structural
components (beams, joists, columns, etc.), electrical components (lighting, conduits, etc.) and
architectural components (walls, ceilings, floors, pipe chases, roof, etc.).
J.
Before starting work, Contractor shall verify that available space for proposed pipes, ducts,
equipment etc. is adequate for the intended purpose and will result in a first class installation.
Irregardless of drawings, responsibility for first class operating systems rests with the Contractor.
K.
Arrange for chases, slots, openings, etc. and other building components to allow for mechanical
systems installation. Coordinate cutting and patching of these components to accommodate
installation. This contractor shall be responsible for accurately locating for the general trades all
chases, shafts, etc. and shall be responsible for all cutting and patching if these chases were not
accurate or not coordinated in time with the general trades. Coordinate installation of all sleeves
in walls, on floors or other structural or architectural components.
L.
Sequence, coordinate and integrate installation of equipment and materials for efficient work
flow during the project. Particular attention should be spent on larger pieces of equipment.
M.
Install equipment and materials with provisions for necessary access for service and
maintenance. Allow space for removal of all parts that may require replacement or servicing.
N.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete
and other structural components as they are constructed.
O.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that
are concealed behind finished surfaces. When access panels are required, valves and equipment
components requiring access shall be located to minimize the number of panels.
P.
Examine the work as it progresses and alert the Architect/Engineer in writing of any instances or
obstructions that will prevent this contractor from performing his/her work.
1.20
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B.
Furnish and maintain a weatherproof storage facility on the site of adequate size to store
miscellaneous equipment and/or materials to prevent exposure to the weather. Location of shed
shall be determined by the Owner and Architect/Engineer. The Owner reserves the right to deny
storage of materials or equipment in any existing or new buildings.
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-8
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.21
COOPERATION WITH ARCHITECT/ENGINEER AND OTHERS
A.
Coordinate all aspects of the mechanical system installation with all other trades, existing
conditions, etc.
B.
If the bidder believes that changes in design are required to meet intended design capacities and
operation or material and/or equipment is obviously omitted from these specifications and
drawings, the bidder shall contact the Architect/Engineer in writing at least ten (10) days before
bid date. The acceptance of a bid by the Owner shall be binding and shall indicate that the
bidder does not require any changes in design nor additional costs in order to meet the design and
performance of the mechanical system as indicated in these specifications and drawings.
1.22
A.
1.23
WORK INVOLVING OTHER TRADES
Equipment or materials specified in Division 23 may have to be installed by other trades (such as
electrical trades or architectural trades) due to code requirements or union jurisdictional
requirements. Where this occurs, this contractor shall include all costs required by other trades
to complete the work and hire the respective trade to perform this work.
PERFORMANCE DATA AND ACCESSIBILITY
A.
All performance data specified in this specification or scheduled on drawings shall be considered
actual performance of the equipment after installation. The supplier and installer shall be
responsible for suitable allowances to adjust equipment to design capacities when actual
operating and installation conditions differ from drawings.
B.
All equipment and materials shall be installed to allow access for servicing and maintenance.
Coordinate final location of such equipment and materials that are concealed with required
access doors on panels. Allow ample space for replacement or servicing. Extend all grease
fittings to an accessible location.
1.24
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Unless noted otherwise, the Mechanical Trades shall be responsible for all cutting, patching and
associated work required under Division 23. This work shall be performed by trades normally
performing this type of work except drilling of holes shall be done by the contractor requiring
same. This includes replacing areas of cutting required by this work with proper reinforcing,
termite shielding, materials, finishing, etc. to restore the areas to their original condition, and
filling all openings around ducts, piping, etc. with approved fire retardant materials. Regardless,
all drilling of holes shall be the responsibility of the Contractor requiring same.
B.
If noted on drawings that the General Trades will be responsible for all cutting and patching, it
will be the Mechanical Trades responsibility to notify all General Trades during bidding of all
areas requiring cutting and patching. Regardless, all drilling of holes shall be the responsibility
of the contractor requiring same.
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-9
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.25
WORK IN EXISTING BUILDINGS
A.
Coordinate and schedule all work in existing building with Owner and Architect/Engineer.
Systems shall be kept in operation at all times if at all possible. If a system shut-down is
required, the contractor shall schedule with the Owner, the time and length of shut-down. A
system shall not be shut down without written permission from the Owner.
B.
All existing equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. that is to be removed shall remain the property of
the Owner. The contractor shall remove and locate this material that remains the property of the
Owner to a location determined by the Owner somewhere on site. If the Owner does not want to
maintain possession of the removed material, the contractor shall be responsible for removing
material from the site and disposing of this material as necessary to meet all codes and requirements and shall pay all costs as required for any disposal fees, inspections, permits, etc.
C.
All existing piping, equipment, etc. whether shown on drawings or not that is to be removed
and/or abandoned and does not remain property of the Owner shall be removed from site.
D.
Any existing piping, valves, mechanical equipment, etc. serving the existing building which are
shown or not shown on drawings and are required for systems operation shall remain in use. If
these systems require relocation to allow installation of new systems, the contractor shall be
responsible for relocating to an Owner and Architect/Engineer approved location. The contractor
shall pay all cost for this work and include such cost in his/her bid. (As specified previously,
contractor shall be responsible for examining site and include all cost for work required to
complete this project.)
E.
When active services, etc. are encountered in this project, the contractor shall furnish and install
bracing, support, etc. as required to protect and keep these services active. (As specified
previously, these drawings are diagrammatical. The contractor shall be responsible for
verification of all existing services, piping, equipment, etc.).
1.26
ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT, HEATING COILS, VALVES, ETC.
A.
Coordinate access panels with type of construction and furnish access panels in areas that are
non-accessible. Access panels shall be furnished by this contractor and installed by the General
Contractor. The access panels shall be all approved, UL labeled and fired rated and shall be
located and sized to allow access to equipment, heating coils, valves, fire dampers, etc.
B.
Where access panels are required, valves, equipment etc. shall be located as to require the least
number of access panels.
1.27
A.
1.28
A.
EQUIPMENT GUARDS
All rotating or moving parts of equipment that are located so as to be a hazard shall be fully
enclosed or properly guarded as to meet or exceed all regulations and OSHA requirements.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
Connections to equipment, plumbing fixtures, etc. shall be made in accordance with shop
drawings, rough-in dimensions furnished by the manufacturer, codes, etc. and may vary with
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-10
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
connections shown on drawings. The contractor shall be responsible for making connections and
number of connectors as per shop drawings, codes, etc. at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.29
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A.
The Electrical Trades shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all electrical equipment,
wiring, etc. required for operation of mechanical equipment unless otherwise noted on the
drawings. The Mechanical Trades shall furnish detailed information and wiring diagrams to the
Electrical Trades for all equipment specified and/or scheduled for this project. In the event that
the Mechanical Trades furnishes an "approved equal" or "alternate" that require changes in the
original electrical design, the Mechanical Trades shall pay all costs to the Electrical Trades as
required to make satisfactory adjustments. All electrical work shall be done in accordance with
the latest edition of the National Electric Code.
B.
See the temperature control or building automation system specification (if applicable) for
description of electrical contractor work and Division 23 temperature control work.
1.30
MOTORS, MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECTS
A.
Unless otherwise noted on drawings, motors shall be of constant speed 1750 rpm, new NEMA
Design B, 40ºC rise, horse power rated, open drip-proof except TEFC in dirty atmosphere,
induction type motor with service factor of 1.15 and be of sufficient capacity to continuously
operate the apparatus to which it is connected under all conditions of operation without
exceeding nameplate ratings.
B.
Motors shall be premium efficiency as calculated using IEEE test method 112B.
C.
Motors ½ Hp. or larger shall be three phase; motors under ½ Hp. shall be 115 volt, 60 cycle,
single phase. Before ordering the motors, the contractor shall verify correct motor voltage with
the Electrical Trades and field conditions.
D.
The Mechanical Trades shall furnish, for equipment under Division 23, all special switches,
disconnects, starters, alternators, etc. as specified or scheduled to be factory furnished and/or
factory installed with the equipment including wiring diagrams, etc. whether it is to be factory
installed or field wired. All other motor starters, disconnects, etc. not noted as factory furnished
shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Trades.
E.
Starters that are to be factory furnished with equipment shall be of the combination type and
shall be as specified under Electrical Trades Division. Furnish overload protection for each
phase.
F.
All wiring methods and materials shall meet NEMA, National Electric Code and State of
Michigan Code requirements.
G.
All displays on control panels shall be on face of the panels.
H.
Motors having V-belt shall be furnished with base slide rails or other form of adjustment.
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-11
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.31
A.
1.32
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
Contractor shall maintain, oil, lubricate, etc. all equipment furnished under Division 23 until
final acceptance by the Owner. Protect all bearings and shafts during installation and thoroughly
grease the steel shafts to prevent corrosion. The contractor shall be responsible for any and all
damage to bearings, shaft, etc. of Division 23 equipment operated or not until final acceptance by
the Owner.
BASES AND SUPPORTS
A.
This contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all equipment pads and supports for
equipment and materials required by Division 23 unless otherwise noted on drawings.
B.
All floor mounted mechanical equipment shall have a reinforced concrete pad furnished unless
otherwise noted on drawings. The concrete pads shall be tied to the building floor with
expansion bolts located maximum of 4’-0” on centers with a minimum of four (4) bolts, set
before pouring and concealed within the pad. The Mechanical Trades shall verify exact pad or
support size with the equipment manufacturer and shall size pad with adequate area to allow
sufficient room for installation of vibration isolators, equipment mounting hardware, etc.
Concrete pads shall have a 45 degree bevel at the top edge. The contractor shall verify exact
location of concrete pads.
C.
Furnish all steel, hanging material, rods, etc. for suspending equipment off floor unless otherwise
noted on drawings for equipment to be furnished under Division 23. This includes all structural
steel for supporting between beams.
D.
All support structure shall be of strength to safely withstand all stresses and loads to which they
will be subjected and shall distribute load properly over the building area. Supports shall be
designed to avoid undue strain to equipment and to avoid interference with piping, pipe
connections, service and maintenance clearances, etc.
E.
Where equipment is to be floor mounted and requires legs, this contractor shall furnish and
install structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings for legs. Fasten and brace to equipment
and furnish flange at base to allow bolting to floor.
F.
Where equipment is to be ceiling or wall mounted, furnish necessary platform, structural steel,
hardware, etc. as is most suitable for support of this equipment.
G.
All supports shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer.
H.
All piping, ductwork, etc. shall be suspended from structural steel members utilizing rods and
approved hanger devices. Do not use metal deck for support. Beam clamps such as the Grinnell
Fig. 260 or approved equal shall be used. Sheet metal “straps” shall not be used in place of rods.
I.
The mechanical trades shall be responsible for furnishing and setting in place all mechanical
equipment, roof curbs and piping/duct roof curbs. The general trade shall be responsible for the
roof work and associated flashing. The mechanical trade shall furnish and install treated wood
base blocking as required to level curb and to match roof insulation thickness. Curb shall be as
specified, or if not specified should be similar to Pate or Thy-curb with heavy gauge galvanized
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-12
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
steel, insulated and with wood nailer. Height of curb scheduled or specified shall be height
required to top of curb above finished roof. If height is not specified or noted, a minimum 12”
high above finished roof will be required. (pipe support units shall be at height required).
Rooftop units will be shipped knocked down with the mechanical trade responsible for assembly
on site. Roof curb shall mate with unit and provide support and a watertight installation.
1.33
SLEEVES, PLATES AND COLLARS
A.
Furnish all sleeves, plates and collars for piping, ductwork, etc. passing through walls, floor
ceilings, foundations, etc. Coordinate with the General Contractor the exact location and size of
required openings. No pipe or duct shall pass through a wall, floor ceiling, etc. without a sleeve.
This contractor shall be responsible for sleeve locations and securing sleeves before concrete is
formed.
B.
Sleeves for steel pipe shall be standard weight black steel pipe. For walls, foundations and
ceilings, sleeve shall be kept flush with finished surfaces. For floors, the sleeve shall be set flush
with bottom of concrete construction and be extended up ¼" above concrete floor. Sleeves shall
be set in place before construction of walls, floors, ceilings, etc.
C.
Sleeves for copper pipe shall be type "M" hard copper tubing installed typical to that of steel pipe
sleeves.
D.
Sleeves for piping shall be sized to allow insulation to run continuous through sleeve whenever
possible and to allow not less than ¼" all around bare pipe or insulation.
E.
Sleeves for ducts passing through floors shall be 14 gauge black steel for ducts up to 24"
maximum dimension, and 12 gauge black steel for ducts 25" and over maximum dimension.
Sleeves shall be kept flush with the finished wall surface.
F.
Where insulated piping passes through walls or floor sleeves, furnish 22 gauge galvanized band
around insulation of same length as the sleeve length. Band shall fit snugly over insulation and
be held in place by steel metal collars all around insulation to cover openings.
G.
All penetration voids shall be sealed smoke tight with non-combustible materials similar to 3M
or Hilti firestop systems to maintain the integrity of the fire rated structure. In a non-fire rated
assembly, seal all voids with non-hardening sealant.
H.
Where bare piping 2" and smaller pass through wall or floors, furnish polished chrome plated
brass escutcheons, split type. Bare piping 2½" and larger that pass through walls or floor, furnish
22 gauge galvanized steel metal collars so as to cover opening.
I.
Where piping penetrates an outside wall, below grade, utilize a mechanical sleeve, similar to
link-seal, with stainless steel nuts and bolts on fasteners.
1.34
A.
RIGGING AND HOISTING
Perform all required rigging, hoisting, transportation, moving, etc. of all equipment, materials,
etc. to be furnished and/or installed under Division 23 whether furnished by this contractor or by
the Owner or other trades.
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-13
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.35
A.
1.36
STORAGE FACILITY
Furnish and maintain a weatherproof storage facility on the site of adequate size to store
miscellaneous equipment and/or materials to prevent exposure to the weather. Location of shed
shall be determined by the Owner and Architect/Engineer. The Owner reserves the right to deny
storage of materials or equipment in any existing or new buildings.
PROTECTION FROM DAMAGE
A.
The contractor shall be responsible for all materials, equipment, etc. and all work installed by
himself and shall protect it from damage until final acceptance of this project by the Owner.
B.
Furnish all coverings and protection from dirt, dust, rain, storm, heat, traffic, wear, etc. and all
possible injury including that by other workmen. Any equipment, workmanship, materials, etc.
damaged prior to final acceptance by the Owner of this project shall be properly repaired at no
expense to the Owner.
C.
Protect all plumbing fixtures and other equipment from damage by covering or coating. Any
dented, scratched, rusted or marred surface finishes will not be accepted.
D.
Protect all equipment, materials, etc. from freezing.
1.37
COMMON PIPE MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
C.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:
system contents.
Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
a. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness
unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
1. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
2. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according
to ASTM B 813.
5. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant
piping, unless otherwise indicated.
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-14
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
6. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
7. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
a. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
b. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
c. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
d. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
8. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
1.38
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hangers and saddles shall be Modern Pipe Support Corp., Grinnel/Anvil, Autogrip, or M-CO.
Inserts shall be of the type to receive a machine bolt head or nut after installation, permit
horizontal adjustment, and shall be flush with the surface. For copper pipe with steel hangers,
clean and wrap pipe with two layers of plastic insulating tape at point of contact. Roller supports
shall be adjustable type with insulated standoff. Rods shall be used for suspended installation.
Sheet metal “straps” shall not be used in place of rods.
B.
Hangers for piping with vapor barrier sealed insulation shall be multipurpose pipe saddles fitting
over the insulation. Wire or perforated strap iron will not be permitted for pipe supports. Do not
support hangers from roof deck. Furnish and install all support steel as required to suspend from
structural steel joist or beams. Hangers shall be clevis or split ring type with vertical adjustment
and beam clamp similar to Grinnell/Anvil Fig. 260, with maximum spacing per ASHRAE
Standards:
C.
Pipe Size
Steel Pipe
Copper Pipe
PVC Pipe
Rod Size
½ to ¾ inch
1 inch
1 ¼ inch
1½ inch
2 inch
2½ inch
3 inch
3 ½ inch
4 inch
5 inch
6 inch
8 inch
10 inch
12 inch
14 inch
16 inch
18 inch
6 feet
7 feet
7 feet
7 feet
10 feet
11 feet
11 feet
13 feet
14 feet
14 feet
14 feet
16 feet
16 feet
20 feet
20 feet
20 feet
20 feet
5 feet
5 feet
7 feet
7 feet
8 feet
9 feet
9 feet
11 feet
12 feet
12 feet
--------
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
4 feet
3/8”
3/8”
3/8”
1/2”
1/2"
5/8”
5/8”
5/8”
3/4”
3/4"
3/4"
7/8“
7/8”
1”
1¼”
1¼”
1¼”
Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69 and MSS SP89.
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-15
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
D.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes ½ to 1½ Inch : Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
E.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
F.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes thru 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
G.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 5 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double
hanger.
H.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
I.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Steel channels with welded
spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.
J.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes up thru 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
K.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
L.
Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.
M.
Vertical Support: Steel riser unistrut clamps at high, mid, and low locations.
N.
Floor Support for Cold Pipe all sizes and Hot Pipe Sizes up thru 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable
pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
O.
Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 5 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel
screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
P.
Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
Q.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
R.
Inserts: Malleable iron case of steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral
adjustments, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms, size inserts to suit threaded
hanger rods.
1.39
A.
PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORT
Attachments of mechanical equipment to structural members are the responsibility of the
installing trade. Structural members shall not be field cut, welded or otherwise modified without
approval of the Architect/Engineer. Attachment to steel joist shall be made at panel points.
When routing piping or ductwork perpendicular to joist, a support shall be provided at every
steel joist; when parallel to joist, a support shall be provided at no more than 6’ on centers or two
panel bays. Structural members shall not be overloaded as a result of attachments.
Attachment/equipment loading for all trades resulting in total load greater than an equivalent
uniform 5 psf for any member shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review.
Mechanical Trades may contact the project Structural Engineer as required for panel point
location assistance and welder certification requirements. Electrical Trades are still responsible
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-16
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
for design, layout, and fabrication and installation of electrical supports and support attachment
methods. Mechanical Trades shall submit attachment methods to the Structural Engineer for
review.
B.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.
D.
Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.
E.
Do not use powder-actuated anchors.
F.
Do not drill or cut structural members without permission from Architect/Engineer.
G.
Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon
head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock
washers under all nuts.
1.40
A.
1.41
PIPING SYSTEMS SHUT OFF VALVES
Shut off valves shall be installed at all branch lines off main piping, or where mains
divide/separate to serve different areas, to allow isolation of all branch piping and systems they
serve such as air handling units, areas or wings of the building, etc.
CLEANING AND FINISHING
A.
During construction period, remove all debris, rubbish, tools, equipment, unused materials, etc.
as required or requested by the Architect/Engineer. All cost for cleanup and removal will be the
responsibility of the contractor.
B.
Upon completion of the project and before final acceptance by the Owner, the entire installation
shall be thoroughly cleaned, all rubbish and unused material removed to the satisfaction of the
Architect/Engineer. All dust and dirt shall be removed from all equipment, piping, ductwork,
etc.
C.
Thoroughly clean all heating units, fans and fan wheels, diffusers and grilles, air handler plenums
and air filter frames, etc. using compressed air if necessary.
D.
Finish paint all equipment, materials, piping, etc. as noted on drawings or listed in this
specification. Match Owner's existing color scheme. Any Division 23 equipment which has
been scratched or damaged shall be finished equal to the original finish.
1.42
A.
EQUIPMENT/SYSTEMS START-UP
Furnish and schedule manufacturer’s start-up service for all equipment and systems. These startup services shall be performed in the presence of, and to the satisfaction of the Owner and
Architect/Engineer.
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-17
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.43
A.
1.44
A.
EQUIPMENT/SYSTEMS SIGN-OFF
The Mechanical Trades shall furnish written sign-offs on all systems stating that the equipment
and systems have been checked, tested, started and that their operation has been verified correct
through the entire range of operation that can be expected through the seasons.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Contractor shall submit a letter to the Architect/Engineer advising that all work has been
completed in accordance with plans and specifications and the project is ready for a final walkthru.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #_________
HVAC Requirements
23 05 00-18
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 23 05 53
HVAC IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Nameplates.
B.
Tags.
C.
Stencils.
D.
Pipe Markers.
1.2
A.
REFERENCES: Material and/or equipment specified in this section shall meet or exceed one or
more of the property requirements or installation requirements of the following
specifications/publications as applicable to the specific product or end use:
ANSI or equal standards for the Identification of Piping Systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
NAMEPLATES
Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color. Furnish and install on all mechanical equipment.
TAGS
A.
Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1½ inch diameter with smooth edges.
B.
Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.
2.3
A.
STENCILS
Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1.
¾ to 1¼ inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, ½ inch
high letters.
2.
1½ to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, ¾ inch high
letters.
3.
2½ to 6 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch long color field, 1¼ inch
high letters.
4.
8 to 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 24 inch long color field, 2½ inch
high letters.
5.
Over 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 32 inch long color field, 3½ inch
high letters.
6.
Ductwork and Equipment: 2½ inch high letters.
Work Order #___________
HVAC Identification
23 05 53-1
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
B.
2.4
Stencil Paint shall be semi-gloss enamel, colors conforming to ASME A13.1.
PIPE MARKERS
A.
Color: Match existing or conform to ANSI/OSHA standards.
B.
Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around
pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of
fluid being conveyed.
C.
Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and
printed markings.
D.
Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape,
minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
2.5
CEILING TACKS
A.
Description: Steel with ¾ inch diameter color coded head.
B.
Color code as follows:
1.
Yellow - HVAC equipment
2.
Red
- Fire dampers/smoke dampers
3.
Green
- Plumbing valves
4.
Blue
- Heating/cooling valves
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B.
Prepare surfaces as required by manufacturer's installations for stencil painting.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with
sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B.
Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C.
Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
E.
Identify each piece of equipment with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps,
may be identified with tags.
F.
Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.
Work Order #___________
HVAC Identification
23 05 53-2
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
G.
Identify thermostats relating to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.
H.
Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
I.
Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.
J.
Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers or stenciled painting.
Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
Locate identification not to exceed 10 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to
each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
K.
Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in
corner of panel closest to equipment.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #___________
HVAC Identification
23 05 53-3
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 23 07 19
HVAC PIPE SYSTEM INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES PIPE INSULATION FOR:
A.
Refrigerant piping system.
B.
Cooling coil drain piping inside the building.
C.
Outdoor piping.
D.
Valves and fittings.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
All drawings and specification sections apply to work in this section. Furnish all items, articles,
materials, equipment, operations or methods that are mentioned, listed or scheduled on drawings
or are in this specification, including all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous
incidentals necessary and/or required for the completion of this project. The work covered under
this section of the specifications is in no way complete within itself, but is supplementary to the
entire specification and drawings.
REFERENCES
A.
Thermal insulation materials shall meet the property requirements of the following specifications
as applicable to the specific product or end use:
B.
American Society for Testing of Materials Specifications:
1.
ASTM C547, "Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation"
2.
ASTM C533, "Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Pipe & Block Insulation"
3.
ASTM C585, "Recommended Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Pipe
Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System)"
4.
ASTM C1136, "Standard Specification for Barrier Material, Vapor," Type 1 or 2 (jacket
only)
C.
Insulation materials, including all water and vapor barrier materials, closures, hangers, supports,
fitting covers, and other accessories, shall be furnished and installed in strict accordance with
project drawings, plans, and specifications.
1.4
A.
SCOPE
The work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials and
accessories, and performing all operations required, for the correct fabrication and installation of
thermal insulation applied to the following commercial piping systems, in accordance with the
applicable project specifications and drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the
contract:
1.
Hot Piping – Fluid temperature 105°F and up.
Work Order #___________
HVAC Pipe System Insulation
23 07 19-1
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
2.
B.
1.5
A.
1.6
Cold Piping – Fluid temperature below 105°F.
Insulation, vapor barriers, jacketing, hangers, supports, accessory materials, etc. shall be installed
according to manufacturers recommendations.
DEFINITIONS
The term "mineral fiber" as defined by the above specifications includes fibers manufactured of
glass, rock, or slag processed from a molten state, with or without binder.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A.
Insulation material furnished and installed hereunder shall meet the minimum thickness
requirements of Standard 90.1 (2007), "Energy Efficient Design of new Buildings" of the
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) except
minimum thickness shall be 1". However, if other factors such as condensation control or
personnel protection are to be considered, the selection of the thickness of insulation should
satisfy the controlling factor.
B.
Insulation materials furnished and installed hereunder shall be Class A maximum of 25 flame
spread, 35 fuel contributed and 50 smoke developed rating and shall meet the fire hazard
requirements of each of the following specifications:
1.
American Society for Testing of Materials
ASTM E84
2.
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
UL 723
3.
National Fire Protection Associations
NFPA 255
C.
Calcium silicate products shall include a visual identification system to permit positive field
determination of their asbestos-free characteristic.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The contractor shall use whatever means are necessary to protect the insulation materials and
accessories before, during and after installation. No insulation material shall be installed that has
become damaged in any way. The contractor shall also use all means necessary to protect work
and materials installed by other trades.
B.
If any insulation material has become wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture or
water, the contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site. An
exception may be allowed in cases where the contractor is able to demonstrate that wet insulation
when fully dried out (either before installation, or afterward following exposure to system
operating temperatures) will provide installed performance that is equivalent in all respects to
new, completely dry insulation. In such cases, consult the insulation manufacturer for technical
assistance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PIPE INSULATION ON OUTDOOR SYSTEMS
Piping located outdoors, with installation temperature above 40°F, shall be insulated and covered
with a weatherproof metal jacket as per the following:
Work Order #___________
HVAC Pipe System Insulation
23 07 19-2
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
2.2
1.
Insulate outdoor piping with closed-cell, fiber-free elastomeric foam equal to Armaflex
type AP insulation. Insulation shall be flexible elastomeric thermal insulation, black in
color, flame-spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less as
tested by ASTM E84-91A "Method of Test Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials." Thickness shall be as listed.
2.
Fitting covers shall be fabricated from miter-cut sections. In all cases, butt joints and
seams shall be sealed with Armstrong 520 adhesive. 520 adhesive is a contact adhesive;
therefore, in all cases, both surfaces to be joined are to be coated with adhesive with
installation temperature above 40°F.
3.
On outdoor cold pipes, the insulation system shall be completely vapor sealed before the
weather-resistant jacket is applied. The outer jacket shall not compromise the vapor
barrier by penetration of fasteners, etc.
4.
Jacketing shall be a multi-ply, fabric reinforced, self adhesive insulation cladding
material with a vapor barrier and a thickness of 0.015”. Jacketing system shall be
Venture Clad Plus #1579CW-E or equal with moisture barrier, installed in accordance
with the jacket manufacturer's recommendations. Each section of jacketing shall overlap
the adjoining section by 3”. All seams shall be taped with Venture Clad joining/seaming
tape.
REFRIGERANT PIPING AND
TEMPERATURE ABOVE 40°F
COOLING
COIL
DRAIN
WITH
INSTALLATION
A.
Insulate piping with ¾” closed-cell, fiber-free elastomeric foam equal to Armaflex type AP
insulation. Insulation shall be flexible elastomeric thermal insulation, black in color, flamespread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less as tested by ASTM E8491A "Method of Test Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials".
B.
Fitting elbow covers shall be fabricated from miter-cut tabular form. In all cases, butt joints and
seams are to be sealed with Armstrong 520 adhesive. 520 adhesive is a contact adhesive;
therefore, in all cases, both surfaces to be joined are to be coated with adhesive with installation
temperature above 40°F.
C.
Where piping is located outdoors, cover Armaflex insulation with jacketing as described under
Part 2.1 Pipe Insulation on Outdoor Systems.
2.3
A.
SUPPORT FOR PIPE WITH INSULATION
All piping shall be supported in such a manner that neither the insulation or the vapor/weather
barrier is compromised by the hanger or the effects of the hanger. In all cases, hanger spacing
shall be such that butt joints may be made outside the hanger.
1.
On all size piping of cold systems, the pipe hanger saddles shall be separated away from
the pipe by utilizing inserts. The vapor barrier shall be continuous, including material
covered by the hanger saddle.
Work Order #___________
HVAC Pipe System Insulation
23 07 19-3
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
2.4
A.
B.
2.5
2.
On warm water piping systems 3" in diameter or less, insulated with Fiberglas insulation,
may be supported by placing saddles of the proper length and spacing, as designated in
Owens-Corning Pub. 1-IN-12534, under the insulation.
3.
For hot or cold piping systems larger than 3" in diameter, Owens-Corning Calcium
Silicate pipe insulation shall be used for high density inserts. Piping saddles for piping
larger than 3” shall not be in contact with the piping.
4.
Owens-Corning Calcium Silicate pipe insulation may be used to support the entire
weight of the piping system provided the hanger saddle is designed so the maximum
compressive load does not exceed 100 psi.
5.
Where pipe shoes and roller supports are required, insulation shall be inserted in the pipe
shoe to minimize pipe heat loss. Where possible, the pipe shoe shall be sized to be flush
with the outer pipe insulation diameter.
6.
Thermal expansion and contraction of the piping and insulation system can generally be
taken care of by utilizing double layers of insulation and staggering both longitudinal and
circumferential joints. Where long runs are encountered, expansion joints may be
required where single layers of the insulation are being used.
7.
On vertical runs, insulation support rings shall be used.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
Accessory materials installed as part of insulation work under this section shall include (but not
be limited to):
1.
Closure Materials - Butt strips, bands, wires, staples, mastics, adhesives; pressuresensitive tapes.
2.
Field-applied jacketing materials - Sheet metal, plastic, canvas, fiberglass cloth,
insulating cement; PVC fitting covers.
3.
Support materials - Hanger straps, hanger rods, saddles.
All accessory materials shall be installed in accordance with project drawings and specifications,
manufacturer's instructions, and/or in conformance with the current edition of the Midwest
Insulation Contractors Association (MICA) "Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards".
INSULATION THICKNESSES
A.
Fittings, including valves, flanges, unions, etc. shall be insulated with the same thickness as the
required pipe insulation and covered with PVC fitting cover as specified.
B.
Fiberglass insulation thickness shall be as follows:
Work Order #___________
HVAC Pipe System Insulation
23 07 19-4
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
Piping System
Refrigerant piping
(Armaflex insulation)
C.
Pipe Size
Insulation Thickness
up to 1¼”
1 ½” and larger
¾”
1”
Insulation
Conductivity
BTU in
H-Ft2-F
0.28
Elastomeric thermal insulation thickness shall be equivalent to fiberglass insulation thickness as
indicated above or as indicated on drawing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SITE INSPECTION
A.
Before starting work under this section, carefully inspect the site and installed work of other
trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where installation of materials and
accessories under this section can begin.
B.
Verify that all materials and accessories can be installed in accordance with project drawings and
specifications and material manufacturers' recommendations.
C.
Verify by inspecting product labeling, submittal data, and/or certifications which may
accompany the shipments that all materials and accessories to be installed on the project may
comply with applicable specifications and standards and meet specified thermal and physical
properties.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Ensure that all pipe and fitting surfaces over which insulation is to be installed are clean and dry.
B.
Ensure that insulation is clean, dry, and in good mechanical condition with all factory-applied
vapor or weather barriers intact and undamaged. Wet, dirty, or damaged insulation shall not be
acceptable for installation. All damaged insulation installed will be removed and replaced by the
Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner.
C.
Ensure that pressure testing of piping and fittings has been completed prior to installing
insulation.
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION
General
1.
Install all insulation materials and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
published instructions and recognized industry practices to ensure that it will serve its
intended purpose.
Work Order #___________
HVAC Pipe System Insulation
23 07 19-5
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
B.
2.
Install insulation on piping subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing,
and acceptance tests.
3.
Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run
of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do
not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. Butt insulation joints firmly to ensure
complete, tight fit overall piping surfaces.
4.
Maintain the integrity of factory-applied vapor barrier jacketing on all pipe insulation,
protecting it against puncture, tears or other damage. All staples used on cold pipe
insulation shall be coated with suitable sealant to maintain vapor barrier integrity.
Fittings
1.
Cover valves, fittings, and similar items in each piping system using one of the
following:
a.
Mitered sections of insulation equivalent in thickness and composition to that
installed on straight pipe runs.
b.
Insulation cement equal in thickness to the adjoining insulation.
c.
PVC fitting covers insulated with material equal in thickness and composition to
adjoining insulation.
C.
Penetrations
1.
Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar piping
penetrations, except where otherwise specified.
D.
Joints
1.
Butt pipe insulation against hanger inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier
tape or band over butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement
on butt joints, and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band.
2.
All pipe insulation ends shall be tapered and sealed, regardless of service.
3.4
A.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
Upon completion of all insulation work covered by this specification, visually inspect the work
and verify that it has been correctly installed. This may be done while work is in progress, to
assure compliance with requirements herein to cover and protect insulation materials during
installation.
PROTECTION
A.
Replace damaged insulation which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, including insulation with
vapor barrier damage and moisture-saturated insulation.
B.
The insulation contractor shall advise the general and/or the mechanical contractor as to
requirements for protection of the insulation work during the remainder of the construction
period, to avoid damage and deterioration of the finished insulation work.
Work Order #___________
HVAC Pipe System Insulation
23 07 19-6
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
3.6
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A.
Insulation contractor's employees shall be properly protected during installation of all insulation.
Protection shall include proper attire when handling and applying insulation materials, and shall
include (but not be limited to) disposable dust respirators, gloves, hard hats, and eye protection.
B.
The insulation contractor shall conduct all job site operations in compliance with applicable
provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act, as well as with all state and/or local safety
and health codes and regulations that may apply to the work.
3.7
A.
ASBESTOS INSULATION
Any existing asbestos insulation on existing piping, valves, equipment, etc. where tie-ins are
required, shall be removed by the Owner at Owner's expense. The contractor and
Architect/Engineer shall not be responsible for any cost or work involved with removal or
encapsulation of asbestos insulation.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #___________
HVAC Pipe System Insulation
23 07 19-7
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Piping.
B.
Refrigerant.
C.
Moisture and liquid indicators.
D.
Valves.
E.
Strainers.
F.
Check valves.
G.
Pressure relief valves.
H.
Filter-dryers.
I.
Solenoid valves.
J.
Expansion valves.
K.
Receivers.
L.
Flexible connections.
M.
Air cooled condensing unit.
1.2
REFERENCES: Material and/or equipment specified in this section shall meet or exceed one or
more of the property requirements or installation requirements of the following
specifications/publications as applicable to the specific product or end use:
A.
ARI 495 - Refrigerant Liquid Receivers.
B.
ARI 710 - Liquid Line Dryers.
C.
ARI 730 - Flow-Capacity Rating and Application of Suction-Line Filters and Filter-Dryers
D.
ARI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves.
E.
ARI 760 - Solenoid Valves for Use With Volatile Refrigerants.
F.
ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
Work Order #_________
Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
23 23 00-1
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
G.
ASHRAE 34 - Number Designation of Refrigerants.
H.
ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 9 - Qualification Standard for Welding and
Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators.
I.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
J.
ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes.
K.
ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.
L.
ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
M.
ASME SEC 8D - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code, Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels.
N.
ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
O.
ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated
Temperatures.
P.
ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
Q.
ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.
R.
ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
S.
AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.
T.
AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code, Steel.
U.
MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
V.
MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
W.
MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
X.
UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING
A.
Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn; Type K.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.
2.
Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190
to 1480 degrees F.
B.
Copper Tubing to 7/8 inch OD: ASTM B88, Type K, annealed.
1.
Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast copper.
2.
Joints: Flared.
Work Order #_________
Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
23 23 00-2
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
C.
2.2
A.
Pipe Supports and Anchors:
1.
Conform to ASME B31.5, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69 and MSS SP89.
2.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes ½ to 1½ Inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
3.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
5.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
6.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.
7.
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
8.
Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and
concrete pier or steel support.
9.
Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
10.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
11.
Inserts: Malleable iron case of steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with
lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts
to suit threaded hanger rods.
REFRIGERANT
Refrigerant: ASHRAE 34;
1.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS
Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sight
glass, color coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap; for
maximum working pressure of 500 psig, and maximum temperature of 200 degrees F.
VALVES
Diaphragm Packless Valves:
1.
B.
UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and
stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring, nylon seat
disc, solder or flared ends, with positive backseating; for maximum working pressure of
500 psig and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F.
Packed Angle Valves:
1.
C.
See equipment schedules on drawings for type of refrigerant. Refrigerant shall be in
accordance with all codes and regulations.
Forged brass, forged brass seal caps with copper gasket, rising stem and seat with
backseating, molded stem packing, solder or flared ends; for maximum working pressure
of 500 psig and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F.
Ball Valves:
Work Order #_________
Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
23 23 00-3
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.
D.
Service Valves:
1.
2.5
A.
Straight Line or Angle Line Type:
A.
Globe Type:
A.
2.8
A.
2.9
A.
Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass guide and
disc holder, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon seat disc; for maximum
working pressure of 425 psig and maximum temperature of 300 degrees F.
Straight Through Type:
1.
2.7
Steel shell, copper plated fittings, stainless steel wire screen.
CHECK VALVES
1.
B.
Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of
stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass; for maximum working pressure of
430 psig.
Straight Line, Non-Cleanable Type:
1.
2.6
Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball
check valve, flared or solder ends, for maximum pressure of 500 psig.
STRAINERS
1.
B.
Two piece forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions, brass
bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals; for
maximum working pressure of 500 psig and maximum temperature of 300 degrees F.
Brass body and disc, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, neoprene seat; for
maximum working pressure of 500 psig and maximum temperature of 250 degrees F.
PRESSURE REGULATORS
Brass body, stainless steel diaphragm, pilot operated with remote pressure pilot, adjustable over
0 to 80 psig range, for maximum working pressure of 450 psig.
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
Straight Through or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and stamped
with ASME UV and National Board Certification NB for standard 235 setting; selected to
ASHRAE 15.
FILTER-DRIERS
Replaceable Cartridge Angle Type:
1.
Shell: ARI 710, UL listed, brass, removable cap, for maximum working pressure of 350
psig, verify outside diameter size connections.
Work Order #_________
Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
23 23 00-4
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.10
Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless steel support, filter area
with ARI 730 rating for scheduled tons.
Filter/Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid core sieve with activated alumina, filter
area with ARI 730 rating for scheduled tons.
Wax Removal Cartridge: Molded bonded core of activated charcoal with integral
gaskets, filter surface area, desiccant with ARI 710 moisture rating as required.
Permanent Straight Through Type:
1.
ARI 710, UL listed, steel shell with molded desiccant filter core, for maximum working
pressure of 350 psig.
2.
Rating: ARI 710 moisture rating, and ARI 710 flow capacity.
SOLENOID VALVES
A.
Valve: ARI 760, pilot operated, copper or brass body and internal parts, synthetic seat, stainless
steel stem and plunger assembly, integral strainer, with flared, solder, or threaded ends; for
maximum working pressure of 500 psig. Stem
B.
Coil Assembly: UL listed, replaceable with molded electromagnetic coil, moisture and fungus
proof, with surge protector and color coded lead wires, integral junction box with pilot light.
2.11
EXPANSION VALVES
A.
Angle or Straight Through Type: ARI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body, internal or
external equalizer, mechanical pressure limit (maximum operating pressure MOP feature),
adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet strainer, with replaceable capillary tube and remote
sensing bulb and remote bulb well.
B.
Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available pressure
drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 10
degrees F superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load and excessively oversized at
part load.
2.12
ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVES
A.
Valve:
1.
Brass body with flared or solder connection, needle valve with floating needle and
machined seat, stepper motor drive.
2.
Verify voltage and capacity.
B.
Evaporation Control System:
1.
Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case, proportional integral control with
adaptive superheat, maximum operating pressure function, preselection allowance for
electrical defrost and hot gas bypass.
2.
Electrical Characteristics: Verify.
C.
Refrigeration System Control: Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case, with
proportional integral control of valve, on/off thermostat, air temperature alarm (high and low),
solenoid valve control, liquid injection adaptive superheat control, maximum operating pressure
function, night setback thermostat, timer for defrost control.
Work Order #_________
Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
23 23 00-5
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
2.13
A.
RECEIVERS
Internal Diameter 6 inch and Smaller:
1.
B.
2.14
A.
2.15
A.
ARI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed; 400 psig maximum pressure rating, with tappings for
inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.
Internal Diameter Over 6 inch:
1.
ARI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME SEC 8D; 400 psig
with tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and magnetic liquid
level indicator.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding, minimum 9
inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure 500 psig.
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT
Refer to Schedule on Drawings and furnish all.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B.
Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.2
INSTALLATION AND DESCRIPTION
A.
Install refrigeration piping and specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The
Mechanical Trade shall verify the actual installation requirements and coordinate with the air
cooled condensing unit manufacturer all pipe sizes, valves and controls, required for proper
operation of the air cooled condensing unit system.
B.
Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain
gradient.
C.
Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.
D.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one percent
in direction of oil return.
E.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.
F.
Inserts:
Work Order #_________
Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
23 23 00-6
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.
Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4
inches.
Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide throughbolt with recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.
G.
Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
Install in accordance with ASTM B31.5, ASTM F708 and MSS SP89.
2.
Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
3.
Install hangers to provide minimum ½ inch space between finished covering and adjacent
work.
4.
Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
5.
Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected
horizontal piping.
6.
Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple
or trapeze hangers.
7.
Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
H.
Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide
double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.
I.
Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
J.
Provide access to concealed valves and fittings. Coordinate size and location of access doors.
K.
Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing.
L.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean, and apply one
coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
M.
Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.
N.
Insulate piping.
O.
Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of
refrigerant.
P.
Provide replaceable cartridge filter-dryers, with isolation valves and valved bypass.
Q.
Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line.
R.
Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to
evaporator.
S.
Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor, parallel to
crankshaft.
Work Order #_________
Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
23 23 00-7
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
T.
Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.
U.
Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves.
V.
Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system components are
compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary
joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
W.
Liquid Indicators:
1.
2.
3.
X.
Use line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser.
If receiver is provided, install in liquid line leaving receiver.
Use line size on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
Valves
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use service valves on suction and discharge of compressors.
Use gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet.
Use gage taps at hot gas bypass regulators, inlet and outlet.
Use check valves on compressor discharge.
Use check valves on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser systems.
Y.
Refrigerant Charging (Packed Angle) Valve: Use in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve
and expansion valve.
Z.
Strainers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve.
Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used, use single main liquid
line strainer.
On steel piping systems, use strainer in suction line.
Use shut-off valve on each side of strainer.
AA.
Pressure Relief Valves: Use on ASME receivers and pipe to outdoors.
BB.
Permanent Filter-Dryers:
1.
2.
3.
CC.
Replaceable Cartridge Filter-Dryers:
1.
2.
DD.
Use in low temperature systems.
Use in systems utilizing hermetic compressors.
Use filter-dryers for each solenoid valve.
Use vertically in liquid line adjacent to receivers.
Use filter-dryers for each solenoid valve.
Solenoid Valves:
1.
Use in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-down compressor
control.
Work Order #_________
Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
23 23 00-8
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
2.
3.
EE.
Receivers:
1.
2.
FF.
3.3
Use in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems.
Use in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into
the suction line when system shuts down.
Use on systems 5 tons and larger, sized to accommodate pump down charge.
Use on systems with long piping runs.
Flexible Connectors: Utilize at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb
vibration.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection and testing will be performed.
B.
Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.
C.
Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and
200 psig using halide torch. Test to no leakage.
D.
The Mechanical Trade shall verify all installation instructions with the air cooling condensing
unit manufacturer and shall furnish and install all devices, refrigerant, etc. necessary for proper
operation of the systems.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #_________
Refrigerant Piping and Specialties
23 23 00-9
SECTION 23 25 00
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.2
C.
B.
A.
1.1
Conform to applicable code for addition of non-potable chemicals to building mechanical
systems, and for public sewage systems.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Substantial completion check list and sign-off forms.
Cleaning of piping systems.
Testing of piping systems.
SECTION INCLUDES
HVAC SYSTEMS TESTING, CLEANING AND STARTUP
A.
PART 1 - GENERAL
B.
Products requiring electrical connection and listed and classified by UL as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS – Not Used
3.1
The checklist which follows this specification section is to be considered part of the
specifications.
SYSTEM COMPLETION CHECKLIST
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
The checklist is to be completed by the Installing Contractor and the prime Mechanical
Contractor for each item as directed.
HVAC Systems Testing, Cleaning, and Startup
23 25 00 - 1
END OF SECTION
B.
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #________
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SYSTEMS COMPLETION
CHECKLIST
Inspection/Review Item
Notice
Required
Installing Contractor
Name
Date Owner’s Representative Remarks
Signature
Signature
HVAC Piping Systems
Flushing and testing of
refrigerant piping system
48 hours
Flushed and tested per specification.
Valving
When
completed
Verify that all valves have been installed.
Pipe and Fitting Insulation
When
Completed
When
completed
Verify all piping and fittings are insulated per
specification.
Verify system identification is complete per
specification.
When
completed
Verify that Owner has been instructed on
operation and maintenance of systems.
Labeling and valve tagging
identification
Owner’s training
By signing this form, the Contractor is certifying that he has personally witnessed completion of that item, and it is complete and complies with all respects to the drawings and
specifications.
All items are to be signed off on and submitted to MacMillan Associates Inc. before a final project walk-thru by the Engineer is requested. If the Engineer discovers items
incomplete and/or not in accordance with this checklist, the drawings, or the specifications, the Contractor will be backcharged for the Engineer’s time and expenses.
SC-3
2
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SYSTEMS COMPLETION
CHECKLIST
Inspection/Review Item
Notice
Required
Installing Contractor
Name
Date Owner’s Representative Remarks
Signature
Signature
Miscellaneous Requirements
As-built drawings of all systems At completion
of installation
Per specification
Operation and Maintenance
manuals
At completion
of installation
Per specification
One complete set of shop
drawings for Owner
At completion
of project
Per specification
Inspection, local authority
approvals, etc.
At completion
of project
By signing this form, the Contractor is certifying that he has personally witnessed completion of that item, and it is complete and complies with all respects to the drawings and
specifications.
All items are to be signed off on and submitted to MacMillan Associates Inc. before a final project walk-thru by the Engineer is requested. If the Engineer discovers items
incomplete and/or not in accordance with this checklist, the drawings, or the specifications, the Contractor will be backcharged for the Engineer’s time and expenses.
SC-3
3
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 26 01 00
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Basic electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 26, 27 & 28 Sections, in
addition to Division 1 - General Requirements.
B.
Information in this section is intended to clarify or make additions to the requirements set forth
in the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 of these specifications.
Any conflict between Division 26, 27 & 28 and those in the General Conditions or within the
Division 26 drawings, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 shall be brought to the attention
of the Architect/Engineer in writing as a request for addendum prior to the bid opening.
C.
Furnish all equipment, materials, articles, items, operations or methods listed, mentioned or
scheduled on drawings, these specifications, manufacturer’s installation instructions and include
all labor materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for complete installation and operation.
D.
All information contained in this section applies to all sections within Division 26 as it was part
of each section.
E.
Final walk-thru. Electrical Contractor shall submit in writing to the Architect’s office or the
Construction Manager advising that all of the Division 26, 27 & 28 work has been completed in
accordance with the plans and specifications. The intent is to acknowledge the Contractor is
ready for a walk-thru. Open items that are part of the required construction work should be
completed prior to the final walk-thru to avoid developing a so called construction completion
list. The engineer reserves the right to reschedule the final walk-thru as determined accordingly.
F.
Pre-bid questions. All pre-bid questions, clarifications, etc. must be submitted in writing to the
Architect Office or the Construction Manager. All phone calls, faxes or e-mails from bidders
and manufacturers, etc. directly received by the Engineers office during the bidding phase will be
deferred back to the Architect Office or the Construction Manager.
G.
Electrical Contractor shall review all of the project plans and specifications and not rely solely
on the electrical drawings to establish a project bid. Refer to the structural and mechanical
drawings for final mechanical equipment locations. Mechanical drawings shall govern over the
electrical drawing locations.
1.2
A.
LAYOUT OF THE WORK
Examine the site and all the drawings before proceeding with the layout and installation of this
work. Verify all door swings and clearances to cabinets, etc., before locating switch and outlet
boxes. Locate conduit, boxes, etc., essentially as shown on the drawings but in exact layout
determined on the job to suit actual conditions. Confer and cooperate with the other trades on
the job so all parts will be installed in proper relationship. Precise locations of parts to
coordinate with other work is the responsibility of the Contractor.
Work Order #
Page 1 of 5
Basic Electrical Requirements
26 01 00
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
B.
The Electrical Trades shall complete all cutting and patching for the electrical work, unless noted
or specified otherwise.
C.
Arrange exposed work as closely as practicable to wall or ceiling surfaces in an accurate
alignment. Locate concealed work so fittings, connectors and other projections will clear
surfaces. Exposed work is defined as non-finished spaces, such as mechanical / electrical rooms
or as indicated on architectural room schedules. All finished spaces, installation shall be
concealed. Refer to Architectural drawing for room finish schedules.
D.
During the bidding phase, if any design or discrepancy issues are discovered between the
electrical drawings, specifications and other project plans, the contractor shall notify the
Architect/Engineer. The intent is to resolve any issues during the bidding phase. For pertinent
issues, addendums will be issued accordingly. After entering into a contract, it shall be
considered there are no identified conflicts.
1.3
INTERFERENCES
A.
The Electrical Contractor bid shall not be based solely on the Electrical Plans and Specifications.
Contractor shall obtain and review all project documents. The Contractor, when directed, shall
make such changes or off-sets as required so that the work shall be properly located and
coordinated with the other trades. Failure to comply with the foregoing will not relieve
contractor’s responsibilities of making such changes. Such changes shall be completed at no
additional cost to the Owner.
B.
All changes in location of equipment, fixtures, distribution equipment, receptacles, etc., from
those shown on plans, shall be made without charge when directed by the Architect/Engineer
before installation. At this time, an agreement shall be made if such a change is an additional
cost to the owner.
C.
Any changes made, necessary through failure to make proper arrangement to avoid interference,
shall not be considered as extra.
D.
The Electrical Contractor shall cooperate with those performing work under other divisions in
his preparation of interference drawings, to the extent that the location of plumbing piping,
heating piping, and/or ventilation ducts, with respect to the installation of other trades, shall be
mutually agreed on by those performing work under other divisions.
E.
In the event the described work on the drawings doesn’t match requirements described in the
specification, the more stringent shall be provided.
F.
Contractor shall carefully review the code sections pertaining to safe working clearances to avoid
piping, ducts interferences and other equipment. Install the electrical equipment to meet Code
requirements. Adjust the locations shown as required.
1.4
A.
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
All materials and equipment furnished for installation on this project shall be new and in strict
accordance with this specification. All packaged materials shall be delivered in the original
containers which show the manufacturer’s name and the identifying designations as to size,
Work Order #
Page 2 of 5
Basic Electrical Requirements
26 01 00
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
quality, etc. Materials delivered to the job in unmarked or mutilated packages will be ordered to
be removed from the site at once. Materials or equipment judged as “damaged” by the Architect
or Engineer shall be removed from the job. All electrical equipment shall bear the Underwriter’s
Label.
B.
All work shall be performed in a professional manner under the supervision of a Contractor’s
manager. The project manager shall be considered the main point of contact for the
Architect/Owner’s daily communication.
C.
Should any dispute arise as to the quality or fitness of the materials or workmanship, Architect,
Owner, Engineer and Electrical Contractor shall mutually agree work is non-acceptable and shall
be reworked at no additional cost to the Owner.
D.
Division 26, 27 & 28 equipment schedule descriptions shall govern if it is found that the
manufacturer’s catalog numbering shown on the drawing is not current, or changed by the
manufacturer without notification. Division 26, 27 & 28 Contractor shall notify the
Architect/Engineer with any conflicts during the bidding phase to get clarifications. After
entering into a Contract, it shall be considered the equipment schedules provide the information
to meet the intended specifications for quality and performance.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
1.7
GUARANTEES
All equipment and work performed under Division 26, 27 & 28 shall be guaranteed for one (1)
year from time of substantial completion of project, unless directed otherwise in Division 1.
VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES
The Architect/Engineer will only accept voluntary alternate as a bid deduct. Alternate must
maintain the same level of quality to meet the design intent. Voluntary alternates must be
submitted with the bid for review by the Owner. Failure to comply will be no reason to accept
any voluntary alternates after entering into a contract.
OWNERS ACCEPTANCE OF EQUIPMENT
A.
Refer to Division 1.
B.
Upon the Owner’s written acceptance, the Electrical Contractor’s guarantee period shall begin
and the Owner shall accept the responsibility for operation and maintenance and the Contractor’s
liability shall be limited to the conditions covered in the guarantee as described in these
specifications.
1.8
A.
1.9
A.
REFERENCES
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 Electrical Code Rules Part 8,
2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
SUBMITTALS
Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
Work Order #
Page 3 of 5
Basic Electrical Requirements
26 01 00
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
B.
Electrical distribution submittal shall include cut sheets for each piece of equipment. Written
description is not acceptable.
C.
Bill of materials shall be submitted as part of O&M Manual. Bill of Materials is not considered
a shop drawing.
1.10
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable Building Code.
B.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
C.
Equipment: U.L. tested and approved for its purpose.
D.
The Electrical Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and inspection fees. Copies of the
Certificate of Inspection are to be provided to the Owner after final inspection and approval from
authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
State of Michigan, Bureau of Fire Services.
F.
Equipment: Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical
Code, 2014 State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code
requirements.
G.
Life Safety NFPA 101 – The State of Michigan current adopted edition.
H.
Fire Alarm Code NFPA 72 – The State of Michigan current adopted edition.
I.
State of Michigan Uniform Energy Code.
J.
ASHRAE 90.1 2007 Edition
1.11
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Install Work in locations shown on drawings, unless prevented by project conditions.
B.
All bidders shall personally inspect the site and acquaint themselves with all existing conditions
involved in execution of this contract, and make all necessary measurements. No “extra” will be
considered for additional work required because of bidder’s failure to do so.
C.
Arc flash warning labels. Provide arc flash generic warning labels in accordance with 2011 NEC
Section 110 requirements.
1.12
A.
RECORD DRAWINGS
The Electrical Contractor shall furnish as-constructed drawings, including all Addendums,
Bulletins and associated Field Directed Changes included as part of the record drawings.
Work Order #
Page 4 of 5
Basic Electrical Requirements
26 01 00
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.13
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Verbal instruction and written operational instructions are to be given on all equipment and
systems under this contract. A time is to be scheduled with the Architect/Engineer and Owner
for these instructions and a time submitted in writing for instructions at the facility.
B.
Two (2) bound sets of Operating and Maintenance Manuals are to be submitted to the
Architect/Engineer for approval. Manuals are to include complete parts list and maintenance
procedures as well as operating instructions on all equipment supplied under Division 26, 27 &
28.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #
Page 5 of 5
Basic Electrical Requirements
26 01 00
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 26 02 00
MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Electrical demolition per plans and specifications.
B.
Conduit supports.
1.2
A.
RELATED SECTIONS
All drawings and specification sections apply to work in this section. Furnish all items, articles,
materials, equipment, operations or methods that are mentioned, listed or scheduled on drawings
or are in this specification including all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous
incidentals necessary and/or required for the completion of this project. The work covered under
this section of the specifications is in no way complete within itself but is supplementary to the
entire specification and drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Electrical Contractor shall examine the project documents and visit the site as they deem
necessary prior to submitting a bid. Do not rely solely on the Electrical Plans for all demolition
requirements. Review all Project Documents prior to submitting a bid.
B.
The demolition information is provided to assist with labor costs associated with the electrical
systems removal. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible to confirm all quantities and the
information provided.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
PREPARATION
Confirm with the Architect’s Office and/or Construction Manager Project Schedules and review
the Architectural, Structural and Mechanical drawings prior to commencing demolition.
DEMOLITION
Remove the electrical distribution equipment, associated conduit, surface raceway. Remove the
fire alarm. Remove surface mounted conduit, boxes, and non-metallic raceway. Electrical
Contractors are responsible to confirm all quantities and information provided.
Work Order #
Page 1 of 2
Minor Electrical Demolition for Remodeling
26 02 00
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
B.
Electrical Trades shall transport all of the electrical salvaged materials to the Owner and include
all transportation costs.
C.
Electrical Trades shall remove all of the existing electrical branch panelboards as noted,
scheduled and shown on the drawings and specifications. Confirm all outages with the Owner to
starting the replacement work.
D.
Electrical Contractors are responsible to confirm all demolition quantities. Make pre-bid site
visit arrangements as deemed necessary.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #
Page 2 of 2
Minor Electrical Demolition for Remodeling
26 02 00
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 26 05 19
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Building wire and cable.
B.
Non-metallic sheath cable.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
RELATED SECTIONS
All drawings and specification sections apply to work in this section. Furnish all items, articles,
materials, equipment, operations or methods that are mentioned, listed or scheduled on drawings
or are in this specification including all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous
incidentals necessary and/or required for the completion of this project. The work covered under
this section of the specifications is in no way complete within itself but is supplementary to the
entire specification and drawings.
REFERENCES
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B.
Conductor sizes are based on copper.
C.
Routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Field route as required to best
suit Project Conditions.
D.
Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and only a load destination is shown, determine
exact routing and lengths required.
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate Work under provisions of Division 1.
B.
Determine required separation between cable and other work.
C.
Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work.
1.6
A.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
Work Order #
Page 1 of 3
Building Wire and Cable
26 05 19
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B.
Conductor: Copper.
C.
Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D.
Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THW, THHN/THWN.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B.
Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
3.2
A.
3.3
PREPARATION
Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
C.
Use conductor size not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
D.
Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 100 feet.
E.
Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet.
F.
Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
G.
Protect exposed cable from damage.
H.
Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support
cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels.
I.
Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
J.
Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
Work Order #
Page 2 of 3
Building Wire and Cable
26 05 19
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
K.
Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
L.
Splices are not permitted.
M.
All power wiring shall be installed in conduit.
3.4
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53.
B.
Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform field inspection and testing to assure proper operation.
B.
Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
C.
Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's
recommended values.
D.
Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #
Page 3 of 3
Building Wire and Cable
26 05 19
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Grounding electrodes and conductors.
B.
Equipment grounding conductors.
C.
Bonding.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
1.6
RELATED SECTIONS
All drawings and specification sections apply to work in this section. Furnish all items, articles,
materials, equipment, operations or methods that are mentioned, listed or scheduled on drawings
or are in this specification including all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous
incidentals necessary and/or required for the completion of this project. The work covered under
this section of the specifications is in no way complete within itself but is supplementary to the
entire specification and drawings.
REFERENCES
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Resistance: Meet the NEC Code requirements.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ROD ELECTRODE
A.
Material: Copper-clad steel or copper-weld type.
B.
Diameter: as scheduled on the drawings.
Work Order #
Page 1 of 2
Grounding and Bonding
26 05 26
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
C.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
2.4
Length: as scheduled on the drawings.
MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
As scheduled on the drawings.
EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
As scheduled on the drawings.
WIRE
A.
Material: As scheduled on the drawings.
B.
Foundation Electrodes: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
C.
Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
EXAMINATION
Verify site soil conditions before driving rod electrodes.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to
achieve specified resistance to ground.
C.
Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.
D.
Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide a separate grounding conductor for lighting and
power circuits as noted or specified on the drawings.
E.
Complete the grounding conductor to the building foundation rebar in accordance with 2011
NEC 250-52 (3) requirements.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper
installation.
B.
Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in
accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall- of-potential
method.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #
Page 2 of 2
Grounding and Bonding
26 05 26
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 26 05 29
SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Conduit and equipment supports.
B.
Anchors and fasteners.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
All drawings and specification sections apply to work in this section. Furnish all items, articles,
materials, equipment, operations or methods that are mentioned, listed or scheduled on drawings
or are in this specification including all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous
incidentals necessary and/or required for the completion of this project. The work covered under
this section of the specifications is in no way complete within itself but is supplementary to the
entire specification and drawings.
REFERENCES
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance.
B.
Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of
equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products.
C.
Anchors and Fasteners:
1.
Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors.
2.
Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps.
3.
Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.
4.
Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow
wall fasteners.
Work Order #
Page 1 of 2
Supporting Devices
26 05 29
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
5.
6.
7.
Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors.
Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Attachments of electrical equipment to structural members are the responsibility of the installing
trade. Structural members shall not be field cut, welded or otherwise modified without approval
of the Architect/Engineer. Attachment to steel joist shall be made at panel points whenever
possible.
Structural members shall not be overloaded as a result of attachments.
Attachment/equipment loading for all trades resulting in total load greater than an equivalent
uniform 5 psf for any member shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. Electrical
Trades are still responsible for design, layout, and fabrication and installation of electrical
supports and support attachment methods. Electrical Trades shall submit attachment methods to
the Structural Engineer for review.
B.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.
D.
Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.
E.
Do not use powder-actuated anchors.
F.
Do not drill or cut structural members without permission from Architect/Engineer.
G.
Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon
head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock
washers under all nuts.
H.
Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
I.
Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in
hollow partitions.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #
Page 2 of 2
Supporting Devices
26 05 29
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 26 05 33.13
CONDUIT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Metal conduit.
B.
Flexible metal conduit.
C.
Liquidtight flexible non-metallic conduit.
D.
Electrical metallic tubing.
E.
Electrical nonmetallic tubing.
F.
Fittings and conduit bodies.
G.
Flexible metal conduit.
1.2
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.
1.3
A.
1.4
RELATED SECTIONS
All drawings and specification sections apply to work in this section. Furnish all items, articles,
materials, equipment, operations or methods that are mentioned, listed or scheduled on drawings
or are in this specification including all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous
incidentals necessary and/or required for the completion of this project. The work covered under
this section of the specifications is in no way complete within itself but is supplementary to the
entire specification and drawings.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B.
ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
C.
ANSI C80.3 - Rigid Aluminum Conduit.
D.
ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies.
Work Order #
Page 1 of 5
Conduit
26 05 33.13
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
E.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2011 National Electrical Code, 2011
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
F.
NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Intermediate Metal Conduit.
G.
NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).
H.
NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
1.7
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Submit under provisions of Division 1.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site.
B.
Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
C.
Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade.
appropriate covering.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B.
Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
C.
Conduit routing shown is diagrammatic, field route conduit to avoid interferences.
1.9
Provide
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
Minimum Size: ¾ inch unless otherwise specified.
Work Order #
Page 2 of 5
Conduit
26 05 33.13
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
B.
Dry Locations:
1.
2.
2.2
Concealed: Use electrical metallic tubing.
Exposed: Use electrical metallic tubing.
METAL CONDUIT
A.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI C80.5.
C.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid Steel.
D.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
2.3
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A.
Description: Interlocked steel construction.
B.
Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2.4
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A.
Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
B.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; set screw type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
C.
Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis
hangers, and split hangers.
D.
Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide
space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
E.
Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 26 05 29.
F.
Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary
supports.
G.
Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
H.
Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
Work Order #
Page 3 of 5
Conduit
26 05 33.13
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
I.
Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls or building centerlines.
J.
Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. Install
metal conduit sleeves or fire rated assembly in all fire rated wall as identified on the electrical or
architectural life safety plans.
K.
Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
L.
Do not cross conduits in slab.
M.
Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
N.
Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104
degrees F.
O.
Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
P.
Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
Q.
Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to
make sharp changes in direction, as around beams.
R.
Provide suitable pull wire in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
S.
Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
T.
Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 26.
U.
Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 53.
V.
Provide conduit sleeves in walls to meet the project requirements for power and low voltage
cable installation. Provide additional conduit sleeves above those specifically shown for a
complete installation. Firestop the conduits passing thru fire rated walls. In-line conduit fire
stop devices are another acceptable method in coordination with NEC Article 300.21. Electrical
Contractor shall be responsible to review the Architectural Life Safety drawings for fire rated
wall locations.
W.
Contractor shall provide separate raceway for the emergency power distribution system.
X.
Electrical Contractor shall identify emergency power. Identify all of the junction box cover
plates with panelboard source ID and circuit number(s). Provide engraved label. Handwritten on
the junction box cover plate is not acceptable.
3.2
A.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials
and methods consistent with facility standards or this project specification. Contractor is
responsible to review the Architectural drawings to determine fire rated locations.
Work Order #
Page 4 of 5
Conduit
26 05 33.13
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
B.
Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with
pitch pocket or detail to match roof type specified.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #
Page 5 of 5
Conduit
26 05 33.13
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 26 05 53
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Nameplates and labels.
B.
Wire and cable markers.
C.
Conduit markers.
D.
Labeling methods and standards.
E.
Conductor color coding and identification.
F.
Panelboard directory.
G.
Arc flash warning labels.
H.
Electrical distribution equipment.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
RELATED SECTIONS
All drawings and specification sections apply to work in this section. Furnish all items, articles,
materials, equipment, operations or methods that are mentioned, listed or scheduled on drawings
or are in this specification including all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous
incidentals necessary and/or required for the completion of this project. The work covered under
this section of the specifications is in no way complete within itself but is supplementary to the
entire specification and drawings.
REFERENCES
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and shown.
Work Order #
Page 1 of 4
Electrical Identification
26 05 53
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.5
FACILITY STANDARDS
A.
Refer also to specific labeling and identification requirements on the drawings in addition to
these specifications.
B.
Inspect labeling standards to confirm facility standards.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
Nameplates:
1.
2.
Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background for normal
power to match facility standard. Refer to labeling methods and standards for sizes.
Emergency power panels and associated equipment shall be white letters on red.
B.
Locations:
1.
Each electrical distribution panelboard, switchboard and power panel.
2.
Each starter.
3.
Each disconnect.
4.
Emergency circuit junction box cover plates.
C.
Nameplate size minimum 1”x3” or match existing.
1.
Match facility standards.
2.2
WIRE MARKERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Brady or equal.
B.
Description: Tape type wire markers.
C.
Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each
load connection.
2.3
CONDUIT MARKERS
A.
Emergency raceway or specialty systems.
B.
Legend:
1.
2.
Normal Power Supply Panel Feeder: Indicate panel being fed and from where.
(LPM
fed from DP4)
Emergency Power Supply Panel Feeder: Emergency Power Supply LS, CB, EB
respectively. (i.e. LSIA, CBIC, EBDP)
Work Order #
Page 2 of 4
Electrical Identification
26 05 53
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
2.4
A.
LABELING METHODS AND STANDARDS
Engraved Labels
1. All electrical panels, disconnect switches, and terminal cabinets shall be permanently
identified using engraved labels. These labels shall be secured with double face type or
mechanically fastened in applications where the tape may have a tendency to fail.
2. Normal power fed systems shall have white labels with black lettering. Emergency power
fed systems shall have red labels with white lettering.
3. Lettering sizes may vary due to space constraints or to distinguish between main versus
branch systems. Sizes should be consistent throughout the project, use the following
guidelines:
Switchboard or Panelboard Main Label:
1” high minimum
Switchboard or Panelboard Branches
1/2" high minimum
Starters, Disconnects
1/2" high minimum
Manual Motor Starters
1/4" high minimum
4. All labels shall identify where panel or equipment is fed from. Ex (panel A fed from MDP)
2.5
CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING AND IDENTIFICATION
1. Feeder phase conductors shall be identified as to phase and operating voltage using colored
tape as follows:
480 Volt
120/208 Volt
Phase A
yellow
black
Phase B
brown
red
Phase C
orange
blue
Neutral
gray
white
Ground
green
green
2. Conductors from #18 up through #10 shall have colored insulating jackets to match the color
code and phasing scheme as described above for feeders. Receptacle and lighting circuit
conductors shall be #12 minimum for 15 or 20 amp circuits. Conductors #18 through #14
shall only be used for control circuits with colored jackets and wire numbers correlated to
each system accordingly.
3. Spare conductors shall be clearly identified as such through color, labels, tags, etc.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Work Order #
Page 3 of 4
Electrical Identification
26 05 53
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
3.1
A.
3.2
PREPARATION
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
APPLICATION
A.
Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.
B.
Secure nameplate to equipment front using adhesive.
C.
Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.
D.
Contractor shall review the drawings to confirm all label schemes or ID requirements listed or
noted on the drawings. Review mechanical drawings for equipment ID designation to provide a
ID tag that corresponds to the mechanical equipment.
E.
Provide arc flash generic warning label on all electrical distribution equipment in accordance
with NEC 2014 requirements.
F.
Panelboard, switchboards, transformers, etc. shall include their source of power included in
nameplate label. (i.e. LPA feed from PP2)
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #
Page 4 of 4
Electrical Identification
26 05 53
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 26 22 13
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Dry type two winding transformers.
B.
Dry type isolation transformers.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
All drawings and specification sections apply to work in this section. Furnish all items, articles,
materials, equipment, operations or methods that are mentioned, listed or scheduled on drawings
or are in this specification including all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous
incidentals necessary and/or required for the completion of this project. The work covered under
this section of the specifications is in no way complete within itself but is supplementary to the
entire specification and drawings.
REFERENCES
A.
NEMA ST 1 - Specialty Transformers
B.
NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications.
C.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide submittal as listed in Section 26 01 00.
B.
Product Data: Provide outline and support point dimensions of enclosures and accessories, unit
weight, voltage, kVA, and impedance ratings and characteristics, tap configurations, insulation
system type, and rated temperature rise.
C.
Test Reports: Indicate loss data, efficiency at 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent rated load, and sound
level.
D.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F.
Submittal shall match the drawing layout for switch and/or breaker arrangement. One-line
diagram shall be edited to match design drawings.
Work Order #
Page 1 of 4
Dry Type Transformers
26 22 13
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
C.
Department of Energy 2010 ruling 10 CFR Part 431 for transformer efficient levels.
D.
Transformer shall be UL listed or labeled to meet the requirements of 2014 National Electric
Code, State of Michigan Electric Code and local authority having jurisdiction
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store, protect, and handle products to site.
B.
Deliver transformers individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids.
C.
Accept transformers on site. Inspect for damage.
D.
Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or
heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
E.
Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for
the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components, enclosure,
and finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
TWO-WINDING TRANSFORMERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
As scheduled on the drawings.
B.
Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air cooled dry type transformers, ratings as
indicated.
C.
Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows:
1.
1-15 kVA: Class 185 with 115 degrees C rise, and aluminum windings, EE type TPI
rated.
2.
16-500 kVA: Class 220 with 115 degrees C rise, and aluminum windings, EE type TPI
rated.
D.
Case temperature: Do not exceed 40 degrees C rise above ambient at warmest point.
E.
Winding Taps:
1.
Transformers Less than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full capacity taps
on primary winding.
2.
Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20.
F.
Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20. Maximum sound levels are as follows:
1.
1-5 kVA: 40 dB.
Work Order #
Page 2 of 4
Dry Type Transformers
26 22 13
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
6-25 kVA: 45 dB.
26-150 kVA: 50 dB.
151-225 kVA: 55 dB.
226-300 kVA: 55 dB.
301-500 kVA: 60 dB.
G.
Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV for transformers less than 300 kVA, 30 kV for transformers 300
kVA and larger.
H.
Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding
strap.
I.
Mounting: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting, except transformers larger than 75 kVA,
suitable for floor or trapeze mounting.
J.
Coil Conductors: Continuous windings with terminations brazed or welded.
K.
Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.
L.
Nameplate: Include transformer connection data and overload capacity based on rated allowable
temperature rise.
2.2
ISOLATION TRANSFORMERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Square D or equal.
B.
Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air cooled dry type shielded isolation
transformers, ratings as indicated.
C.
Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows:
1.
10-15 kVA: Class 185 with 115 degrees C rise and aluminum windings, EE type TPI
rated.
2.
16-500 kVA: Class 220 with 150 degrees C rise and aluminum windings, EE type TPI
rated.
3.
Case temperature: Do not exceed 50 degrees C rise above ambient at warmest point.
D.
Winding Taps:
1.
Transformers Less than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below rated voltage, full capacity taps
on primary winding.
2.
Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20.
E.
Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20. Maximum sound levels are as follows:
1.
1-5 kVA: 40 dB.
2.
6-25 kVA: 45 dB.
3.
26-150 kVA: 50 dB.
4.
151-225 kVA: 55 dB.
5.
226-300 kVA: 55 dB.
6.
301-500 kVA: 60 dB.
Work Order #
Page 3 of 4
Dry Type Transformers
26 22 13
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
F.
Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV for transformers less than 300 kVA, 30 kV for transformers 300
kVA and larger.
G.
Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding
strap.
H.
Provide electrostatic winding shield with separate insulated grounding connection.
I.
Coil Conductors: Continuous windings with terminations brazed or welded.
J.
Enclosure: NEMA ST 20, Type 1 ventilated. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.
K.
Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.
L.
Nameplate: Include transformer connection data.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
EXAMINATION
Verify that surfaces are suitable for installing transformer supports.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Set transformer plumb and level.
C.
Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 26 05 33, for the final wiring connection to
the transformer. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.
D.
Mount transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for isolating the transformer noise from
the building structure as noted or shown.
E.
Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
F.
Use a trapeze type transformer support unless noted otherwise. Use ½” rod and steel members
suitable for the weight. No welding to roof steel members. Use beam clamp for rod attachment.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection and testing will be performed to assure proper operation.
B.
Check for damage and tight connections prior to energizing transformer.
C.
Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #
Page 4 of 4
Dry Type Transformers
26 22 13
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Distribution panelboards.
B.
Branch circuit panelboards.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
All drawings and specification sections apply to work in this section. Furnish all items, articles,
materials, equipment, operations or methods that are mentioned, listed or scheduled on drawings
or are in this specification including all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous
incidentals necessary and/or required for the completion of this project. The work covered under
this section of the specifications is in no way complete within itself but is supplementary to the
entire specification and drawings.
REFERENCES
A.
NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
B.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
C.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.
D.
NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
E.
NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards
Rated 600 Volts or Less.
F.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide submittal as listed in Section 26 01 00.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,
integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
D.
Panelboard submittal shall match drawing schedule arrangement. Submittal shall custom edit
schedules to match design drawings.
Work Order #
Page 1 of 4
Panelboards
26 24 16
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.5
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B.
Record actual locations of Products; indicate actual branch circuit arrangement.
1.6
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B.
Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement
parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
1.8
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Provide maintenance materials under provisions of Division 1.
B.
Provide two of each panelboard key.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
As scheduled on the drawings.
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type or fusible switch type per plan.
B.
Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard.
C.
Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed
knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover
with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips: Designed to
accommodate Class R fuses.
D.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1. Provide circuit breakers with integral thermal and
instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for
air conditioning equipment branch circuits.
E.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Current Limiters: NEMA AB 1. Provide circuit breakers
with replaceable current limiting elements, in addition to integral thermal and instantaneous
magnetic trip in each pole.
Work Order #
Page 2 of 4
Panelboards
26 24 16
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
F.
Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1. Provide circuit breakers with
integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically
resetting current limiting elements in each pole.
G.
Provide circuit breaker accessory trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated.
H.
Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with concealed trim clamps, hinge and latch. Provide
hinged door with flush lock. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
2.3
A.
2.4
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
As scheduled on the drawings.
FUSES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Bussman, or equal.
B.
Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: Dual element, current limiting, time delay, one-time fuse, 600
volt.
C.
Fuses 601 Amperes and Larger: Current limiting, time delay one time fuse, 600 volt, UL Class
L.
D.
Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Height: 6 ft to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 ft with bottom no more than 4
inches above floor.
C.
Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
D.
Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect
circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.
E.
Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 05 53.
F.
Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling.
Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE.
3.2
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Field inspection and testing will be performed to assure proper operation.
Work Order #
Page 3 of 4
Panelboards
26 24 16
Consumers Energy
ICS Test Lab
Parnall Complex
B.
Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard
to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multiwire branch circuits.
C.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage,
and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers,
fusible switches, and fuses.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #
Page 4 of 4
Panelboards
26 24 16
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall switches.
B.
Wall dimmers.
C.
Receptacles.
D.
Device plates.
E.
Floor box service fittings.
F.
Poke-through service fittings.
G.
Boiler Room emergency stop station.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
All drawings and specification sections apply to work in this section. Furnish all items, articles,
materials, equipment, operations or methods that are mentioned, listed or scheduled on drawings
or are in this specification including all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous
incidentals necessary and/or required for the completion of this project. The work covered under
this section of the specifications is in no way complete within itself but is supplementary to the
entire specification and drawings.
REFERENCES
A.
NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
B.
NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements.
C.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
D.
ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act - As amended.
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.
Work Order #
Wiring Devices
26 27 26-1
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
WALL SWITCHES
Manufacturers:
1.
Pass & Seymore, Hubbell, Leviton or equal.
B.
Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-Duty, AC only general-use snap switch.
C.
Body and Handle: Color shall be white, ivory, brown or gray as advised by the Architect.
D.
Ratings:
E.
1.
Voltage: 120/277 volts, AC.
2.
Current: 20 amperes.
Boiler Emergency Power Off
1.
2.2
A.
Provide EPO station as scheduled on the drawings.
WALL DIMMERS
Manufacturers:
1.
Lutron, Leviton, Hubbell, or equal.
B.
Description: NEMA WD 1; dimmer type as indicated on drawings or in schedule.
C.
Provide 0-10 volt electronic dimmers for dimming LED light fixtures.
2.3
A.
RECEPTACLES
Manufacturers:
1.
Hubbell, Pass & Seymore, Leviton, or equal
B.
Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-duty specification grade duplex receptacle.
C.
Device Body: Color shall be ivory, white, brown or gray as advised by the Architect.
D.
Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.
E.
Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20.
F.
Emergency receptacles shall be red with matching cover plate.
G.
GFCI Receptacle: Convenience duplex receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to
meet regulatory requirements.
H.
Damp and wet location receptacles shall be rated “WR”.
Work Order #
Wiring Devices
26 27 26-2
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
I.
2.4
Isolated Ground Receptacle.
1.
Use the orange embossed triangle type device body for all finished spaces.
2.
Orange device body is acceptable for non-finished spaces.
WALL PLATES
A.
Decorative Cover Plate: Smooth nylon. Color shall be white, ivory, brown or gray as advised by
the Architect.
B.
Use stainless steel cover for food service areas, and healthcare facilities.
C.
Use “in use” weather proof and extra duty rated covers at exterior locations as indicated on the
drawings to meet 2014 NEC Section 406.
D.
Provide blank metal cover plates on abandoned boxes.
E.
Provide stamped metal cover plate for unfinished spaces.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
FLOOR MOUNTED SERVICE FITTINGS
As scheduled on the drawings.
BLODGETT OVEN
Use Pass and Seymour 2095 for GFI outlet where Blodgett ovens are schedule on the food
service equipment list.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
B.
Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
C.
Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly.
D.
Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
wiring devices.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B.
Clean debris from outlet boxes.
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION
Install devices plumb and level.
Work Order #
Wiring Devices
26 27 26-3
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
B.
Install switches with OFF position down.
C.
Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as
instructed by manufacturer.
D.
Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
E.
Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.
F.
Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper or branch circuit
equipment grounding conductor where specified.
G.
Install plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
H.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
I.
Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above
accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
J.
Install protective rings on active flush cover service fittings.
K.
Install the boiler emergency shutdown switch at each main boiler room area entrance.
3.4
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Confirm with architectural drawings for counter casework, etc. details for wiring devices
mounting heights.
B.
Install wall switch 48 inches to top of box above finished floor.
C.
Install convenience receptacle 16 inches to bottom of box above finished floor.
D.
Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above backsplash of counter.
E.
Install dimmer 48 inches to top of box above finished floor.
F.
18” mounting height is lieu of the 16” minimum specified is acceptable pending masonry course
lines.
G.
Electrical Contractor shall obtain a copy of the latest accepted Michigan Barrier Free Design
Manual for additional mounting requirements.
H.
Refer to all other sections of the specification, drawings, and Architectural drawing for specific
mounting requirements for clocks, receptacles shown in counters, work stations. Do not rely
solely on the electrical drawings for this information. Division 26, 27 & 28 Contractor shall be
responsible to review all project documentation and obtain all required information from the
district.
I.
Refer to section 283100 and drawing notes for fire alarm device mounting heights.
Work Order #
Wiring Devices
26 27 26-4
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect each wiring device for defects.
B.
Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
C.
Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
D.
Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
E.
Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
3.6
A.
ADJUSTING
Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
END OF SECTION
Work Order #
Wiring Devices
26 27 26-5
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 26 28 13
FUSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
Fuses.
RELATED SECTIONS
All drawings and specification sections apply to work in this section. Furnish all items, articles,
materials, equipment, operations or methods that are mentioned, listed or scheduled on drawings
or are in this specification including all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous
incidentals necessary and/or required for the completion of this project. The work covered under
this section of the specifications is in no way complete within itself but is supplementary to the
entire specification and drawings.
REFERENCES
A.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
B.
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide submittal as listed in Section 26 01 00.
B.
Product Data:
curves.
1.5
A.
1.6
Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics including time-current
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Record actual fuse sizes.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Bussman or equal.
Work Order #
Page 1 of 2
Fuses
26 28 13
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
2.2
FUSE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated.
B.
Voltage: Provide fuses with voltage rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage.
C.
Main Service Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L (time delay).
2.3
A.
CLASS RK1 (TIME DELAY) CURRENT LIMITING FUSES
Manufacturers:
1. Bussman or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fuses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install fuse with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.
C.
Install spare fuse cabinet as shown on the drawing.
END OF SECTION
MAI 2016-3401
Work Order #
Page 2 of 2
Fuses
26 28 13
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 26 28 16
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fusible switches.
B.
Nonfusible switches.
C.
Fuses.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.
B.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
C.
UL 198C - High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type.
D.
UL 198E - Class R Fuses.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide submittal as listed in Section 26 01 00.
B.
Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Square D.
Work Order #
Page 1 of 2
Enclosed Switches
26 28 16
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
2.2
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A.
Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type Heavy Duty load interrupter enclosed knife
switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in
ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R
fuses.
B.
Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type Heavy Duty load interrupter enclosed knife
switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in
ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C.
Enclosures: NEMA KS 1.
1.
Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
2.
Exterior Locations: Type 3R.
D.
Disconnect switches serving the elevator main power must be a heavy duty type to meet the State
of Michigan Elevator Code.
2.3
FUSES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Bussman or equal.
B.
Description: Dual element, current limiting, time delay, one-time fuse, 600 volt.
C.
Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install disconnect switches where indicated.
B.
Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
C.
Provide adhesive label on inside door of each switch indicating UL fuse class and size for
replacement.
D.
Contractor shall confirm final elevator main power requirements to properly size the disconnect
switch and fusing.
E.
Electrical` Contractor shall be responsible to review the mechanical equipment schedules to
determine if any factory installed switches are scheduled and noted as part of the equipment to
minimize duplication by electrical trades.
F.
Furnish and install a separate lockable fusible disconnect switch for the elevator car fan and
light.
G.
Furnish and install a lockable fusible disconnect switch for each boiler main incoming power
disconnecting means to meet the State’s Boiler Code Division requirements.
MAI 2016-3401
END OF SECTION
Work Order #
Page 2 of 2
Enclosed Switches
26 28 16
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
SECTION 26 51 13
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
Interior luminaires per schedule.
RELATED SECTIONS
All drawings and specification sections apply to work in this section. Furnish all items, articles,
materials, equipment, operations or methods that are mentioned, listed or scheduled on drawings
or are in this specification including all labor, equipment, materials and miscellaneous
incidentals necessary and/or required for the completion of this project. The work covered under
this section of the specifications is in no way complete within itself but is supplementary to the
entire specification and drawings.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High-Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps Classification of Beam Patterns.
B.
ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications.
C.
ANSI C82.4 - Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple
Supply Type).
D.
NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.
E.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
F.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code, current adopted edition.
G.
Michigan Uniform Energy Code, current adopted edition.
H.
ASHRAE 90.1 2007 Edition.
I.
LED Standards LM 79 and LM 80.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Provide submittal as listed in Section 26 01 00.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard
product of the manufacturer.
C.
Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
Work Order #
Interior Luminaires
26 51 13-1
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of 2012 Michigan Building Code, 2014 National Electrical Code, 2014
State of Michigan Code Rules Part 8, 2003 ICC/ANSI 117.1 and local code requirements.
B.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 101.
C.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
D.
Michigan Uniform Energy Code, current adopted edition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
LUMINAIRES
Furnish Products as scheduled on the drawings.
BALLASTS AND LED DRIVERS
A.
As scheduled on the drawings.
B.
Ballasts and LED drivers shall include a factory disconnecting means in accordance with 2014
NEC
410-130G.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant
length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
B.
Support luminaires independent of ceiling framing.
C.
Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
D.
Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines
and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
E.
Exposed Grid Ceilings: Provide auxiliary members spanning ceiling grid members to support
surface mounted luminaires. Fasten surface mounted luminaires to ceiling grid members using
bolts, screws, rivets, or suitable clips at a minimum of (4) points of attachment to prevent
movement.
F.
Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
G.
Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory
requirements for fire rating.
Work Order #
Interior Luminaires
26 51 13-2
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
H.
Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place at a minimum of (4) points of
attachment to prevent movement.
I.
Install wall mounted luminaires at height as indicated on Drawings and/or architectural drawings.
J.
Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
K.
Connect luminaires and exit signs to power station/invertor.
L.
Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for
temperature conditions within luminaire.
M.
Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
N.
Install specified lamps in each luminaire.
3.2
A.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and
operation.
ADJUSTING
A.
Contract Closeout: Division 1: Adjusting installed work.
B.
Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated or as directed.
C.
Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work.
B.
Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
C.
Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
D.
Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.5
A.
3.6
DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
Contract Closeout: Division 1: Demonstrating installed work.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Contract Closeout: Protecting installed work.
B.
Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
Work Order #
Interior Luminaires
26 51 13-3
Consumers Energy
Macomb Service Center
Elevator Modernization
3.7
A.
SCHEDULES
Refer to Drawings.
END OF SECTION
Work Order #
Interior Luminaires
26 51 13-4